Highlights Cataloging with AACR2 and MARC21 Second Edition ... · Highlights Cataloging with AACR2 and MARC21 (9/22/2005) —Update 2, Sep 2005 1 Cataloging with AACR2 and MARC21

Highlights

Cataloging with AACR2 and MARC21 (9/22/2005) —Update 2, Sep 2005 1

Cataloging with AACR2 and MARC21 Second Edition, 2004

September 2005 Update 2

Tag/Rule Addition/Change Page # Wording clarified 1.3-4 New cataloging tool added 2.1-2 Autocat instructions changed 2.3-4 000 Hint Missing space added to 000 and last

digit '3' added to position count in example

Title changed: "Standards and Format" to "Format and Standards"

3.0-1-2

000 BLvl Importance of data added 3.0-1-2 000 07 BLvl 'a' Definition clarified 3.0-3-4 000 17 ELvl Confusing characters removed 3.0-5-6 006 Hint Clarifying words added to first

paragraph Missing word added to last paragraph on p. 10

3.0-9-10

006 SR + VD

Line removed below each table 3.0-17-18

006 SE Pos 13-15 Position numbering fixed 3.0-21-22 007 SR Pos 12 Confusing word ('recording') deleted 3.0-29-30 007 VD Template image updated 3.0-35-36 008 BK—BLv1 'a' Definition clarified 3.0-43-44 008 ER—BLv1 'a' Definition clarified 3.0-49-50 008 SR—Char pos 33 'n' Definition clarified 3.0-53-54 008 SR—BLv1 'a' Definition clarified 3.0-55-56 008 VD—BLv1 'a' Definition clarified 3.0-61-62 008 SE—BLv1 'b' Definition clarified 3.0-67-68 020—Hint Rewritten to add 13 digit ISBN

explanation 3.0-77-78

020—A1.8E1 Hint Explanation and example removed to save space

020$a—Hint Rewritten to clarify use of $a 3.0-79-80 020$z—Hint Words changed to add references to

13 digit ISBNs 3.0-81-82

028—L6.7B19 MCRI rule is now an LCRI rule 028—Hint Hint added 028—A6.7B19 Wording clarified 028—L6.7B19 Wording clarified

3.0-89-90

028—MCB6.7B19 + Hint Moved by LC to LCRI L6.7B19 041 Coding table—Related fields 500 Lang removed 3.0-97-98 041$h Coding table—Related fields 500 Lang removed 3.0-99-100 1XX—A21.23 Hint Reference to additional information

added 3.1-5-6

1XX—A21.23B Confusing wording removed 3.1-7-8 1XX—A21.23C MARC tags added 3.1-7-8 1XX—A21.23D1a Confusing wording removed 3.1-7-8 1XX—A21.23D1b Confusing wording removed 3.1-7-8

Highlights

2 Cataloging with AACR2 and MARC21 (9/22/2005) —Update 2, Sep 2005

110—A23.5 Repeated rule deleted 3.1-37-38 110—L24.1A Rule number changed, new advice re

performers named with performing group added, and additional ambiguous entity added

110—A24.5C Missing word added ("Inc.") 110—A24.12-19 Reference clarified 110—A24.17 Order of wording changed

3.1-41-42

130—L24.5B Reference to new appendix added 130—L25.6B3 Reference to new LCRI added 130—25.25-35 Reference to new LCRI added

3.1-53-54

130 Coding table 240$a added to list in heading 130$g Coding table—Preceding punctuation

Typo fixed ("$f" to "$g") 3.1-55-56

204 Uniform title—Hint Diacritic added in example 3.2-1-2 245 General rules—A1.0C Wording clarified 3.2-3-4 245$a—A1.1B1 Reference to appendix and new

example of capitalization added 3.2-9-10

245$a—L6.0B1 MCB changed to LCRI 245$a—7.1B1 Wording clarified

3.2-11-12

245$c—A7.1F1 Hint LC deleted LCRI, so changed to Hint, and explanation added

3.2-35-36

246$a—Hint Ind 2 in example fixed ("4" to "0") 3.2-53-54 256 Coding table—Related fields 516 added 256—Hint Wording clarified

3.2-65-66

260$a—A1.4C1 Hint Typo fixed (“IFLA” to “ISBD”) 3.2-67-68 260$c Coding table—Related fields 046 added 3.2-79-80 260$c—L1.4F5 Hint Typos fixed ("leui" to "lieu") 3.2-81-82 260$c—L1.4F7 Hint Typo fixed ("19—" to "19--") 3.2-85-86 260$c—A 6.7B7 Hint Wording clarified 3.2-95-96 260$c—Summary—L1.4F7 Hint Typo fixed ("sound recording" to

"video") 3.2-105-106

260$e$f$g Coding tables—Repeatable

Subfields $e$f$g changed from Not repeatable (No) to Repeatable (Yes)

3.2-111-114

300$a—L6.5B1 LCRI updated 300$a—L6.5B1 Hint Hint updated 300$a—L6.5B2 LCRI updated

3.3-15-16

300 SR—A6.5C7 Words deleted to reflect new LCRI 300 SR—L6.5C7 LCRI added 300 SR—L6.5C8 LCRI updated

3.3-17-18

300$a—A7.5B1 Hint Hint updated 3.3-21-22 310$a—L12.7B1 Missing word added ("is") 3.3-29-30 500—L6.7B11 New LCRI added 3.5-7-8 500 Numbers note—A6.7B19 SR Rule clarified 3.5-19-20 500 Physical description—L6.7B10 LCRI updated 3.5-23-24 505—L6.7B18 LCRI updated 3.5-39-40 505—A6.7B6 Punctuation in example fixed (comma

to semicolon) 3.5-41-42

508—L7.7B6 LCRI explained 508—L7.7B6 Hint Hint clarified

3.5-47-48

521—A7.7B14 VD Example added 3.5-57-58

Highlights

Cataloging with AACR2 and MARC21 (9/22/2005) —Update 2, Sep 2005 3

540 Coding table—End of field punc Typo fixed ("[" to "]") 3.5-67-68 546 Coding table—End of field punc Typo fixed ("[" to "]") 3.5-73-74 546 Coding table—Related fields 765 and 767 added 546—A2.7B2 BK Example added

590 Coding table—End of field punc Typo fixed ("[" to "]") 3.5-83-84 6XX$z—Hint Indicator 2 in example fixed ("2" to

"7") 3.6-5-6

655 Genre—Hint Entire hint clarified 3.6-17-20 7XX Added entries—Hint Typo fixed ("130" to "730") and hint

clarified 3.7-1-2

7XX—L21.30F LCRI updated 3.7-3-4 7XX—A21.30M Missing 730 added to example 3.7-5-6 7XX—VD Choice of added entries List order changed 7XX—L21.29D Wording clarified 7XX—OLAC Hint added

3.7-9-10

7XX$5—Hint Typo fixed in example (period added) 3.7-11-12 700—Hint Typo fixed ("as" deleted) 3.7-13-14 710—Hint Typo fixed ("610" to "710") 3.7-15-16 740—L21.30J Example corrected ("computer file" to

"electronic resource") 3.7-21-22

740.$n—Hint Typo fixed (":" removed) 740.$p—Hint Example added 753—Hint Example added

3.7-23-24

76X-78X—C14 Typo fixed (ending quote added) 3.7-25-26 76X-78X$t Typo fixed (",$t" to ":t") 3.7-27-28 765/767 Coding table—Related fields

546 added 3.7-29-30

8XX—L21.30L LCRI updated 3.8-3-4 BK—Quick Match Criteria Basis of guidelines expanded 4-3-4 BK—Quick Match 300$b Field added BK—Quick Match 300$e Field added BK—Quick Match 4XX Criteria clarified BK—Quick Match 500 Acc. mat. Field added

4-5-6

BK—Cheatsheet 041 Wording clarified BK—Cheatsheet 500 Ed. & hist. Compressed to save space

4-9-10

BK—Cheatsheet 7XX Added entries Sentence moved 4-11-12 ER—Quick Match Criteria Basis of guidelines expanded and

paragraph added ER—Quick Match 260$b Video wording deleted ER—Quick Match 300$e Field added ER—Quick Match 4XX Criteria clarified ER—Quick Match 500 Acc. mat. Field added ER—Quick Match 505/500 Contents Wording clarified ER—Quick Match end of page Repeated paragraph deleted

5-9-10

ER—Cheatsheet 028 Hint added 5-13-14 ER—Cheatsheet 041 Wording clarified 5-15-16 ER—Cheatsheet 7XX Sentence moved 5-17-18 SR—Cataloging tools—General Cataloging tool added SR—Cataloging tools—Useful reference sources

Cataloging tool added 6-1-2

SR—A6.0B1 LCRI added 6-3-4

Highlights

4 Cataloging with AACR2 and MARC21 (9/22/2005) —Update 2, Sep 2005

SR—Quick Match Criteria Basis of guidelines expanded SR—Quick Match 245$anp Wording clarified SR—Quick Match 245$b Wording clarified SR—Quick Match 245$c Wording clarified SR—Quick Match 1XX/7XX Wording clarified SR—Quick Match 250$a Wording clarified SR—Quick Match 250$b Wording clarified

6-5-6

SR—Quick Match 260$b Publisher Wording clarified SR—Quick Match 260$a Place Wording clarified SR—Quick Match 300$e Field added SR—Quick Match 4XX Criteria clarified SR—Quick Match 546/500 Wording clarified SR—Quick Match 500 Acc. mat. Field added SR—Quick Match 505/500 Contents Wording clarified SR—Quick Match 020 Wording clarified

6-7-8

SR—Cheatsheet 028 Hint added 6-9-10 SR—Cheatsheet 1XX Reference added SR—Cheatsheet 260 Hint added SR—Cheatsheet 300 Wording clarified SR—Cheatsheet 306 EOF and subfield "$a" added SR—Cheatsheet 047 Subfield "$a" added

6-11-12

SR—Cheatsheet 041 Wording clarified 6-13-14 SR—Cheatsheet 7XX Sentence moved and e.g. added SR—Cheatsheet 007 Examples expanded SR—Cheatsheet 008 Defaults added SR—Flowchart Flowchart improved

6-15-16

VD—Quick Match Criteria Basis of guidelines expanded VD—Quick Match 260$c Criteria clarified VD—Quick Match 300$e Field added VD—Quick Match 4XX Criteria clarified VD—Quick Match 538 Criteria clarified VD—Quick Match 500 Unf. cont Criteria clarified VD—Quick Match 500 Acc. mat. Field added VD—Quick Match 505 Wording clarified

7-5-6

VD—Cheatsheet 028 Hint added VD—Cheatsheet 260 Hint added

7-9-10

VD—Cheatsheet 300 Wording clarified VD—Cheatsheet 538 Wording clarified and Typo fixed VD—Cheatsheet 041 Wording clarified VD—Cheatsheet 508 Wording clarified VD—Cheatsheet 500 Ed. & hist Wording clarified

7-11-12

VD—Cheatsheet 500 Unf. cont. Wording clarified VD—Cheatsheet 7XX Sentence moved / Hint added VD—Cheatsheet 007 Example expanded VD—Cheatsheet 008 Defaults added

7-13-14

VD—Flowchart Flowchart improved 7-17-18 SE—Quick Match Criteria Basis expanded, sentence moved 8-11-12 SE—Cheatsheet 041 Wording clarified 8-19-20 SE—Cheatsheet 7XX Sentence moved 8-21-22

Introduction

Cataloging with AACR2 and MARC21 (9/15/2005)—Update 2, Sep 2005 1-3

CHAPTER CONTENTS Chapter 2 outlines steps for:

• searching for, choosing, and editing records when doing copy cataloging • cloning records to create new records from different editions • entering original records

Chapter 3 is the largest chapter in this manual. It is arranged in MARC tag order for easy reference. Under each tag, you will find:

• a coding table of quick instructions for the tag, followed by: general cataloging rules from AACR Chapter 1 rules from other sources (e.g., LCRI, CONSER, etc.) author's hints specific rules for the physical formats that are covered by this manual, in the following

order: Books (BK), Electronic resources, Direct access (ER), Sound recordings (SR), Videos (VD), and Serials (SE)

• coding tables of quick instructions for the subfields commonly used in each tag, followed by: general cataloging rules from AACR Chapter 1 rules from other sources (e.g., LCRI, CONSER, etc.) author's hints specific rules for the physical formats that are covered, in the following order: BK, ER,

SR, VD, and SE Chapters 4-8 provide cheatsheets to assist in cataloging the five types of resources covered in this manual: Chapter 4 covers books, Chapter 5 covers electronic resources, Chapter 6 covers sound recordings, Chapter 7 covers videos, and Chapter 8 covers serials. Each of these chapters includes sections on:

• Cataloging Steps • Searching for Copy Cat Records • Quick Match Criteria • Editing/Cloning/Creating Records

AACR's second level of description (1.0D2) and OCLC's input standards for 'Full-level' cataloging were used to decide on the fields that should be included in the cheat sheets.

CODING TABLE EXPLANATIONS Each MARC field described in Chapter 3 begins with a coding table that provides brief information in the following order: Rule: The cataloging rules dictate what bibliographic information we are to enter in certain MARC fields. Each coding table provides rule numbers from AACR and/or LCRI for the rule(s) that specify the bibliographic information to be entered in the field. However, some fields are for MARC purposes only and so do not have any associated cataloging rules. Source of information: The cataloging rules prescribe specific sources from which we are to take the bibliographic information that we enter in a given field. These sources vary, depending on the type of material being cataloged. For example, if we are cataloging a book, then the rules

Introduction

1-4 Cataloging with AACR2 and MARC21 (9/15/2005)—Update 2, Sep 2005

specify that title information for the book must come from the title page of the book. However, if we are cataloging an audio cassette, then title information for the cassette must come from the label on the cassette. The coding tables outline the prescribed sources of the bibliographic information for each field. However, some fields are for MARC purposes only and so do not have any cataloging rules associated with them, therefore 'Source' is not appropriate (N/A) for these fields. See AACR 1.0A3 and 1.0A4 for further details about the concepts of 'chief sources of information' and 'prescribed sources of information'. End of field punctuation: The MARC21 manual stipulates the appropriate end of field punctuation for each MARC field. The coding tables and cheatsheets provide the appropriate ending punctuation for each field. See Appendix C for a complete list of the end of field punctuation for all of the fields covered in this book. Preceding or enclosing punctuation: The cataloging rules dictate the ISBD punctuation that must be entered before (or enclosing) different elements of bibliographic information. For example, the ISBD punctuation that precedes a statement of responsibility in the title area of information is a space-forward slash-space ( / ). Since title information is entered in the MARC 245 tag, and statement of responsibility information is entered in subfield $c of that 245, the subfield $c must be preceded by a space-forward slash-space ( / ). The coding tables provide the ISBD punctuation for each subfield (when appropriate). In a few cases, the preceding punctuation for a subfield will vary according to its context or contents. In such cases, the subfield is repeated in the coding table to show the appropriate punctuation, e.g.:

#=$b Parallel title (NR) #:$b Other title information (NR) #;$b Subsequent (next) title information (NR)

The example above is taken from the 245 coding table; it shows the preceding punctuation for subfield $b differing according to the contents of the subfield. Many cataloging software programs require that you do not enter a space before a subfield code, because the software will insert the space when it displays/prints the information. Therefore, instead of entering:

245$aTitle / $cstatement. enter:

245$aTitle /$cstatement. On the other hand, OCLC requires that you enter a space before and after a subfield code. On OCLC, therefore, you would enter:

245$a Title / $c statement. Note that the MARC examples given in this manual follow the non-OCLC method of spacing. You must determine the appropriate method of spacing that is demanded by your own cataloging software and follow those instructions. Input standards: Both LC and OCLC have established input standards for entering bibliographic data in MARC records at varying levels of completeness. These standards are explained in the relevant sections of their respective MARC manuals:

LC: http://lcweb.loc.gov/marc/bibliographic/nlr/ OCLC: http://www.oclc.org/oclc/bib/fchap2.htm

General cataloging steps


GENERAL CATALOGING TOOLS Your first step when cataloging should be to acquire the tools you will need in order to do your job properly. It is impossible to catalog correctly in a vacuum, or using only a brief MARC coding manual, or even this book alone. Listed below are the minimum tools a cataloger needs in order to create records according to national standards. Use these tools when cataloging any type of material. The letters on the left (e.g., 'A', 'L', 'C', 'MARC', etc.) will be used to identify these sources when they are referred to in this manual. Cataloging Rules: A Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules. 2nd ed., 2002 rev. Loose-leaf, updated

periodically. Chicago: American Library Association. Current herein as of: 2004 amendments.

This is the premier source of instructions for describing and providing access

points (other than subject headings and classification) for any type of material collected by a library. It is the primary guide for catalogers who wish to create records that are consistent with records created by other catalogers.

L Library of Congress Rule Interpretations. 1990. Loose-leaf, updated four times a

year. Washington, D.C.: Library of Congress. Also available online but not always up-to-date in The Library Corporation's "Catalogers Reference Shelf".

Current herein as of: May 2003, Update Number 2. This is the place to turn for clarification of trickier rules and consistent decisions

on optional rules. Since LC is the largest single source of cataloging records, all libraries wishing to be part of a universal cataloging database need to know and follow their interpretations of the rules.

General cataloging: MAX Maxwell, Robert L. Maxwell's Handbook for AACR2R: Explaining and

Illustrating the Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules and the 1993 Amendments. 1997. Chicago: American Library Association.

This is another valiant attempt on the part of an experienced cataloger to interpret

and illustrate the cataloging rules. Differences Between, Changes Within: Guidelines on When to Create a New

Record. 2004. Chicago: ALCTS. Available on the ALCTS website, free for download to ALCTS members.

Printed copies are also available and can be ordered from ALCTS. MARC coding: MARC MARC21 Format for Bibliographic Data. 1999. Loose-leaf, updated annually.

1999 ed. Washington, D.C.: Library of Congress.



Also available online, in condensed format: http://lcweb.loc.gov/marc/bibliographic/ecbdhome.html Current herein as of: October 2003

This is the definitive source for the coding of MARC21 bibliographic records.

Turn to it whenever you encounter a field/indicator/subfield that you do not know. The print version tracks obsolete coding so that you can find out about coding in older records.

OCLC Bibliographic Formats and Standards. 2002. 3rd ed. Dublin, Ohio: OCLC.

Also available online: http://www.oclc.org/bibformats/en/

Current herein as of: November 2003 OCLC's version of the MARC standards often has additional examples and

explanations that supplement the information provided by the LC MARC manual. In addition, the section on “When to input a new record” is invaluable as a guide to ensure consistency in our copy cataloging practices.

Headings: Library of Congress Authority File. Online database. August 7, 2003.

http://authorities.loc.gov This site provides direct access to the LC authority files for verifying the three

main types of headings: Names, Titles, and Subjects. Library of Congress Subject Headings. Annual. Washington, D.C.: Library of

Congress. Available in print, microfiche, CD, or online. Subject Cataloging Manual: Subject Headings. Washington D.C.: Library of

Congress. Available in print or on CD. Free-floating Subdivisions: An Alphabetical Index. Washington D.C.: Library of

Congress. Available in print or on CD. Classification: Library of Congress Classification Schedules. Washington D.C.: Library of

Congress. Dewey Decimal Classification. 2003. Edition 22. Dublin, Ohio: OCLC Forest

Press. Dewey Decimal Classification: A Practical Guide. 1996. 2nd ed. Dublin, Ohio:

OCLC Forest Press.

Although classification is not covered in this manual, we strongly recommend that you make every effort to use the most current versions of these classification tools.



Online resources: CPSO Library of Congress Cataloging Policy and Support Office Send questions to: email address: [email protected] AUTOCAT Autocat listserv To subscribe, go to the Autocat webpage and fill out the form at: http://listserv.acsu.buffalo.edu/cgi-bin/wa?SUBED1=autocat&A=1 If you do not want to receive messages, set the option under Miscellaneous to

“Mail delivery disabled temporarily”. Then, when you are ready, scan a list of the topics discussed over the past few weeks and pick and choose which to read, or search individual subjects discussed in the past by checking the archives at

http://listserv.acsu.buffalo.edu/archives/autocat.html

See also the TMQ website for up-to-date MARC links to these and other useful online resources http://www.marcofquality.com

DECIDE WHAT YOU ARE CATALOGING AACR 1.0A was completely rewritten in the 2004 amendments to make it more obvious that our first step when cataloging a resource is to decide exactly what it is that we are cataloging. The rule requires us to decide whether we are cataloging something that stands by itself or is actually a part of a larger entity (e.g., a part of a multi-part resource, or an individual work in a monographic series, or a single section of a website). If the latter is the case, then we must choose whether we are going to catalog the part (e.g., the single volume of a monographic series), or the larger entity of which it is a part (e.g., the monographic series). If we decide that we are cataloging a single-part resource, then the rule tells us to base our description of it on the resource as a whole. On the other hand, if we decide that we are cataloging a multipart resource, then we have to decide whether it is a multipart monograph (e.g., a monographic series), or a serial, or an integrating resource. LCRI 1.0 (amended in May 2003) calls this step deciding on the "Type of issuance" and gives good definitions of the three types: Monographs: "A bibliographic resource that is complete in one part or intended to be completed in a finite number of parts. The separate parts may or may not be numbered. Use rules in [AACR] Chapter 1 and the chapter(s) representing the carrier." Monographic resources include books (AACR Ch. 2), sound recordings (AACR Ch. 6), videos (AACR Ch. 7), etc. Serials: "A continuing resource issued in a succession of discrete parts, usually bearing numbering, that has no predetermined conclusion. Use rules in [AACR] Chapter 1, Chapter 12, and the chapter(s) representing the carrier." Serial resources include periodicals, magazines, travel books, etc. Integrating resources: "A bibliographic resource that is added to or changed by means of updates that do not remain discrete and are integrated into the whole. Integrating resources can be finite or



continuing. Use rules in [AACR] Chapter 1, Chapter 12, and the chapter(s) representing the carrier." Integrating resources include websites (changing all the time), loose leafs that are meant to be updated, etc. In addition, you may sometimes find yourself with a resource accompanied by another resource, e.g., a book accompanied by a video, or a video accompanied by a book. You will have to decide which format is predominant or most important, and then describe the primary format, and note the accompanying material. This manual provides instructions for cataloging monographic print (books), electronic resources, sound recordings, and videos. It also covers serials (with an emphasis on print serials). It does not cover integrating resources, nor does it get into specific details about electronic serials. Once you have decided what you are cataloging, you can move on to the following broad cataloging steps. These steps apply no matter what type of material you are cataloging. See the appropriate chapters that follow for details on steps needed for cataloging a specific type of material.

SEARCH FOR COPY CAT RECORDS Most of us would quite rightly rather copy someone else's record than make our own. To find records that you can copy, you first have to search for them, and searching can be an art in itself. First, remember to take your search terms from the correct source. In other words, remember to think about where on the resource you are supposed to find the terms that you can use for searching, i.e., the appropriate 'prescribed source of description' for the type of material. Then think about which search terms are best for finding records. Sometimes a given term will work better for one type of material than another. For example, it is a good idea to try searching by an LCCN if you are looking for a record for a book, but it is unlikely that you will ever find an LCCN on a sound recording, a video, or an electronic resource. In addition, when you have to pay for each search that you do (e.g., at OCLC), think about the possible results of your search, and try to use the best term for the specific resource. Do not forget the individual quirks of your bibliographic utility. What might work for ITSMARC, might not work for OCLC and vice versa. We are not going to cover how each different utility searches, because each utility is significantly different from every other utility in its searching techniques, as are the local automated systems. However, some of the issues to consider are:

• whether UPPER or lower case is significant (or how to force a case-sensitive search) • whether you search as you see, or use 'derived' search keys • whether you search with or without hyphens in LCCN/ISBN • whether you enter punctuation, or omit punctuation, e.g., apostrophes, commas • whether you enter initial articles, or omit initial articles • whether your system uses stop words (e.g., the names of states, etc., in OCLC)

Leader 000

Cataloging with AACR2 and MARC21 (9/15/2005)—Update 2, Sep 2005 3.0-1

3.0 000 Leader

Rule None Source of information Not applicable

End of field punctuation None Input standards—LC: Full Mandatory

Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Mandatory / Mandatory Repeatable No Indicators None Subfields None

Coded positions 05 Record status 06 Type of record 07 Bibliographic level 08 Type of control (archival) 09 Character coding scheme 17 Encoding level 18 Descriptive cataloging form

Related fields See the following table Hint

The Leader contains coded information that tells a library automation system (and catalogers) important information about the MARC record itself, rather than about the material being described. If you are cataloging on OCLC, then Leader codes are interspersed amongst the 008 codes in the fixed field area of the record. Labels in bold below are for the Leader elements in an OCLC record display: OCLC: 2439444 Rec stat: c Entered: 19760831 Replaced: 19960410 Used: 19960402 Type: a ELvl: Srce: Audn: Ctrl: Lang: eng BLvl: m Form: Conf: 0 Biog: MRec: Ctry: nyu Cont: GPub: LitF: 0 Indx: 0 Desc: i Ills: a Fest: 0 DtSt: t Dates: 1977,1976

If you are cataloging in your library automation system or standalone cataloging software, then you will have to read your manual to discover how to bring up a display of a Leader and how to edit it. This is how the Leader displays in most non-OCLC MARC record displays: 000 00876nam 2200277 a 4500 position 012345678901234567890123

The numbers in the second row in the example above (labeled "position") show how to count across to see the position of each code in the Leader. Remember to start counting at 0 (zero), like a computer does. The information in this field is 'position dependent', i.e., if you code 'c' in the fifth position (Record status) it has a completely different meaning than coding 'c' in the sixth position (Type of record). So, be careful when entering coding. Brief explanations of the codes in the 000 table are provided below. For more complete explanations of the codes go to LC's MARC21 Bibliographic manual

000 Leader

3.0-2 Cataloging with AACR2 and MARC21 (9/15/2005)—Update 2, Sep 2005

at http://www.loc.gov/marc/bibliographic/ecbdldrd.html or the OCLC Bibliographic Format and Standards manual at http://www.oclc.org/bibformats/en/fixedfield/

Rec stat 05 Record status: When you create a new record, your system should enter the default code 'n' (new) for this position. If you edit a record, then change Rec Stat from 'n' (new) to 'c' (corrected), unless your software does it for you (OCLC does it for you). 'Editing' in this instance means more than simply adding a call number and location/holdings information to the record. If that is all you have done with a record, then do not change the Rec Stat code. However, if you change coding, punctuation, or actual bibliographic data in the record, then change the Rec Stat to 'c' or 'p' as appropriate. If you are upgrading a CIP record, then change Rec Stat from 'n' (new) to 'p' (upgrade from CIP). If you are upgrading a lower level record to a higher level record (see Encoding level), then change Rec Stat from 'n' to 'a'. If you edit a record in any way, then remember to add the MARC21 Organization code for your library in 040$d (see 040), unless your system does so for you (OCLC does it for you). If you are deleting a record, your system will change Rec Stat to 'd', which usually hides the record from public view but leaves it in the system until you purge deleted records (in case you want a report of deleted records).

Type 06 Type of record: Code a record for a book or print serial 'a' for language material. Code a video record 'g' for projected media, and a sound recording record either 'i' (non-musical) or 'j' (musical), etc. Code a record for an electronic resource 'm' if it is computer software (including programs, games, fonts), numeric data, computer-oriented multimedia, online systems, services, or if you are in doubt; otherwise code for the most significant aspect of the electronic resource (e.g., language material, video, sound, etc.) This is a very important code, since it tells your library automation system what type of material the rest of the record (especially the 008) is describing.

BLvl 07 Bibliographic level: Indicate in this position whether the item is a monograph (m,a,c,d), a serial (s, b), or an integrating resource (i). However, do not use 'i' until LC and OCLC say to do so. This is a very important code, since it tells your library automation system what type of material the rest of the record (especially the 008) is describing.

Ctrl 08 Type of control: This element was introduced with Phase 2 of format integration (March 1996). If a work is under archival control, e.g., is being given special archival handling, then code this position 'a'. Any type of material can be under archival control. However, most libraries do not do archival control for their materials and so will continue to code this position with a blank space.

Leader 000


09 Character coding scheme: This element was introduced with MARC21 (Feb 1999). Most libraries will use the MARC-8 standard for character coding, and so will code this position with a blank space. A few libraries will follow other special standards for character sets, e.g., Unicode, and will know to code this position accordingly.

ELvl 17 Encoding level: Codes in this position indicate the fullness of the bibliographic information in the record. A blank space means that a record is a 'Full level' record, with the most complete information possible, according to LC's standard of completeness (as per National Level and Minimal Level Record Requirements http://www.loc.gov/marc/bibliographic/nlr/). A 'Full' record is a bibliographic record with complete description, subject analysis, and classification. If you are following LC's standards to create a complete record, then enter a blank here. A 'Minimal' record has minimal description and access points, and often no subject headings. If you are not creating a complete record, then you must supply an appropriate code from the list, or code 'u' for unknown. OCLC participants use two codes for Encoding level. 'I' is used for 'Full level' records and 'K' is used for 'Minimal level' records (as per OCLC Input Standards Tables http://www.oclc.org/bibformats/tables/en/fixedfield.shtm). Some non-OCLC libraries have chosen to follow the OCLC standards rather than the LC standards and so use these OCLC codes.

Desc 18 Descriptive cataloging form: This code tells the system which cataloging rules were followed when the record was created. Three sets of cataloging rules are coded here. If you follow AACR2 rules for your cataloging, then code this position 'a'. This means that you followed the most current rules. The LC MARC manual puts it this way: "The access points generally remain consistent with AACR2 and the descriptive cataloging form follows ISBD. The punctuation practices of ISBD apply. All access points follow AACR2 as to choice and form of entry." The LC MARC manual says that Code 'i' "indicates at a minimum the use of ISBD practices in records". This means that the rules followed in making the record were either AACR1 or ISBD or the bibliographic description is AACR2, but the headings are not made according to AACR2. You will see many records with 'i', because they were made before we had the AACR2 rules to follow. Code 'blank' indicates that old cataloging rules (pre ISBD) were followed. You will see old LC records with blanks, because the cataloging was done according to old rules. Blank can also indicate that no rules were followed, when the code was left blank because the cataloger did not know what to put here. You should be cataloging using AACR2, both for bibliographic description and access points. If you do not have a copy of AACR2 in the library or do not use the copy that you have, then code 'u' (unknown) in this position.

000 Leader


EXPLANATION OF COLUMN HEADERS IN THE FOLLOWING TABLE: Char Pos.: the actual character positions specified by the MARC21 manual. OCLC Label: the labels used by OCLC Your Label: the labels used by YOUR cataloging software—fill in for future reference. Related Fields: a reminder about fields that contain related information, e.g., the code in Ctry

in the 008 for a book is related to the information provided in 260$a Place of publication.

In most cataloging software, you can bring up a separate window to enter and edit 000 data. The labels in this window are usually self-explanatory. Char Pos.

OCLC Label

Your Label 000 Related Fields

05 Rec Stat Record status a increase in encoding level (not from CIP) c corrected or revised record d deleted record n new record p increase in encoding level from CIP

000ELvl 040$d 000ELvl

06 Type Type of record a language material (incl. printed, microform, electronic) c notated music (incl. microform and electronic) d manuscript notated music (incl. microform) e cartographic material (incl. maps, atlases, globes) f manuscript cartographic material (incl. microform) g projected medium (incl. motion pictures, videos & DVD) i nonmusical sound recording (incl. speech) j musical sound recording (incl. compact discs, or cassettes) k 2-dimen. non-projectable graphic (incl. postcards, posters) m computer file / electronic resource (incl. software) o kit (2 or more types of items, none predominant) p mixed material (local collections e.g., text, photos, etc.) r 3-dimen. artifact or naturally occurring object t manuscript language material (incl. theses, letters)

245$h; 300$a

07 BLvl Bibliographic level a monographic component part (the monographic record is

for a monographic part of an item, with a 773 for the host) b serial component part (the serial record is for a serial part

of a serial item, with a 773 for the host) c collection (a group of items that were not originally

published, distributed, or produced together) d subunit (a part of a collection, with a 773 for the host) i integrating resource (the record is for a resource that is

updated, e.g., updating loose-leafs and Web sites) m monograph/item (complete in one part or intended to be

completed in a finite number of separate parts) s serial (issued in successive parts and intended to be

continued indefinitely, e.g., serials, journals, newspapers)

773 773 773

08 Ctrl Type of control # no specific type of control (use # unless told otherwise) a under archival control

09 Character coding scheme # MARC-8 (use # unless told otherwise) a UCS/Unicode

Leader 000


Char Pos.

OCLC Label

Your Label 000 Related Fields

17 ELvl Encoding level # full level 1 full level, item not examined 2 less than full level, item not examined 3 abbreviated level 4 core level 5 partial (preliminary) level, not considered final 7 minimal level, considered final by creating agency 8 prepublication level (CIP) I full level (OCLC input only) K less than full level (OCLC input only) u unknown (not used in new or updated records) z not applicable

18 Desc Descriptive cataloging form # non-ISBD (old or no cataloging rules followed) a AACR2 (current cataloging rules followed) i ISBD (ISBD punctuation, but not AACR2) u unknown (e.g., records converted from non-MARC)

001 Control number


001 Control number Rule None

Source of information Not applicable End of field punctuation None

Input standards—LC: Full Mandatory Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Mandatory / Mandatory

Repeatable No Indicators None Subfields None

Related fields 003 Hint

An 001 contains a control number that is supposed to uniquely identify a particular record in a specific database of records. If you are cataloging on OCLC, then the OCLC control number (labeled in bold below) is displayed with the 008 codes in the fixed field area of the record: OCLC: 2439444 Rec stat: c Entered: 19760831 Replaced: 19960410 Used: 19960402 Type: a ELvl: Srce: Audn: Ctrl: Lang: eng BLvl: m Form: Conf: 0 Biog: MRec: Ctry: nyu Cont: GPub: LitF: 0 Indx: 0 Desc: i Ills: a Fest: 0 DtSt: t Dates: 1977,1976

Control numbers must be unique within a given database. It is very important that control numbers are unique within your own database. That is, the same control number must never be used in more than one record within your database. Control numbers should also be unique across databases. That is, if possible, the same control number should never be used in different records in different databases. Since control numbers are supposed to be present and are supposed to be unique to individual records, they can be, and often are, used for detecting duplicate MARC records during 'machine matching'.1 001 ocm10215712 100 1 $aWilliams, Winston. 245 10 $aFlorida's fabulous waterbirds :$btheir stories /$c[by Winston

Williams]. 250 $a3rd ed. 260 $aTampa, FL :$bWorld Publications,$c1987. 300 $a1 v. (unpaged) :$bcol. ill., map ;$c31 cm. 852 $p12345678

001 ocm10215712 100 1 $aWilliams, Winston. 245 10 $aFlorida's fabulous waterbirds :$btheir stories /$c[by Winston

Williams]. 250 $a3rd ed. 260 $aTampa, FL :$bWorld Publications,$c1987. 300 $a1 v. (unpaged) :$bcol. ill., map ;$c31 cm. 852 $p23456789

1 Machine matching occurs when a MARC record is loaded to a database and the system tries to determine whether the incoming record is the same as a record that may already be in the database.

Control number identifier 003


003 Control number identifier Rule None




Related fields 001 Hint

The Control Number Identifier contains the MARC code that identifies whose system control number is in the 001 of the record. The Library of Congress assigns this code. To get a MARC code from the Library of Congress, first go to the following website to see if your library already has a code assigned: http://www.loc.gov/marc/organizations/orgshome.html#searches If you do not already have a code, then go to the following website to request a code: http://www.loc.gov/marc/organizations/orgshome.html#requests If you are cataloging on OCLC, then the control number identifier is not displayed in the record online, but the OCLC code (OCoLC) is inserted in an 003 when the record is exported. When you are creating a new (original) record: • Since you must supply your own 001 for your new record, you must also

add your MARC code in the 003 to match the 001. OCLC does this for you if you make the new record using their software.

When you are cloning a different edition record: • Since you must supply your own 001 for your new record, you must also

add your MARC code in the 003 to match the 001. OCLC does this for you if you make the new record using their software.

When you are copy cataloging: • If you do not change the 001 (because it is an LC or OCLC number), then

do not change the 003. • If you have to supply an 001 (because it is not present, or is not an LC or

OCLC number), then you must put your own MARC code in the 003 to be consistent with the 001.

• If your system automatically replaces the 001 in incoming records with a system supplied 001 (e.g., DRA Classic, Voyager, Follett, Polaris), then you must put your MARC code in the 003 to match the 001.

The code 'DLC' in an 003 indicates that the number in the 001 is a Library of Congress Control number (LCCN).

006 Additional material characteristics


006 Additional material characteristics Rule None


Input standards—LC: Full Optional Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Optional / Optional

Repeatable Yes Indicators None Subfields None

Related fields 300$e ; 500 Accompanying material note Hint The 006 field contains 18 characters (00-17) of coded information. The 006 is

essentially a shortened and repeatable version of the 008 field. We use the 006 field to code special characteristics of accompanying material and material with multiple characteristics (e.g., electronic resources), and serial characteristics of non-print serials and integrating resources. As with the 008, all codes must be entered in lowercase. The first position of the 006 is coded for the 'Type of material' and contains one of the same codes defined in the leader for the 'Type of record' position (the exception being serials, which is coded 's' in the 006/00). The remaining 006 codes (01-17) are coded the same as positions 18-34 in the 008 for the type of resource being described; that is, if position 006/00 is coded 'a' for a book, then positions 006/01-17 are defined the same as positions 008/18-34 for a book. If a resource is a single type of material and monographic, no 006 is needed, e.g., no 006 is needed for a book alone, or a monographic video or sound recording alone. However, if a resource is composed of multiple types of material (e.g., a book and a video) then the 008 is coded for the predominant material and the 006 can be coded for the additional material(s). Sometimes this will mean that the 008 is coded for the book and the 006 for a video, sometimes it will be the other way around, depending on which format is 'predominant'. For example, the specific elements coded in 008/18-34 for a book are:

Illustrations Government publication Fiction Target audience Conference publication Biography Form of item Festschrift Nature of contents Index

However, when a book accompanies another type of material, e.g., a video, the 008 will be coded for the video and an 006 can be coded for the book. This 006 will contain 'a' (Language material) in the first position to indicate that the rest of the positions (01-17) contain codes for the book elements given above. An 006 can also be coded to provide information about the seriality of a resource. If the resource is a printed serial then the regular 008 for print serials is used. However, if the resource is, for example, a serial video, then the 008 must be coded for the video, and an 006 can be added to code for serial information.

Additional material characteristics 006 Sound recordings


Char Pos.

OCLC Label

Your Label 006—Sound recordings Related Fields

07-12 AccM Accompanying matter use up to six codes; enter in alphabetical order # no accompanying matter a discography b bibliography c thematic index d libretto or text e biography of composer or author f biography of performer or history of ensemble g technical and/or historical information on instruments h technical information on music i historical information k ethnological information r instructional materials s music z other

500

13-14 LTxt Literary text for sound recordings use up to two codes; enter in no particular order # item is a musical sound recording a autobiography b biography c conference proceedings d drama e essays f fiction g reporting h history i instruction j language instruction k comedy l lectures, speeches m memoirs n not applicable o folktales p poetry r rehearsals s sounds t interviews z other

15 Undefined (blank) 16 Transposition and arrangement

n not applicable (item is not notated music)

17 Undefined (blank)

006 Additional Material Characteristics Videos


Char Pos.

OCLC Label

Your Label 006—Videos Related Fields

00 T006 Type of material g projected medium

300 $e; 500

01-03 Time Running time running time (total, in min., to next highest min.) e.g.: 009 9 minutes 060 2 half hour videos or one 60 min. video 000 running time exceeds three characters --- running time unknown

04 Undefined (blank) 05 Audn Target audience

LC qualifies codes 'a' to 'd' by age; OCLC by grade # unknown or not specified (use for most non-juv. material) a preschool (ages 0-5; pre-K) b primary (ages 6-8; grades K-3) c pre-adolescent (ages 9-13; grades 4-8) d adolescent (ages 14-17; grades 9-12) e adult (really adult material) f specialized (limited interest to other audiences) g general (specifically meant for a general audience) j juvenile (instead of codes a,b, or c)

06-10 Undefined (blank) 11 GPub Government publication

# not a government publication a autonomous or semi-autonomous component c multi-local f federal / national i international intergovernmental l local m multi-state o government publication--level undetermined s state, provincial, territorial, dependent, etc. u unknown if item is a government publication z other

12 Form Form of item # none of the following s electronic (computer is needed for access; not DVDs)

13-15 Undefined (blank) 16 TMat Type of visual material

codes here are for projected media only; see MARC 21 Format manual for other visual material codes

f filmstrip m motion picture s slide t transparency (including X-rays) v videorecording

245$h 007/00=g 007/00=m 007/00=g 007/00=g 007/00=v

17 Tech Technique a animation c animation and live action l live action n not applicable; not a motion picture or a videorecording u unknown z other technique

Additional material characteristics 006 Serials


Char Pos.

OCLC Label

Your Label 006—Serials Related Fields

11 GPub Government publication # not a government publication a autonomous or semi-autonomous component c multi-local f federal / national i international intergovernmental l local m multi-state o government publication--level undetermined s state, provincial, territorial, dependent, etc. u unknown if item is a government publication z other

12 Conf Conference publication proceedings, reports or summaries of a conference 0 not a conference publication 1 conference publication

13-15 Undefined (blank) position 13 was 'Title page availability' position 14 was 'Index' position 15 was 'Cumulative index avail'

16 Alph Original alphabet or script of title # no alphabet or script given/no key title a basic Roman (no diacritics, e.g., English) b extended Roman (includes diacritics) See MARC21 Format manual for other codes

17 S/L Entry convention 0 successive entry (AACR) 1 latest entry (do not use for serials) 2 integrating entry

007 Physical description fixed field


007 Physical description fixed field Rule None


Input standards—LC: Full Optional Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Required if applicable / Optional

Repeatable Yes Indicators None Subfields None

Related fields 300 Hint The 007 contains special coded information about the physical form of the

resource being cataloged. This coded information can be used by a local system to qualify searches. It is directly related to the 300 field. The information is displayed for the patron from the 300 field and repeated in coded form for the computer in an 007. Enter all codes in lowercase. An 007 may be provided for a whole resource, or for the parts of a resource, such as in a kit or accompanying material. Note that the 007 is not really a 'fixed' field, as the length of the 007 varies for the different types of materials. As with the 000, 006, and 008, the codes provided in the 007 are position dependent. The first position is coded for the type of material being described (e.g., a videorecording) and then the meanings of the remaining positions are coded based on that type of material. This means that if you give the wrong code in the first position (e.g., code 's' for a sound recording instead of 'v' for a videorecording) and then provide video codes for the remaining positions, the computer will try to read those codes as though they were for a sound recording, and they will be incorrect. This also means that if you enter a code in the third position that belongs in the 4th position, your library automation system will interpret that code incorrectly. Therefore, if a position is undefined, it must contain a blank space in order to keep the other codes in their correct positions (if, for example, you are editing directly in a 007 tag). OCLC provides subfield codes ($a, $b, etc.) to assist users to enter coding in the correct positions in an 007. When the record is exported, those subfield codes are stripped. They are only there as screen labels to make it easier to enter coding. Other systems provide other types of labels. You must not enter subfield codes in an 007, unless you are specifically instructed to do so by your system. If your software does not provide you with any kind of a labeled display for entering an 007, you must count your character positions carefully and enter the correct codes in their appropriate positions. Currently, the 007 is valid for maps, electronic resources, globes, tactile materials, projected graphics, microforms, non-projected graphics, motion pictures, kits, notated music, remote-sensing images, sound recordings, text, and videorecordings. However, tables for electronic resources, sound recordings, and videos are the only ones provided in this book.

Physical description fixed field 007 Sound recordings


Char Pos.

OCLC Label

Your Label 007—Sound recordings Related Fields

12

$m Special playback characteristics a NAB standard b CCIR standard c Dolby-B encoded, standard Dolby d dbx encoded e digital (e.g. CDs) f Dolby-A encoded (master tapes) g Dolby-C encoded h CX encoded n not applicable u unknown z other

300 $b = NAB standard CCIR standard Dolby-B encoded dbx encoded 500$aCompact discDolby-A encoded Dolby-C encoded CX encoded

13

$n Capture and storage technique a acoustical capture, direct storage (RARE, pre-1929) b direct storage, not acoustical (mostly pre-1948) d digital storage e analog electrical storage (unless it says otherwise) u unknown z other

500 $a = Acoustic recording Direct recording Digital recording Analog recording

007 Physical description fixed field Sound recordings


TEMPLATES Sometimes the 007 labels are not printed when MARC records are printed, making the 007 hard to read. Try lining this template up with a printed 007 to show the meaning of each character and space. CDS CASSETTES

unkn

own

unkn

own

unkn

own

unkn

own

unkn

own

unkn

own

u u u u u u

othe

r

othe

r

othe

r

othe

r

z z z z

anal

og s

tora

ge

anal

og s

tora

ge

e e

ster

eo

not s

peci

aldi

gita

l sto

rage

ster

eo

digi

tal r

ecor

ding

digi

tal s

tora

ge

s d s e d

quad

.

N/A

dire

ct (t

o di

sc)

quad

.

N/A

dire

ct (t

o di

sc)

q n b q n b

soun

d re

cord

ing

soun

d di

sc

1.4

m. p

er se

c.m

ono

not a

pplic

able

4 3/

4 in

.no

t app

licab

leno

t app

licab

leA

rchi

val -

Bla

nkA

rchi

val -

Bla

nkA

rchi

val -

Bla

nkdi

gita

l rec

ordi

ng (C

Ds)

acou

stic

(RA

RE)

soun

d re

cord

ing

soun

d ca

sset

te

1 7/

8 ip

sm

ono

not a

pplic

able

3 7/

8 x

2 1/

2 in

.1/

8 in

.1/

4 in

.

dolb

y st

anda

rdac

oust

ic (R

AR

E)

s d f m n g n n e a s s l m n j l c c a

GM

DSM

DB

LA

NK

Spee

dPl

ayba

ck c

hanl

Gro

ove

wid

th/p

itch

Dim

ensi

ons

Tap

e w

idth

Tap

e co

nfig

.A

rchi

val -

Bla

nkA

rchi

val -

Bla

nkA

rchi

val -

Bla

nkSp

ec. p

layb

ack

char

.C

aptu

re &

stor

age

GM

DSM

DB

LA

NK

Spee

dPl

ayba

ck c

hanl

Gro

ove

wid

th/p

itch

Dim

ensi

ons

Tap

e w

idth

Tap

e co

nfig

.A

rchi

val -

Bla

nkA

rchi

val -

Bla

nkA

rchi

val -

Bla

nkSp

ec. p

layb

ack

char

.C

aptu

re &

stor

age

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

s d f n g n n e s s l n j l c

Physical description fixed field 007 Videos


TEMPLATES Sometimes the 007 labels are not printed when MARC records are printed, making the 007 hard to read. Try lining this template up with a printed 007 to show the meaning of each character and space. VHS DVD

unkn

own

unkn

own

unkn

own

unkn

own

unkn

own

unkn

own

unkn

own

unkn

own

unkn

own

unkn

own

unkn

own

unkn

own

u u u u u u u u u u u u

vide

odis

c

lase

r opt

ical

othe

rm

ulti,

sur

roun

d, q

uad.

vide

odis

c

lase

r opt

ical

othe

rm

ulti,

sur

roun

d, q

uad.

d g z q d g z q

mix

edU

mat

icsi

lent

sile

nt3/

4 in

.si

lent

mix

edU

mat

icsi

lent

sile

nt3/

4 in

.si

lent

m c r n m c r n

blac

k &

whi

teB

eta

sepa

rate

vide

odis

c1/

4 in

.m

ono

blac

k &

whi

teB

eta

sepa

rate

vide

odis

c1/

4 in

.m

ono

b a b i m m b a b i m m

vide

ocas

sette

colo

rV

HS

on m

ediu

mvi

deot

ape

1/2

in.

ster

eo

vide

ocas

sette

colo

rV

HS

on m

ediu

mvi

deot

ape

1/2

in.

ster

eo

f c b a h o s f c b a h o s

GM

DSM

D

Col

orFo

rmat

Sd. o

n m

ed.

Med

. for

sd.

Wid

thK

ind

of sd

.

GM

DSM

D

Col

orFo

rmat

Sd. o

n m

ed.

Med

. for

sd.

Wid

thK

ind

of sd

.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

v f b a h o v d v a i z

008 Fixed-length data elements


008 Fixed length data elements Rule None




Related fields Too many to note here Hint The 008 contains coded information that can be used by your local system to

qualify or narrow searches, e.g., by language, dates, types of material, etc. No library automation system is using all of these codes yet, but if you do not provide the codes, they will not be available when your system starts using them. Although LC and OCLC specify that some elements of the 008 are optional, you should enter data for all 008 elements. All codes must be entered in lowercase. The 008 must be 40 characters in length. The meaning of each character is position-dependent, i.e., a 'c' in the 6th position has a different meaning than a 'c' in the 15th position. Therefore, if a position is undefined, it must contain a blank if, for example, you are editing directly in a 008 tag. If you are cataloging on OCLC, then the 008 codes are displayed in the fixed field area of the record. Labels in bold below are for the 008 elements in an OCLC book record display: OCLC: 2439444 Rec stat: c Entered: 19760831 Replaced: 19960410 Used: 19960402 Type: a ELvl: Srce: Audn: Ctrl: Lang: eng BLvl: m Form: Conf: 0 Biog: MRec: Ctry: nyu Cont: GPub: LitF: 0 Indx: 0 Desc: i Ills: a Fest: 0 DtSt: t Dates: 1977,1976

If you are cataloging in your library automation system or standalone cataloging software, then you will have to read your manual to discover how to bring up a labeled display of an 008 and how to edit it. This is how the Leader displays in most non-OCLC MARC record displays: 008 760831t19771976nyua b 001 0 eng

While the labels displayed by various software may differ, all of the 008 elements should be present, no matter which software you are using. Each system prompts you to enter fixed field information differently. Most systems provide you with labels for the different positions. The order in which these labels are displayed can vary between systems but this does not matter. For example, OCLC uses different labels in a different order than most others.

Fixed-length data elements 008 Books—OCLC


Note that OCLC's fixed field includes codes from both the Leader (000) and the 008. OCLC Label

Char Pos.

Your Label 008—Books—OCLC order Related Fields

Rec stat 000/05 Record status a increase in encoding level (not from CIP) c corrected or revised record d deleted record n new record p increase in encoding level from CIP

ELvl 040$d ELvl

Entered Replaced Used

008/00-05 date entered; original date of input date of last replace transaction (OCLC only) date of last 'produce' or 'update' (OCLC only)

Type 000/06 Type of record a language material (incl. printed, microform, electronic) t manuscript language material (incl. theses, letters)

245$h; 300$a

ELvl 000/17 Encoding level # full level 1 full level, item not examined 2 less than full level, item not examined 3 abbreviated level 4 core level 5 partial (preliminary) level, not considered final 7 minimal level, considered final by creating agency 8 prepublication level (CIP) I full level (OCLC input only) K less than full level (OCLC input only) u unknown (not used in new or updated records) z not applicable (LC only)

Srce 008/39 Cataloging source # National bibliographic agency (e.g., LC) c Cooperative Cataloging Program d other (not one of the above) u unknown

040$a

Audn 008/22 Target audience LC qualifies codes 'a' to 'd' by age; OCLC by grade # unknown or not specified (use for most non-juv. material) a preschool (ages 0-5; pre-K) b primary (ages 6-8; grades K-3) c pre-adolescent (ages 9-13; grades 4-8) d adolescent (ages 14-17; grades 9-12) e adult (really adult material) f specialized (limited interest to other audiences) g general (specifically meant for a general audience) j juvenile (instead of codes a,b, or c)

6XX$v; 521

Ctrl 000/08 Type of control # no specific type of control (use # unless told otherwise) a under archival control

Lang 008/35-37 Language code a three character code from the MARC21 code list for

languages for the language of the resource; if the resource is multilingual or a translation, enter the code for the predominant language, or the first alphabetically, or use 'mul', and enter the other codes in field 041

eng English fre French mul multiple

041; 546

008 Fixed-length data elements Books—OCLC


OCLC Label

Char Pos.

Your Label 008—Books—OCLC order Related Fields

BLvl 000/07 Bibliographic level a monographic component part (the monographic record is

for a monographic part of an item, with a 773 for the host) m monograph/item (complete in one part or intended to be

completed in a finite number of separate parts)

773

Form 008/23 Form of item # not a reproduction a microfilm b microfiche c microopaque d large print f Braille r regular print reproduction (e.g., photocopy) s electronic (computer is needed for access)

245$h; 300$a; 533$a

Conf 008/29 Conference publication proceedings, reports or summaries of a conference 0 not a conference publication 1 conference publication

Biog 008/34 Biography # not biographical material a individual autobiography b individual biography c collective biography or autobiography d contains biographical information

600 600 650$v

MRec 008/38 Modified record # record not modified see MARC21 Format manual for other codes

Ctry 008/15-17 Place of publication, production or execution a two or three character code from the MARC Code List for

Countries; e.g.: jm Jamaica enk England xx Place unknown (not just code unknown!) for U.S. places, use the postal code for state + 'u'; e.g.: flu Florida nju New Jersey

260$a

Fixed-length data elements 008 Electronic resources—OCLC



Char Pos.

Your Label 008—Electronic resources—OCLC order Related Fields


ELvl 040$d ELvl


008/00-05 Entered date entered; original date of input Replaced date of last replace transaction (OCLC only) Used date of last 'produce' or 'update' (OCLC only)

Type 000/06 Type of record a language material (incl. printed, microform, electronic) c notated music (incl. microform and electronic ) d manuscript notated music (incl. microform ) e cartographic material (incl. maps, atlases, globes) f manuscript cartographic material (incl. microform) g projected medium (incl. motion pictures, videos & DVD) i nonmusical sound recording (incl. speech) j musical sound recording (incl. compact discs, or cassettes) k 2-dimen. non-projectable graphic (incl. postcards, posters) m computer file / electronic resource (incl. software) o kit (2 or more types of items, none predominant) p mixed material (local collections e.g., text, photos, etc.) r 3-dimen. artifact or naturally occurring object t manuscript language material (incl. theses, letters)

245$h; 300$a



040$a


6XX$v; 521


008 Fixed-length data elements Electronic resources—OCLC


OCLC Label

Char Pos.

Your Label 008—Electronic resources—OCLC order Related Fields




041; 546








773 773 773

File 008/26 Type of computer file / electronic resource a numeric data b computer program c representational d document e bibliographic data f font g game h sound i interactive multimedia j online system or service m combination u unknown z other

516; 256

GPub 008/28 Government publication # not a government publication a autonomous or semi-autonomous component c multi-local f federal / national i international intergovernmental l local m multi-state o government publication--level undetermined s state, provincial, territorial, dependent, etc. u unknown if item is a government publication z other

260$b


Fixed-length data elements 008 Sound recordings—M21


Char Pos.

OCLC Label

Your Label 008—Sound recordings—MARC21 order Related Fields

21 Music parts # no parts in hand or not specified d instrumental and vocal parts e instrumental parts f vocal parts n not applicable u unknown

not in OCLC

22 Audn Target audience LC qualifies codes 'a' to 'd' by age; OCLC by grade # unknown or not specified (use for most non-juv. material) a preschool (ages 0-5; pre-K) b primary (ages 6-8; grades K-3) c pre-adolescent (ages 9-13; grades 4-8) d adolescent (ages 14-17; grades 9-12) e adult (really adult material) f specialized (limited interest to other audiences) g general (specifically meant for a general audience) j juvenile (instead of codes a,b, or c)

6XX$v; 521

23 Form Form of item # none of the following s electronic (computer is needed for access; not music CDs)

006; 007

24-29 AccM Accompanying matter use up to six codes; enter in alphabetical order # no accompanying matter a discography b bibliography c thematic index d libretto or text e biography of composer or author f biography of performer or history of ensemble g technical and/or historical information on instruments h technical information on music i historical information k ethnological information r instructional materials s music z other

300$e; 500

30-31 LTxt Literary text for sound recordings use up to two codes; enter in no particular order # item is a musical sound recording a autobiography b biography c conference proceedings d drama e essays f fiction g reporting h history i instruction j language instruction k comedy l lectures, speeches m memoirs n not applicable o folktales p poetry r rehearsals s sounds t interviews z other

6XX

008 Fixed-length data elements Sound recordings—M21


Char Pos.

OCLC Label

Your Label 008—Sound recordings—MARC21 order Related Fields

32 Undefined (blank) 33 Transposition and arrangement

# not arrangement or transposition or not specified a transposition b arrangement c both transposed and arranged n not applicable (not notated music) u unknown

not in OCLC

34 Undefined (blank) 35-37 Lang Language code

a three character code from the MARC21 code list for languages for the language of the resource; if the resource is multilingual or a translation, enter the code for the predominant language, or the first alphabetically, or use 'mul', and enter the other codes in field 041


041; 546

38 MRec Modified record # record not modified see MARC21 Format manual for other codes

39 Srce

Cataloging source # National bibliographic agency (e.g., LC) c Cooperative Cataloging Program d other (not one of the above) u unknown

040$a

Sometimes the 008 labels are not printed when MARC records are printed, making the 008 hard to read. Try lining this template up with a printed 008 to show the meaning of each position. 9 6 0 8 0 6 s 1 9 9 6 f l u f m n e n g d

y y m m d d DtS

tD

ate

1D

ate

1D

ate

1D

ate

1D

ate

2D

ate

2D

ate

2D

ate

2C

try

Ctry

Ctry

Com

pC

omp

FMus

UN

DEF

INED

A

udn

UN

DEF

INED

(was

Par

ts)

Acc

MA

ccom

pA

ccom

pA

ccom

pA

ccom

pA

ccom

pL

Txt

Text

UN

DEF

INED

(was

M/E

)U

ND

EFIN

EDU

ND

EFIN

EDL

ang

Lang

Lang

MR

ecSr

ce

n

Fixed-length data elements 008 Sound recordings—OCLC



Char Pos.

Your Label 008—Sound recordings—OCLC order Related Fields


ELvl 040$d ELvl



Type 000/06 Type of record i nonmusical sound recording (incl. speech) j musical sound recording (incl. compact discs, or cassettes)

245$h; 300$a



040$a


6XX$v; 521





041; 546

008 Fixed-length data elements Sound recordings—OCLC


OCLC Label

Char Pos.

Your Label 008—Sound recordings—OCLC order Related Fields








773 773 773

Form 008/23 Form of item # none of the following s electronic (computer is needed for access; not music CDs)

006; 007

Comp 008/18-19 Form of composition a two character code based on LCSH; the following list is

incomplete: bg bluegrass bl blues bt ballets ch chorales co concertos cr carols cy country music fm folk music gm gospel music hy hymns jz jazz mp motion picture music mu multiple forms nn not applicable (not a musical S/R) op operas ov overtures pp popular music pr preludes rc rock music sn sonatas su suites sy symphonies wz waltzes

650$a 047

AccM 008/24-29

Accompanying matter use up to six codes; enter in alphabetical order # no accompanying matter a discography b bibliography c thematic index d libretto or text e biography of composer or author f biography of performer or history of ensemble g technical and/or historical information on instruments h technical information on music i historical information k ethnological information r instructional materials s music z other

300$e; 500

Fixed-length data elements 008 Videos—OCLC


OCLC Label

Char Pos.

Your Label 008—Videos—OCLC order Related Fields








773 773 773

Form 008/23 Form of item # none of the following s electronic (computer is needed for access; not DVDs)

006; 007

GPub

008/28 Government publication # not a government publication a autonomous or semi-autonomous component c multi-local f federal / national i international intergovernmental l local m multi-state o government publication--level undetermined s state, provincial, territorial, dependent, etc. u unknown if item is a government publication z other

260$b

Time

008/18-20 Running time running time (total, in min., to next highest min.) e.g.: 009 9 minutes 060 2 half hour videos or one 60 min. video 000 length exceeds 3 digits --- don't know

300$a




Desc 000/18 Descriptive cataloging form # non-ISBD (old or no cataloging rules followed) a AACR2 (current cataloging rules followed) I ISBD (ISBD punctuation, but not AACR 2) u unknown (e.g., records converted from non-MARC)

TMat

008/33 Type of visual material list for projected media only; see MARC21 Format manual

for others v videorecording m motion picture or filmloop f filmstrip s slide t transparency (including X-rays)

245$h 007/00=v 007/00=m 007/00=g 007/00=g 007/00=g

008 Fixed-length data elements Videos—OCLC


OCLC Label

Char Pos.

Your Label 008—Videos—OCLC order Related Fields

Tech

008/34 Technique a animation c animation and live action l live action n not applicable; not a motion picture or a videorecording u unknown z other technique

DtSt 008/06 Type of date m 2 dates - earliest date and latest date (multi-part) p 2 dates – distrib./release/issue and date or prod./recording q 2 dates - earliest date and latest date (questionable) r 2 dates – repub./reissue date and date of original or 'uuuu' s 1 date - single known or probable date t 2 dates - publication date and copyright date

260$c 500$a

Dates 008/07-10 008/11-14

Date 1 usually the 1st date (publication or copyright) from the

260$c use 'u' for unknown digits, but not 'uuuu' Date 2 usually the 2nd date from the 260$c; often a copyright date,

but a republication or original production date if a note is present

use 'u' for unknown digits, but use 'uuuu' only for DtSt: r

260$c 260$c 500

Fixed-length data elements 008 Serials—OCLC



Char Pos.

Your Label 008—Serials—OCLC order Related Fields


ELvl 040$d ELvl



Type 000/06 Type of record a language material (incl. printed, microform, electronic) c notated music (incl. microform and electronic ) d manuscript notated music (incl. microform ) e cartographic material (incl. maps, atlases, globes) f manuscript cartographic material (incl. microform) g projected medium (incl. motion pictures, videos & DVD) i nonmusical sound recording (incl. speech) j musical sound recording (incl. compact discs, or cassettes) k 2-dimen. non-projectable graphic (incl. postcards, posters) m computer file / electronic resource (incl. software) o kit (2 or more types of items, none predominant) p mixed material (local collections e.g., text, photos, etc.) r 3-dimen.artifact or naturally occurring object t manuscript language material (incl. theses, letters)

245$h; 300$a



040$a

GPub 008/28 Government publication # not a government publication a autonomous or semi-autonomous component c multi-local f federal / national i international intergovernmental l local m multi-state o government publication--level undetermined s state, provincial, territorial, dependent, etc. u unknown if item is a government publication z other

260$c


008 Fixed-length data elements Serials—OCLC


OCLC Label

Char Pos.

Your Label 008—Serials—OCLC order Related Fields




041; 546

BLvl 000/07 Bibliographic level b serial component part (the serial record is for a serial part

of a serial item, with a 773 for the host) s serial (issued in successive parts and intended to be


773

Form 008/23 Form of item # none of the following a microfilm b microfiche c microopaque d large print f Braille r regular print reproduction; eye-readable print s electronic (computer is needed for access)

245$h; 300$a; 533$a

Conf 008/29 Conference publication proceedings, reports or summaries of a conference 0 not a conference publication 1 conference publication

Freq 008/18 Frequency code # no determinable frequency; intentionally irregular a annual b bimonthly (includes 6, 7, or 8 numbers a year) c semiweekly d daily e biweekly f semiannual; includes 2 numbers a year. g biennial h triennial i three times a week j three times a month k continuously updated m monthly (includes 9, 10, 11, or 12 numbers a year) q quarterly (includes 4 numbers a year) s semimonthly t three times a year u unknown w weekly z other

Regl; 310




International Standard Book Number 020


020 International Standard Book Number (ISBN) Rule A 1.8

Source of information (1.8A2) Any source End of field punctuation None

Input standards—LC: Full Required if applicable Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Required if applicable / Required if applicable

Repeatable Yes Indicators Blank—Undefined Subfields

$a Valid ISBN (NR) #:$c Terms of Availability (NR)

$z Canceled/Invalid ISBN (R) Hint

An 020 contains an International Standard Book Number (ISBN). It can also contain a term of availability for the resource and a qualifier for the ISBN. Since ISBNs are assigned by publishers and are supposed to uniquely identify one edition of a work from one specific publisher, they are often used to try to detect duplicate MARC records during 'machine matching'.4 Many library automation systems rely on the ISBN instead of, or as well as, the LCCN for machine matching. If the same ISBN is in two records that are loaded to a database, and the system is set up to match on ISBN, then the system will see that the records have the same ISBN and will treat them as duplicates: 020 $a0027780147 100 1 $aRylant, Cynthia. 245 10 $aHenry and Mudge and the wild wind :$bthe twelfth book of their

adventures /$cstory by Cynthia Rylant. 260 $aNew York :$bBradbury Press ;$aToronto :$bMaxwell Macmillan Canada

; $aNew York :$bMaxwell Macmillan International,$cc1993. 300 $a40 p. :$bcol. ill. ;$c22 cm. 852 $p32424000001225

020 $a0027780147 100 1 $aRylant, Cynthia. 245 10 $aHenry and Mudge and the wild wind :$bthe twelfth book of their


; $aNew York :$bMaxwell Macmillan International,$cc1993. 300 $a40 p. :$bcol. ill. ;$c22 cm. 852 $p32424000001259

The above records are duplicates. If these records are loaded to the same database, they should match on their 020 and merge to make one record, retaining the barcode numbers (given here 852$p) for each copy: 020 $a0027780147 100 1 $aRylant, Cynthia. 245 10 $aHenry and Mudge and the wild wind :$bthe twelfth book of their


; $aNew York :$bMaxwell Macmillan International,$cc1993. 300 $a40 p. :$bcol. ill. ;$c22 cm. 852 $p32424000001259 852 $p32424000001225

4 Machine matching occurs when a MARC record is loaded to a database and the library automation system tries to determine whether the incoming record is the same as a record that may already be in the database.

020 International Standard Book Number


In order for a library automation system to determine that two ISBNs match, both ISBNs must be provided in the same format; this is called 'normalization'. The 'normalized' structure for an ISBN is:

• a ten-digit or 13-digit number with no spaces or hyphens between the numbers

• if the number ends in a lower case 'x', enter it in upper case (X)

The ISBN on a resource may look like this: 0-8389-3386-6 or 0 8389 3386 6 or 978-0-1560-3054-0

Whatever utility/software you are using, you should enter ISBNs in this normalized format:

0838933866 or 9780156030540 If a number claims to be an ISBN but is not either 10 or 13 digits, enter it as an invalid ISBN; see 020$z for further details. Because ISBNs are used for matching duplicate records, it is also very important that the same ISBN should never be found in two records that are different.

If an ISBN appears, or could appear, in multiple, different records, then the only safe way to prevent them from ever being merged during machine matching is to put the ISBNs in subfield $z in all of the records. See 020$z for further details. If a search on an ISBN from a resource retrieves a record that does not match the resource, then enter that ISBN in subfield $z in the record for the resource.

L 1.8

See the LCRI for details about the history of ISBNs and how they should be entered.

Hint 2005

By Jan 1, 2007 all ISBN will be 13 digits instead of 10 digits in length. In the interim, we are starting to see both 10 digit and 13 digit ISBN appearing on resources. When this happens, the 13-ISBN will be the same as the 10-ISBN just with the addition of the prefix '978' and a different check digit (last digit). This is the same format as an EAN (see 024). LC is entering both the 13 and 10 digit ISBNs in separate 020, with the 13-ISBN given first (for more details see http://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/13digit.html):

020 $a9780195170306 (alk. paper) 020 $a019517030X (alk. paper)

Check with OCLC for their instructions for this situation. If a 13-ISBN is also given as an EAN (see 024), also enter it as an EAN. For more information about 13 digit ISBNs see the following NISO webpage: http://www.niso.org/standards/resources/ISBN.html#FAQ=20

L 12.8B1 2002

SE If an issue or part of a serial has an ISBN, do not add that ISBN to the serial record.



020 $a International Standard Book Number

Rule A 1.8B Source of information (1.8A2) Any source Preceding punctuation None


Repeatable No [used to be, but not now] Hint

020$a contains a properly normalized, valid ISBN: 020 $a0123456789

A 1.8B1 Give the ISBN for the resource being described.

A 1.8B2 If more than one ISBN is present, give the one that applies to your resource. Optional: add the other ISBN [in separate 020] with qualifications as per 1.8E:

020 $a0435916602 (cased) 020 $a0435916610 (pbk.)

L 1.8B "Transcribe first the number that is applicable to the item being described; transcribe other numbers in the order presented." — May '95

Hint

A single record can contain multiple valid ISBNs ($a). When copying a record, you do not have to change the order of the ISBNs to make your number first. If multiple ISBNs are present on a resource be very careful if you are going to add them all. Remember that some library automation systems use ISBNs for machine matching, and so you must not give the same ISBN in subfield $a in more than one, different, record. For example, if you have a book which has a library binding and it has the following ISBNs, you could enter all of them quite safely in separate 020$a because they can all share the same record:

020 $a0123456789 (library binding) 020 $a0123457890 (trade ed.) 020 $a0123458901 (pbk.)

However, if you have a regular print book which also carries an ISBN for a large print version, then the ISBN for the large print version really belongs in a separate record (that should be made for the large print version). You can add the large print ISBN to your regular print record, but if you do, you must add it as 'non-applicable' using subfield $z (see 020$z following):

020 $a0234578901 (trade ed.) 020 $z0234589012 (lg. print)

You must enter the large print ISBN as $z in the regular print record because you cannot have the same ISBN (for the large print) in subfield $a in two completely different records (the record for the regular print and the record for the large print). If you ever do that and then load both records to the same database, they will machine match on the ISBN and merge, and one of the different records will be lost. This applies to ISBNs for all types of resources. For example, if you have a

020 International Standard Book Number


sound cassette that carries an ISBN for the sound cassette version and another ISBN for a sound disc version, then the ISBN for the sound disc version really belongs in a separate record. You can add the sound disc ISBN to your sound cassette record, but if you do, you must enter it in subfield $z—see 020$z below).

A 1.8B3 Make a note of other numbers (1.7B19).

A 1.8B4 If you know the ISBN is incorrect and know the correct number, give it and add '(corrected)':

020 $a0340164271 (corrected)

Hint You could also add the incorrect number in subfield $z in another 020, just to show that you know about that number and know that it is incorrect.

A 1.8E1 Add a brief qualification to multiple ISBNs: 020 $a0387082662 (U.S.) 020 $a3540082662 (Germany)

2003 Add a qualification to a single ISBN if desired: 020 $a0936996773 (pbk.)

Hint Watch out for qualifiers that indicate different types of formats for which you

need to make different records, such as large print and regular print versions of a work. See the hint under L1.8B above for further details.

020 :$c Terms of availability

Rule A 1.8D Source of information (1.8A2) Any source Preceding punctuation Space colon (#:$c)

Input standards—LC: Full Required if applicable Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Optional / Optional

Repeatable No Related fields 037$c

Hint 020$c contains the terms of availability of a resource (e.g., price). However,

use 037$c for terms of availability of a serial (e.g., the subscription price). Note that most libraries now enter availability information in an item record instead of 020$c or 037$c.

A 1.8D1 Give the price of a resource, or a brief statement of other terms, if it is not for sale:

020 $a0123456789 :$c$105.95 020 $cFree to students

L 1.8 "Do not transcribe prices or other terms of availability" — May 1995.



020 $z Canceled / invalid ISBN

Rule A 1.8 Source of information (1.8A2) Any source Preceding punctuation None


Repeatable Yes Hint 020$z contains a properly normalized, invalid ISBN:

020 $z0123456789 020 $z0345678901$z0456789012

An ISBN must be either 10 or 13digits in length. If an ISBN found on a resource is not either 10 or 13 digits, it must be entered in subfield $z. In addition, some cataloging software programs can compute the check digit in an ISBN to tell when an ISBN is typed incorrectly (e.g., OCLC or MARC Report). In OCLC such an ISBN is moved to subfield $z as invalid, in other software you may have to change the subfield code manually. If the same ISBN is printed on resources that require separate records, enter the ISBN in subfield $z in each record to prevent possible incorrect machine matching (see 020 above for an explanation of machine matching using ISBN): 020 $a0030143667 100 1 $aReed, Bob. 245 10 $aSand creatures and castles :$bhow to build them /$cBob and Pat

Reed ; illustrated with line drawings and photos. 260 $aNew York :$bHolt, Rinehart and Winston,$cc1976. 300 $a63 p. :$bill. ;$c24 cm.

020 $a0030143667 100 1 $aWilliams, Barbara. 245 1 $aCornzapoppin'! :$bPopcorn recipes and party ideas for all

occasions / $cBarbara Williams ; photographs by Royce L. Bair. 260 $aNew York :$bHolt, Rinehart and Winston,$cc1976. 300 $a160 p. :$bill. ;$c24 cm.

The above records are not the same, and yet they both contain the same ISBN. The only way to prevent these two records from ever erroneously merging during machine matching on 020 is to enter one or both ISBN in subfield $z. It is safest to enter the ISBN in both records in subfield $z since you never know when an uncorrected record might be loaded to your database. Using 020$z may cause duplicate records to be loaded occasionally. For instance if two records are truly the same, but one record has the ISBN in a subfield $z, then the records will not match and a duplicate record will be added to the database. However, duplicates are more easily caught and fixed than bad matches—where one of the different records is no longer to be found at all! ISBNs are convenient search keys, as well as match keys. Check that your library automation system allows you to search on 020$z, but does not match on 020$z when it is detecting duplicate records in the loading process.

022 International Standard Serial Number


022 International Standard Serial Number (ISSN) Rule A 1.8

Source of information (1.8A2) Any source End of field punctuation None


Repeatable Yes Indicator 1 Level of international interest [assigned by an ISDS only]

# Level of international interest not designated [always use # and don't worry about the other indicator values unless you are an ISDS]

Indicator 2 Blank--Undefined Subfields

$a Valid ISSN (NR) $y Incorrect ISSN (R) $z Canceled or invalid ISSN (R) $2 Source (NR)

Hint

An 022 contains an International Standard Serial Number or ISSN. If more than one ISSN is present on a resource, they should all be added to the record for the resource (in separate 022 fields). ISSNs are defined as unique identification numbers assigned to a continuing resource. Since they are supposed to be unique, they are often used to try to detect duplicate MARC records during 'machine matching'.5 Some library automation systems use the ISSN as well as the LCCN and ISBN for this purpose. If the same ISSN is in two records that are loaded to a database, the system will see that they have the same ISSN and will treat the two records as duplicates. In order for machine matching to determine that two ISSNs match, both ISSNs must be entered in the same format; this is called 'normalization'. The 'normalized' structure for an ISSN is:

• two groups of four digits with a hyphen between them • if the number ends in a lower case 'x', enter it in upper case (X)

Whatever utility/software you are using, you should enter ISSNs in this normalized format, e.g., 1040-5763 Because ISSNs are used for matching duplicate records, it is also very important that the same ISSN should never appear in two records that are not the same. However, publishers do not seem to understand that ISSNs are supposed to be unique. They print the same ISSN on different editions of a serial, and sometimes simply make a mistake and print the same ISSN on two completely different serials. If you know that an ISSN that is found on a serial is already entered as valid

5 Machine matching occurs when a MARC record is loaded to a database and the system tries to determine whether the incoming record is the same as a record that may already be in the database.

Publisher number 028


See the MARC21 or OCLC manual for details on complicated numbers.

MARC "In case of doubt as to whether a number is a publisher's number, record the number in field 500 or 037."

A 1.7B19 Note numbers borne by the resource.

A 6.7B19 SR Transcribe a publisher's number exactly as it is given on the item: 028 01 $aSTMA 8007$bTamla Motown

Give the brand or trade name and the stock number. If two or more numbers are present, give the principal one (if it is obvious) otherwise give them all.

L 6.7B19 2005

Enter publisher's numbers as they appear, including any spaces and hyphens. If the same publisher's number appears in various forms (e.g., spaced differently on a label, on a container and on accompanying material) use the form found on the chief source. However, if multiple, different, publisher's numbers are found on a sound recording, enter them all. [Enter the first number from the chief source first]. If it seems useful, add the location of all but the first number in parentheses. [Repeat the numbers in a 500 Numbers Note if you are adding anything in parentheses]:

Hint Enter multiple, different numbers in separate 028s. Turn off display of the 028

and repeat the numbers in a 500 Numbers Note if you are adding anything in parentheses:

028 03 $aFSM 43721$bPape 028 03 $aPOPR 790051$bPape 500 $aPape: FSM 43721. 500 $aPape: POPR 790051 (on container).

A 6.7B19 If multiple numbers are given for a multipart resource, and one number is for the entire set, give it first. Add the designation (set) [Repeat the numbers in a 500 Numbers Note if you are adding anything in parentheses]. If the individual items in a set have different, consecutive numbers, give the numbers inclusively. If the numbers are not consecutive, give each number, but if more than three numbers are present, give only the first and the last number, separated by a slash. [Use a 500 Numbers Note for this].

L 6.7B19

If a set number appears on all of the items in a set, give the set number as the only number [in an 028 with I2 = 1]. However, if a set number does not appear on each of the individual items in the set, give the set number first followed by the numbers on the individual items in parentheses. (See the hint below for an example) "Separate the first and last numbers of a [consecutive] sequence by a dash"

028 Publisher number


2005

(two hyphens '--'). If a series of consecutive numbers is given in truncated form, spell it out, e.g., LPX 18124-28:

500 $aHungaroton: LPX 18124--LPX 18128. Only give matrix numbers if they are the only numbers available.

Hint If you are entering both the set number and individual numbers, enter the set number in the first 028 and the individual numbers of the items in separate succeeding 028, so that the numbers will be indexed. Use I2 = 3 to turn off the display of these 028s. Then manually enter these numbers again in a 500 Numbers Note, giving the set number first, followed by the individual numbers in parentheses. This note will be displayed instead of the 028:

028 03 $a443 021-2$bLondon 028 03 $a443 022-2$bLondon 028 03 $a443 023-2$bLondon 500 $aLondon: 443 021-2 (443 022-2--443 023-2).

Hint VD Follow the rules and hints under SR above when entering publisher's numbers for videos.

028 $a Publisher number

Rule A 6.7B19 Source of information (1.7A2) Any source Preceding punctuation None


Repeatable No Hint 028$a contains a properly formatted publisher's number:

028 01 $aM 35073 028 03 $a443 021-2

Do not enter inclusive numbers here; use separate 028 for each number, set the second indicator to not make a note from them (I2 = 3), and manually add a 500 Numbers Note with the inclusive numbers.

028 $b Source

Rule A 6.7B19 Source of information (1.7A2) Any source Preceding punctuation None


Repeatable No Hint 028$b contains the brand name or trade name associated with the publisher's

number; the same name that is entered in 260$b as the publisher of the resource:

028 01 $aCDS 7 49171 2$bEMI

Language codes 041


041 Language codes Rule None


Input standards—LC: Full Required if applicable Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Required if applicable / Optional

Repeatable Yes Indicator 1 Translation

0 Is not, does not include a translation 1 Is or includes a translation

Indicator 2 # 7

Source of code MARC language code Source specified in $2

Subfields $a Language code(s) of text (R) $b Language code(s) of summary/abstract/subtitle (R) $d Language code of sung/spoken text (R) $e Language code of librettos (R) $f Language code of table of contents (R) $g Language code of accomp. material—not librettos (R) $h Language code of original/intermediate translation of text (R) $2 Source of code—if not the MARC21 code list for languages (NR)

Related fields 008 Lang ; 546 ; 580 ; 765 Hint An 041 contains codes for languages associated with a resource when the 008

Language code cannot cover the situation. This field is closely related to the 546 Language Note field. If a resource has only one language associated with it, then an 041 is not needed, as the single Lang code in the 008 will be sufficient to tell the library automation system about the language of the resource. However, if more than one language is involved, then the patrons need to be told this in a 546 note, and the system needs to be told this in an 041 field. Therefore, if you provide information about languages in a 546 Language Note for the patrons to see, then you should also provide codes for those languages in an 041 for the system. Use codes from the MARC21 Code List For Languages in the 041 field. See the LC or OCLC format manuals for much more comprehensive instructions on coding this field.

041 $a Language code(s) of text

Rule None Source of information Not applicable Preceding punctuation None

Input standards—LC: Full Mandatory [Required if applicable for ER, VD, SR] Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Mandatory / Mandatory [Required if applicable for ER, VD, SR]

Repeatable Yes Related fields 008 Lang ; 546

Hint 041$a contains codes for the languages associated with a resource. For

resources in multiple languages, enter each language code in a separate

041 Language codes


subfield $a in the order of their predominance, or in alphabetical order if predominance cannot be determined:

008 Lang: eng 041 0 $aeng$afre$ager 546 $aText is in English, French, and German.

The code in the first subfield $a must be the same as the code in the 008 Lang, unless you have used 'mul' in the 008 Lang:

008 Lang: mul 041 0 $aeng$afre$ager 546 $aText is in English, French, and German.

Use subfield $d instead of subfield $a for languages involved in a sound recording. For sound recordings that have no sung or spoken words, but have summaries, tables of contents, or accompanying material in multiple languages, enter the codes for those languages in the appropriate subfields with no $d and with blanks in 008 Lang:

008 Lang: ### 041 0 $gfre$gger$gspa 546 $aAccompanying program notes are in French,

German, and Spanish. It is likely that you will see multiple language codes entered as a string in a single 041$a in records that you find for copy cataloging, e.g., $afregerspa. This format was made obsolete in 2001 when the 041 subfields were made repeatable. You do not have to update this older format, unless your library automation system vendor says that you should.

041 $b Language code(s) of summary/abstract/subtitle




Hint 041$b contains codes for the languages of summaries or subtitles if those

languages are different from the languages of the main resource: 008 Lang: eng 041 0 $aeng$bfre$bger$bspa 546 $aText is in English, with summaries in French,

German and Spanish. Also use subfield $b for the languages of the subtitles of a video (considered a translation):

008 Lang: dut 041 1 $adut$afre$ager$aita$aspa$beng 546 $aSoundtrack in Dutch, French, German, Italian

and Spanish, with subtitles in English.

Language codes 041


041 $d Language code(s) of sung/spoken text




Hint 041$d contains codes for the languages of sung or spoken content of a sound

recording: 008 Lang: eng 041 0 $deng$dfre 546 $aRecording is in English and French.

041 $e Language code(s) of librettos




Hint 041$e contains codes for the languages of text that is printed separately from

music: 008 Lang: eng 041 0 $deng$eeng$efre$eger 546 $aRecording is in English with accompanying

lyrics in English, French and German.

041 $f Language code(s) of table of contents




Hint 041$f contains codes for the languages of tables of contents that are different

from the languages of the main resource: 008 Lang: rum 041 0 $arum$ffre$fger$frus 546 $aText is in Romanian with tables of contents in

French, German and Russian.

041 Language codes


041 $g Language code(s) of accompanying material (not librettos)




Hint 041$g contains codes for the languages of accompanying material that are

different to the language of the main resource: 008 Lang: ger 041 0 $ager$geng 546 $aThe photograph collection has captions in

German and accompanying material in English.

041 $h Language code(s) of original or intermediate translations of text



Repeatable Yes Related fields 008 Lang ; 546 ; 580 ; 765

Hint 041$h contains codes for the languages of the original work and/or

intermediate translations of a work: 008 Lang: eng 041 1 $aeng$hfre 546 $aText is in English, translated from French.

Main entries 1XX Main vs. added entries


If your resource does not fall under one of the 'Special rules' categories, then consider whether there is single responsibility indicated on the item. If so, go to A21.4. If there is more than one person or body listed as responsible on the resource, consider whether the responsibility for the resource is 'Mixed' or 'Shared'. The types of responsibility listed under 'Mixed' (A21.8-28) are very specific, e.g., adaptations, revisions, etc. If your work does not fall under one of the 'Mixed' categories, then go to 'Shared' instead (A21.6). If you cannot find any responsibility indicated on a resource, try the rules under 'Unknown' (A21.5). If it turns out that you have a 'Collection', go to A21.7. If none of these gives you the answer you need, start at the top and try again; the answer is there somewhere, it may just take a little extra work to uncover it. During the process of determining your main entry, you will often be instructed to add secondary added entries for people or bodies that have some responsibility for the work but were not chosen to be the main entry. In addition to these instructions, however, you should also go on to the added entry rules (A21.29 – A21.30 under 7XX) to decide whether you need any additional added entries. Brief summaries are provided in the following pages to help you to remember what to do in simple main vs. added entry situations. However, always see the AACR rules themselves for help with tricky works. Wherever it is possible to succinctly convey the rule instructions, those instructions are given in italics below. Wherever the rule is so complicated that it could not be expressed in simple terms, you are told to 'see the rule'.

1XX Main Entries Special rules—Main vs. added entries


MAIN ENTRIES—SPECIAL RULES

A 21.31 L 21.31

Laws, etc.: • see the rule and LCRI

A 21.32 L 21.32A

Administrative regulations, etc.: • see the rule and LCRI

A 21.33 L 21.33A

Constitutions, charters, and other fundamental laws: • see the rule and LCRI

A 21.34

Court rules: • see the rule

A 21.35 L 21.35

Treaties, etc. : • see the rule and LCRI

A 21.36 L 21.36C

Court decisions, cases, etc.: • see the rule and LCRI

A 21.37

Sacred scriptures: • see the rule

A 21.38 L 21.38

Theological creeds, confessions of faith, etc. : • see the rule and LCRI

A 21.39 L 21.39

Liturgical works: • see the rule and LCRI

A 21.23 Sound recordings

Hint Technically, sound recordings fall under the category of "Mixed responsibility", but we are putting them under "Special rules" to group them with the special rules for other formats. Apply the following rules when cataloging musical and non-musical sound recordings, music videos, and songbooks. For a sound recording, primacy is given to the author of the written form of the work, e.g., the composer, if the work is musical, or the novelist if the work is a reading of a work of fiction, etc. However, collections that are written or composed by different authors are entered under a 'substitute author', i.e., a person or body considered to be the principal performer. A 'performer' is a person or body whose performance is heard. According to L21.23C, if a person is: • a member of a corporate body (performing group, or orchestra, etc.), do

not consider him as a separate performer • a conductor or accompanist, he is separate from the group he conducts or

accompanies • named with a group, and his or her name is not part of the name of the

group, the person is a separate performer from the group (see also L24.1A under 110 Corporate main entry—Corporate name headings)

• named with a group, but the name of the group always includes the name of the person, the person is not a separate performer from the group

Main entries 1XX Main vs. added entries—Special rules


A 'principal performer' is the person or body that is most prominently given in wording or layout on the chief source of the item. According to L21.23C, in judging prominence, if names are printed in the same size and style of lettering, and: • are given together, they are equal in prominence • are in a list, they are equal in prominence • one is in a higher position, it is more prominent.

When a composer is the main entry for a musical sound recording, or a writer of the text is the main entry for a non-musical sound recording, always make an added entry for the principal performer(s), such as singers, readers, orchestras, etc. If a musical work cannot be entered under its composer or principal performer, then it must be entered under its title. In such a case, the title proper may be the main entry if that title proper has been used for all manifestations of a work and is unique and distinctive; otherwise, a uniform title must be used for the title main entry. Uniform titles are very common for classical works.

A 21.23A Sound recordings—One work, e.g., an opera or a book on tape: • the main entry is the same as the main entry for the original work (e.g.,

the composer of the opera or the writer of the book) • if there are 3 or less principal performers, make added entries for all

principal performers • if there are more than 3 principal performers, make an added entry for the

first named principal performer

A 21.23B Sound recordings—Two or more works all written or composed by the same persons or bodies, e.g., "Odetta sings Dylan", songs written by Bob Dylan and sung by Odetta: • the person or body responsible for the works is the main entry, e.g., Dylan

determine responsibility using: 21.4—single responsibility 21.6—shared responsibility 21.8—mixed responsibility

• if there are 3 or less principal performers, make added entries for all principal performers, e.g., Odetta

• if there are more than 3 principal performers, make an added entry for the first named principal performer

A 21.23C L 21.23C

Sound recordings—Works written or composed by different persons or bodies—Collective title—1 principal performer, e.g., "Waltzing Matilda and other Australian songs", sung by William Clauson: • the principal performer is the main entry, e.g., Clauson • if only one performer is named (person or group), consider him (or it) the

principal performer

1XX Main Entries Special rules—Main vs. added entries


Sound recordings—Works written or composed by different persons or bodies—Collective title—2-3 principal performers, e.g., "Alan Mills and Jean Carignan: songs, fiddle tunes, and a folk-tale from Canada", sung by Alan Mills and Jean Carignan: • the first named principal performer is the main entry, e.g., Mills • make added entries for the other principal performers, e.g., Carignan

Sound recordings—Works written or composed by different persons or bodies—Collective title—more than 3 or no principal performers, e.g., "Celtic Heartbeat Christmas", sung by various artists: • the title is the main entry (130 or 245), e.g., Celtic Heartbeat Christmas;

there is no instruction to make added entries for the performers in this situation

• if no performer is named, consider that there is no principal performer, and enter the work under its title.

A 21.23D1a

Sound recordings—Works written or composed by different persons or bodies—No collective title—Participation is beyond performance, etc. (e.g., pop, rock, and jazz) In this type of music, the participation of the performer is considered to be more than just performance, execution, or interpretation.

Only one principal performer: • the principal performer is the main entry

More than one, but less than 4 principal performers: • the first named principal performer is the main entry • make added entries for the others

More than 3 principal performers or no principal performer:

• the heading for the first work is the main entry determine the heading for the work using:

21.4—single responsibility 21.6—shared responsibility 21.8—mixed responsibility

A 21.23D1b

Sound recordings—Works written or composed by different persons or bodies—No collective title—Participation is not beyond performance, etc. (e.g., classical works) In this type of music, the participation of the performer is not considered to go beyond performance, execution, or interpretation. For example, "Symphony no. 1, in C minor, op. 68" by Brahms, with "Symphony no 7, in A major, op. 92" by Beethoven: • the heading for the first named work is the main entry, e.g., Brahms

determine the heading for the work using: 21.4—single responsibility 21.6—shared responsibility 21.8—mixed responsibility

• make name/title added entries for the other works, as per A21.7C • make added entries for the principal performers of each work, as per

A21.23A1

Main entries 110 Corporate name main entry


A 24

CORPORATE NAME HEADINGS Do not enter spaces between initials in a corporate name heading (because they given in direct order):

$aJ.C. Penney. Enter a corporate name in direct order under its common name, unless it is a subordinate body (A24.12). The rules for headings for corporate bodies cover government bodies as well as private sector organizations. In addition, some unlikely places and entities are considered to be corporate bodies for cataloging and coding purposes. For help in deciding on the kinds of things to be treated as corporate bodies, see Appendix X in the LC MARC manual, or the "MARC 21 Format for Authority and Bibliographic Data—Alphabetical List of Ambiguous Headings" at: http://www.loc.gov/marc/ambiguous-headings.html

L 24.1A 2005

When a person's name is given with the name of a performing group and you cannot find proof that the name of the group includes the personal name, assume that the names are separate, e.g., J.D. Crow and the New South are to be given separately. See the LCRI for further details on ambiguous entities that are treated as corporate bodies, and:

Special letter/Symbol Punctuation/Spacing Canadian headings 'AACR2 compatible' headings Airports Cemeteries Concentration camps Plans, programs, and projects Printers Forests, Parks, Preserves, etc.

A 24.1-3 CHOICE OF CORPORATE NAME As with personal and geographic names, our first step in establishing a heading for a corporate name is to choose which name we will use for the body, especially if it has more than one name.

A 24.1A

Common name, e.g., Association for Information Management: • use the common name by which a body is known, as found on works

issued by the body in its language, or if this is not possible, as found in reference sources: $aAslib.

A 24.1B L 24.1B

Romanization: • see the rule and LCRI

A 24.1C Change of name, e.g., Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company vs. 3M Company: • establish the new name for the body based on what is found on the

resource being cataloged: $aMinnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company.

110 Main entries Corporate name main entry


$a3M Company.

A 24.2B L 24.2B

Variant names: • if a body uses different names on resources, prefer the name found on the

chief sources of those resources over other sources.

L 24.2 See the LCRI for details on minor changes of names, proposed bodies, and university libraries named for persons.

A 24.2C L 24.2C

Variant names—Due to spelling: • see the rule and LCRI

A 24.2D L 24.2D

Variant names—On chief sources: • use the name presented formally • if none or all are formal, use the predominant form • if none are predominant, use the brief form (including an initialism or

acronym) as long as it is unique enough to identify the body.

A 24.3A L 24.3A

Variant names—Language: • use the name in the official language of the body • if the body has more than one official language, and English is one of

them, use the English form • if the body has more than one official language, and English is not one of

them, see the rule and LCRI

A 24.3B Variant names—Languages—International bodies: • if the body has given its name in English on any of the resources that it

issues, use the English form • if the body never gives its name in English on the resources that it issues,

see the rule under A23.3A

A 24.3C Variant names—Conventional name: • if a body is commonly referred to in reference sources in its own language

by a conventional name, use the conventional name rather than its official name

• see the rules for entering names for: Ancient and international bodies; Autocephalous patriarchates, archidioceses, etc.

A 24.3D Religious orders and societies: • see the rule

A 24.3E L 24.3E

Governments: • use the conventional (geographic) name of a government, unless the

official name is more commonly used

A 24.3F

Conferences, congresses, meetings, etc.: • see under 111 below

A 24.3G L 24.3G

Local churches, etc.: • see the rule and LCRI

Main entries 110 Corporate name main entry


A 24.5A Omissions—Initial articles: • omit initial articles (e.g., The British Library) unless the name is to file

under the initial article (e.g., Los Angeles): $aBritish Library. $aLos Angeles.

A 24.5B Omissions—Citations of honors: • see the rule

A 24.5C L 24.5C1

Omissions—Terms indicating incorporation and certain other terms, e.g., Wildseed, Inc.: • omit terms indicating incorporation, etc., unless they are needed to clarify

that something is a corporate body: $aWildseed, Inc.

A 24.12-19 Subordinate and related bodies: • enter a subordinate body under its own name unless it is one of the types

listed under 24.13 below [that make you ask 'whose' body]

A 24.13 L 24.13

Subordinate and related bodies—Entered subordinately: Type 1: name indicates body is part of another (e.g., Dept., Div.) Type 2: name indicates administrative subordination (e.g., Committee) Type 3: name is general—geographic, chronological, or a number or letter

(e.g., Region IX) Type 4: name does not convey idea of corporate body (e.g., Public

Relations) Type 5: name indicates field of study (e.g., College of Medicine) Type 6: name includes entire name of higher body (e.g., American Legion.

Auxiliary; American Library Association. Conference)

L 24.13 Type 2 Type 3 Type 5 Type 6

• see the LCRI for a list of words that commonly imply administrative subordination as per Type 2 above, e.g., 'agency', 'board', 'bureau', 'office', etc.

• see the LCRI for clarification of Type 3 • see the LCRI for clarification of Type 5 • see the LCRI for clarification of Type 6

A 24.14 Subordinate and related bodies—Direct or indirect subheadings, e.g., American Library Association. Resources Section. Acquisitions Committee • enter the highest and lowest elements in the hierarchy; omit intervening

elements unless they are needed to distinguish the body: $aAmerican Library Association. Acquisitions

Committee.

A 24.15 L 24.15AB

Joint committees, commissions, etc.: • see the rule and LCRIs

A 24.16 Conventionalized subheadings for state and local elements of United States political parties: • see the rule

A 24.17 L 24.17

Government bodies and officials, e.g., Arts Alliance of Washington State: • enter a subordinate body of a government under its own name:

$aArts Alliance of Washington State. unless it is one of the types listed under 24.18 below [that make you ask

'whose' body]:

110 Main entries Corporate name main entry


A 24.18 L 24.18

Government agencies—Entered subordinately: Type 1: name indicates body is part of another (e.g., Section, Dept.) Type 2: name indicates administrative subordination (e.g., Bureau) Type 3: name is general—geographic, chronological, or a number or letter

(e.g., Sabah Region) Type 4: name does not convey idea of a corporate body and does not

contain the name of the government (e.g., Research & Analysis) Type 5: ministry or other executive agency (e.g., Ministry of Defense) Type 6: legislative body (e.g., City Council) Type 7: court (e.g., Supreme Court) Type 8: principal service of the armed forces (e.g., Army) Type 9: head of state or government (e.g., Governor) Type 10: embassy, consulate, etc. (e.g., US Embassy to Canada) Type 11: delegation to an international or intergovernmental body

L 24.18 Type 2 Type 3 Type 5 Type 6 Type 11

• see the LCRI for a list of words that commonly imply administrative subordination as per Type 2 above, e.g., 'administration', 'directorate', 'panel', 'task force', etc.

• see the LCRI for clarification of Type 3 • see the LCRI for clarification of Type 5 • see the LCRI for clarification of Type 6 • see the LCRI for clarification of Type 11

A 24.19 L 24.19

Subordinate and related bodies—Direct or indirect subheadings, e.g., Virginia. Dept. of Personnel and Training. Health Benefits Program: • enter a subordinate agency directly under the government name; omit

intervening bodies unless the subordinate name could be used by another agency of the same government: $aVirginia. Dept. of Personnel and Training. Health

Benefits Program.

A 24.20 L 24.20B L 24.20E

Special rules—Government officials: • see the rule and LCRIs

A 24.21 L 24.21 B,C,D

Special rules—Legislative bodies: • see the rule and LCRIs

A 24.22 Special rules—Constitutional conventions: • see the rule

A 24.23 L 24.23

Special rules—Courts: • see the rule and LCRI

A 24.24 L 24.24A

Special rules—Armed forces: • see the rule and LCRI

A 24.25 Special rules—Embassies, consulates, etc.: • see the rule

A 24.26 L 24.26

Special rules—Delegations: • see the rule and LCRI

Main entries 130 Uniform title main entry


A 25.2C Omissions—Omit initial articles: • omit initial articles from uniform titles, unless the title is to be indexed

under that article

A 25.5B Additions—Conflict resolution, e.g., "Color purple", the movie vs. "Color purple", the book: • add an appropriate term of some sort in parentheses to a uniform title to

distinguish between works with the same or similar titles: $aColor purple (Motion picture)

Hint Give dates that are added for conflict resolution in parentheses in $a:

$aKing Kong (1933) However, give years that are added to titles of sacred scriptures in $f

L 25.5B See the LCRI for details on conflict resolution for: Serials Monographs Integrating resources Series-like phrases Title/phrase heading in series authority record identical to personal or

corporate name Radio and television programs U.S. Census publications Comics Motion pictures (rarely needed—see the rule for when to add) Choreographic works Named individual works of art Appendix 1—Motion pictures, television programs, radio programs

A 25.5C L 25.5C L 25.5D

Additions—Language, e.g., Chicken soup for the woman's soul in Spanish: • add the language of the content of the work if that language is not the

language of the original: $aChicken soup for the woman's soul.$lSpanish.

• do not add the language of the subtitles for a motion picture • see the rule for further details about languages

A 25.6 L 25.6A L 25.6A2 L 25.6B3

Parts of a work: • see the rule and LCRIs

A 25.7 L 25.7

Two works issued together: • see the rule and LCRI

A 25.8 L 25.8-11

Collective titles—Complete works: • see the rule and LCRIs

A 25.9 L 25.9

Collective titles—Selections: • see the rule and LCRI

A 25.10 L 25.10

Collective titles—Works in a single form: • see the rule and LCRI

A 25.11 L 25.11

Collective titles—Translations, etc.: • see the rule and LCRI

130 Main entries Uniform title main entry


A 25.12 Collective titles—Uniform titles for cycles and for stories with many versions: • see the rule

A 25.13 L 25.13

Special rules—Manuscripts and manuscript groups: • see the rule and LCRI

A 25.14 L 25.14

Special rules—Incunabula: • see the rule and LCRI

A 25.15 L 25.15A

Special rules—Laws, etc.: • see the rule and LCRIs

A 25.16 Special rules—Treaties, etc.: • see the rule

A 25.17-18 L 25.18A

Special rules—Sacred scriptures: • see the rules and LCRIs for:

Parts Additions:

Selections Language Version Year

Liturgical works

A 25.19-23 L 25.19,23

Special rules—Liturgical works, theological creeds, confessions of faith, etc.: • see the rules and LCRIs

A 25.19-23 L 25.19,23

Special rules—Official papal communications, etc.: • see the rules and LCRIs

A 25.25-35 L 25.25-35

Special rules—Music: • see the rules and LCRIs for details on: Individual titles

Selection of title Isolation of initial title element Formulation of initial title element Additions to initial title elements consisting of the name(s) of one or

more type(s) of composition Medium of performance Numbers Key Year

Additions to other initial title elements Parts of a work Two works issued together

Collective titles Selections

Additions to uniform titles for music Arrangements Language

Main entries 130 Uniform title main entry


130 $a

240$a, 6XX$t, 7XX$t, 8XX$t Uniform title

Rule 25—Uniform titles Sources of information Not applicable Preceding punctuation None


Repeatable No Hint X30$a, 240$a, and $t in name/title fields (6XX$t, 7XX$t, 8XX$t) contain a

uniform title, including parenthetical information added to make a title distinctive:

$aSnow White (Motion picture : 1997)

130 $n

240$n; 6XX$n, 7XX$n, 8XX$n Number of part or section of a work

Rule 25—Uniform titles Sources of information Not applicable Preceding punctuation Period for a number or part ( .$n)

Comma for an opus number (,$n) Input standards—LC: Full Required if applicable

Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Required if applicable / Required if applicable Repeatable Yes

Hint X30/240/6XX/7XX/8XX $n contains a number designation in a uniform title

for a part or section of a work, including opus numbers for music: $aNeverending story.$nII,$pNext chapter.$lSpanish. $aMazurkas,$mpiano,$nop. 30.$nNo. 4. $aTarantella,$mpiano,$nop. 43,$rAb major.

130 $p

240$p; 6XX$p, 7XX$p, 8XX$p Name of part or section of a work

Rule 25—Uniform title Sources of information Not applicable Preceding punctuation Period when following $a (.$p)

Comma when following $n (,$p) Input standards—LC: Full Required if applicable


Hint X30/240/6XX/7XX/8XX $p contains a name designation in a uniform title for

a part/section of a work. If a part has both a part number and a part title, separate them with a comma:

$aGlossa ordinaria.$nPars 22,$pIn Canticum canticorum.$lEnglish & Latin.

130 Main entries Uniform title main entry


130 .$l

240$l; 6XX$l, 7XX$l, 8XX$l Language of a work

Rule 25.5C Sources of information Not applicable Preceding punctuation Period (.$l)


Repeatable No Hint X30/240/6XX/7XX/8XX $l contains the language of the content of the work

for a uniform title: $aPractical Taoism.$lSpanish.

130 .$f

240$f; 6XX$f, 7XX$f, 8XX$f Date of a work

Rule 25.18A13 Sources of information Not applicable Preceding punctuation Period (.$f)


Repeatable No Hint X30/240/6XX/7XX/8XX $f contains the date of publication of the work for a

uniform title: $aBible.$lEnglish.$sNew Revised Standard.$f1997.

130 $g

240$g; 6XX$g, 7XX$g, 8XX$g Miscellaneous information

Rule 25.18A13 Sources of information Not applicable Preceding punctuation Period (.$g)


Repeatable No Hint X30/240/6XX/7XX/8XX $g contains miscellaneous information about the

uniform title. It is most commonly used in a 240, for a term such as 'Treaties, etc.':

110 1 $aAustralia. 240 10 $aTreaties, etc.$gUnited States,$d1982 Aug. 6.

Uniform title 240


3.2 240 Uniform title

Rule A25—Uniform titles Sources of information

BK (21.0B / 2.0B2) Title page or title page substitute (if no title page is available) ER (21.0B / 9.0B2) The resource itself (title screen, main menu, program statement,

initial display of info., home page, file header, or encoded metadata) or its physical carrier & labels—whichever has a coll. title and the most complete info.

SR (21.0B / 6.0B2) Physical carrier and label(s) VD (21.0B / 7.0B2) Title screens, physical carrier and label(s) SE (21.0B / 12.0B2) First issue or first available issue:

Print: Title page or title page substitute (if no title page is available) Non-print: See the applicable type of material

End of field punctuation None, unless the last word ends with its own punctuation Input standards—LC: Full Required if applicable

Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Required if applicable / Optional Repeatable No Indicator 1 Display specifications

0 Do not display 1 Display

Indicator 2 Nonfiling characters (0-9)—but omit initial articles from ALL uniform titles (unless a title is to be indexed under an article)

Subfields $a Uniform title (NR)

.$n Number of part/section of a work (R) ,$n Opus, serial or thematic index no. or a date used as a number (R) .$p Name of part/section of a work (R) ,$p Name of part/section of a work preceded by $n (R) .$l Language of a work (NR) .$f Date of a work (NR) $g Miscellaneous information (NR) .$k Form subheading—in a title (R) .$s Version—or edition of a work (NR)

$d( ) Date of treaty signing (R) ,$m Medium of performance for music (R) ;$o Arranged statement for music—contains the abbreviation 'arr.' (NR) ,$r Key for music (NR)

Hint A 240 contains a uniform title when the main entry (heading) for a resource

being described is a personal (100), corporate (110), or meeting (111) name: 100 1 $aKing, Greg,$d1964- 240 10 $aMan who killed Rasputin.$lSpanish 245 13 $aEl hombre que mató a Rasputín /$cGreg King. 100 1 $aLindgren, Astrid,$d1907- 240 10 $aPippi Leangstrump.$lEnglish 245 10 $aPippi Longstocking /$cAstrid Lindgren ;

translated by Florence Lamborn ; illustrated by Louis S. Glanzman.

240 Uniform title


100 1 $aBeethoven, Ludwig van,$d1770-1827. 240 10 $aSymphonies,$nno. 5, op. 67,$rC minor 245 10 $aSymphony no. 5 in C minor, op. 67 /$cLudwig

van Beethoven. 100 1 $aSaint-Exupery, Antoine de,$d1900-1944. 240 10 $aPetit prince.$lEnglish.$f1971 245 14 $aThe little prince /$cwritten and illustrated

by Antoine de Saint-Exupery ; translated from the French by Katherine Woods.

110 2 $aChurch of England. 240 10 $aBook of common prayer.$pCollects 245 14 $aThe collects of Thomas Cranmer /$ccompiled

and presented for devotional use by C. Frederick Barbee and Paul F.M. Zahl.

110 1 $aNavajo Tribe. 240 10 $aTreaties, etc.$gUnited States,$d1868 June 1 245 10 $aTreaty between the United States of America

and the Navajo tribe of Indians :$bwith a record of the discussions that led to its signing /$cintroduction by Martin A. Link

Indicator 1 in the 240 tells a local automation system whether or not to display the field in an OPAC full record display. (Note that if I1 = 0 turns off display of a 240, then it should also turn off indexing of that 240.) The second indicator for the 240 field is a filing indicator. An explanation of this is given under tag 245 beginning on p. 3.2-6. However we are currently to omit initial articles from all uniform titles, so I2 in 240 should always be '0'. Rules and coding instructions for the subfields of a 240 are given under tag 130 beginning on p. 3.1-47 The rules for when to add a uniform title to a record are given under 1XX (Main vs. Added entries beginning on p. 3.1-3 All uniform title headings should be under authority control. This means that they should be verified against an authority file (such as the Library of Congress Authority file or a local authority file) to ensure that the headings are given in a consistent, 'established' format. N.B. when going directly to the LC database to find a potential 240 (a uniform title that is not a main entry) in the LC Authority File, you must search under 'Name/Title Authority Headings'. If you cannot find a uniform title in an authority file, then you will have to follow the cataloging rules under 1XX to establish the heading for the title.

L 21.30J 8. Uniform title Do not make a title added entry for (i.e., do not index) a uniform title (240). [However, LC does in fact index uniform titles (240) in its OPAC]

General rules for description 245-5XX


245-5XX General rules for description L 1.0 See the LCRI for details on LC's decisions on the following before cataloging a

resource: What is being cataloged? Type of issuance Monograph vs. serial Situations requiring further consideration

Electronic resources Resources issued in loose-leaf format Conference publications Supplements Republications Printed travel guides Certain other printed resources

Edition or copy of monograph [LC's version of when to make a new record] Change in cataloging decision: monograph/serial Change in type of issuance Initial articles

A 1.0A1 See the rule for an explanation of the concept of sources of information. For specific details see the appropriate chapter for the particular type of material.

A 1.0A2 2004

See the rule for details about the basis of descriptions of single part resources vs. multipart resources, including multipart monographs, serials, and integrating resources.

A 1.0A3 2004

See the rule for details about: • the concept of 'chief source of information' and for details on resources

lacking chief sources of information • what to do when several chief sources are available. [Rule moved from

1.0H in the 2004 amendments]

L 1.0A3 See the LCRI for further details about resources with several chief sources of information.

A 1.0A4 2004

See the rule for an explanation of the concept of 'prescribed sources of information'

A 1.0B See the rule for details about organization of information.

A 1.0C See the rule for details about punctuation. ISBD punctuation is a special kind of punctuation that we use to indicate where one piece of data ends and another begins. For example:

A colon (:) in a title field indicates that what follows it is a subtitle Ellipses (…) indicate that we have left something off Square brackets ([ ]) indicate we have added something that was not present

on the prescribed source of information for the particular type of info.

Hint ISBD punctuation explanations are provided in this manual under the appropriate subfields in fields 245-5XX. Catalogers are expected to enter ISBD punctuation manually since most cataloging software does not attempt to add it automatically. If ISBD punctuation is added by any software, then that punctuation should be checked carefully, especially in the 245 field.

245-5XX General rules for description


L 1.0C See the LCRI for 23 very useful pages of details about punctuation.

Do not put spaces between initials in personal or corporate names given in direct order in the descriptive portion of a record.

A 1.0D See the rule for details about levels of detail.

A 1.0E See the rule for details about language and script.

L 1.0E See the LCRI for details about language and script of the description: Pre-modern forms of letters Matter that cannot be reproduced by the facilities available Super/Subscript characters Greek letters Special marks of contraction Special letters, diacritical marks, and punctuation marks Signs and symbols

A 1.0F1 Inaccuracies must be transcribed exactly as given in fields where descriptive information must be transcribed exactly. Add '[sic]' after a wrong spelling or '[i.e. …]' with the correctly spelled words, or add missing letters in square brackets. Consider adding 246 for titles with the corrected spelling.

A 1.0G See the rule for details about accents or diacritics.

L 1.0G See the LCRI for details about accents and other diacritical marks.

Title proper 245 $a


245 $a Title proper Rule A1.1B

Source of information BK (2.0B2) Title page or title page substitute (if no title page is available) ER (9.0B2) The resource itself (title screen, main menu, program statement,


SR (6.0B2) Physical carrier and label(s) VD (7.0B2) Video title screens, physical carrier and label(s) SE (12.0B2) First issue or first available issue:

Print: Title page or title page substitute (if no title page available) Non-print: See the appropriate type of material

Preceding punctuation None Input standards—LC: Full Mandatory

Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Mandatory / Mandatory Repeatable No

Related fields 246 Hint 245$a contains the title proper of a work and an alternative title if one is

present. It can also contain the first title of a collection of separate works lacking a collective title. See the rules below for more details on the information that can be entered in 245$a. When you are entering a title proper (245$a), also think about whether you need any added title added entries (246) for titles that you did not use as the title proper but which patrons may wish to search, e.g., cover titles, spine titles

A 1.1B1 2005 2003

Transcribe the title proper exactly in wording, order, and spelling, but follow standard rules (Chicago Manual of Style) for punctuation and AACR2R App. A for capitalization (think of the field as a sentence, e.g., capitalize the first word, proper names, and other titles, but see App. A for strange capitalization:

245 14 $aThe articulate mammal 245 00 $aWhy a duck? 245 14 $aThe plays of Oscar Wilde 245 10 $aiTV games and gambling

Transcribe inaccuracies exactly as given. Add '[sic]' after a wrong spelling or '[i.e. …]' with the correctly spelled words, or add missing letters in square brackets:

245 00 $aQuantatative [sic] level of chemical reactions245 00 $aNew fronteers [i.e. frontiers] of MR-based

techniques in multiple sclerosis

However, see 12.1B1 for details on inaccuracies in serial titles. Consider adding 246 for titles with the corrected spelling. Do not include introductory words that are not meant to be a part of the title, e.g., "Disney presents...". Add [a 246 to provide] a note for the title with the omitted words [and consider making the 246 searchable (I1 =1)]:

245 10 $aBuilding patios 246 1 $iTitle appears on resource as:$aBetter Homes

and Gardens building patios

245 Title proper $a


Include an alternative title as a part of the title proper:

245 10 $aUnder the hill, or, The story of Venus and Tannhauser

Replace punctuation that could be confused with ISBD punctuation, e.g.: "…" with "--", and "[ ]" with "( )". For example, "If elected…":

245 10 $aIf elected--

L 1.1B1 Unless a colon in a title really means that what follows is a subtitle, replace a colon in a title with a dash or a comma, e.g., enter "Symposium: Fine Arts" as:

245 10 $aSymposium, Fine Arts 245 10 $aSymposium--Fine Arts

Close up the space on both sides of a slash or an equals sign, or a dash when it replaces a colon:

245 10 $aStudy/workbook for knitting 245 10 $a2 x 2=5 :$ba farce in one act

Leave a space after a dash that replaces "…", unless it is at the beginning of the title proper:

245 10 $aGetting around-- in Germany 245 10 $a--and then there were none

A 1.1B1 Replace symbols that cannot be replicated using a keyboard with a description

within square brackets "[ ]": 245 10 $aUeber [beta]-Isobutylisochinolin

If a title proper is not from a chief source, give the source of the title proper in a Source of Title Note (500—A1.7B3).

A 1.1B2 Include a statement of responsibility or publisher's name in a title proper if it is an integral part of the title proper:

245 10 $aMarlowe's plays

A 1.1B3 Use the name of a person or body as a title if that is all that is given: 245 10 $aGeorges Brassens

A 1.1B4 Shorten long titles after the first 5 words, if necessary and possible without loss of essential information. [The following title continues for several dozen words]:

245 03 $aAn almanack for the year of our Lord ...

A 1.1B5 If a letter or word is used only once but should be repeated, repeat it, without brackets. [The following title is given on the resource as: "Canadian Bibliographies Canadiennes"]:

245 00 $aCanadian bibliographies =$bBibliographies canadiennes

A 1.1B6 If separate letters or initials have no periods, enter no spaces: 245 00 $aALA rules for filing catalog cards

If separate letters or initials have periods, enter no spaces:

245 00 $aT.U.E.I. occasional papers in industrial relations

Title proper 245 $a


A 1.1B7 If a resource does not have a chief source, find a title elsewhere or create a brief, descriptive title and enclose it in square brackets:

245 10 $a[Carte de la lune]

A 1.7B3 In such a case, add a Source of Title Note (500) to indicate the source.

A 1.1B8 If titles are given in more than one language, use the language of the script or the order of layout to determine the title proper:

245 10 $aWood Cree =$bLes cris des forets

Hint See 245$b Parallel title for how to enter the other titles given in other languages.

A 1.1B9 See 245$p.

A 1.1B10 If both collective and individual titles are given on a chief source of information, give the collective title as the title proper and give the individual titles in a Contents Note (505—A1.7B18):

245 10 $aThree notable stories 505 0 $aMorning -- Midday -- Night.

A 2.1B1 BK Transcribe the title proper as per A1.1B. If a title page substitute is used, specify the part used as the title page substitute in a Source of Title Note (500—A2.7B3).

A 9.0B1 ER If one of the sources of information for an electronic resource has more information than the others, make the most complete source of information the chief source of information. If an electronic resource is made up of more than one physical carrier, and the container for the parts has a collective title and the sources on the individual parts do not, treat the container as the chief source of information, as a unifying element.

A 9.1B1 Transcribe the title proper as per A1.1B.

A 9.1B2 Always give the source of the title proper in a Source of Title Note (500—A9.7B3), whether or not it comes from the chief source.

Hint As per A9.0B1, remember to take the title from the most complete source of information.

A 9.1B3 Do not give a filename or a data set name as the title proper, unless that is all that is given in the chief source. If you wish, you could give such a title in a Variant Title Note (246—A9.7B4).

A 6.0B1 SR If there is more than one physical carrier and/or labels for a sound recording, treat them as a single source. If accompanying textual material or a container has a collective title and the labels do not, treat the accompanying material or container as the chief source of information.

245 Title proper $a


A 6.1B1 Transcribe the title proper as per A1.1B. See also A5.1B1 below for entering a title proper for a musical sound recording. If the title proper is not from the chief source, or is from the container as a unifying element, give the source of title in a Source of Title Note (500—A6.7B3,) [This means that if there is no collective title on the chief source, but there is one on another source, we can use the collective title, make the other source the substitute source, and add a 500 Source of Title Note].

L 6.0B1 If a title is simply the name of a type of composition plus one or more identifying elements, do not use it as a collective title, e.g.:

Piano concertos no. 25, K. 503, no. 26, K. 637

L 6.1B1 If the name of an author or performer is before the titles of individual works, and the name could be considered a collective title, enter the name as the collective title. However, if the name is of a composer, treat it as a statement of responsibility. If one name-as-title is on one side and another name-as-title is on the other, give them as individual titles (separated by period-space).

A 5.1B1 Transcribe the title proper as per A1.1B. If a title is generic (e.g., a type of composition, such as a Symphony, etc.), add other identifying elements (e.g., medium of performance, key, date of composition, opus number, etc.) as part of the title proper (i.e., in $a):

245 10 $aSymphony no. 3, A major, op. 56$h[sound recording]

If a title is distinctive (e.g., not a type of composition) give other identifying elements as other title information (i.e., in $b):

245 10 $aAlso sprach Zarathustra$h[sound recording] :$bop. 30

If in doubt, treat identifying elements as part of the title proper ($a).

A 5.1B2 If you have to supply a title, give all the necessary uniform title elements from rules A25.25-25.35.

A 7.1B1 VD Transcribe the title proper as per A1.1B. If the title proper is not from the chief source, give the source of title in a Source of Title Note (500—A7.7B3). [Although the rule does not say so specifically, it is common practice to apply the comparable sound recordings rule to videos and if there is no collective title on the chief source but there is one on another source, use the collective title from the other source and make it the substitute source of information and add a 500 Source of Title Note].

Statement of responsibility 245 /$c


IFLA (ER) Examples of statements of responsibility for electronic resources are: writers, programmers, principal investigators, graphic artists, composers, animators, developers, and designers. "Included also are entities having specific responsibilities in the context of a particular resource or particular type of resource (e.g., project directors of survey data, video director)."

Hint If an electronic resource has contents of a particular type (e.g., text or video) add statements of responsibility that are appropriate for that particular type. See the appropriate rules (e.g., A2.1F or A7.1F) for details.

A 9.1F2 Add a clarifying word or short phrase to the statement of responsibility, if necessary:

245 12 $aA reconstruction of Oliver Benson's Simple diplomatic game$h[electronic resource] /$c[developed by] Jeff Krend.

See also A1.1F8 above.

A 6.1F1 SR Transcribe statements of responsibility as per A1.1F, for persons or bodies responsible for the intellectual content of a sound recording, e.g.:

• writers of spoken word; • composers of performed music; • collectors of field material; • producers, having artistic and/or intellectual responsibility.

Enter performers who go beyond performance, execution or interpretation (e.g., for pop, rock or jazz) as statements of responsibility ($c). Enter performers confined to performance, execution, and/or interpretation (e.g., for classical music and recorded speech) in a Performer Note (511—A6.7B6). [So put conductors and orchestras, etc., in 511.]).

L 6.1F1 When in doubt about whether or not to enter performers in $c, enter them in a Performer Note (511) instead.

A 6.1F2 Enter the names of members of a group and the name of the group itself in a Performer Note (511) if they are all named on the chief source, or omit them if they do not seem important.


245 10 $aBorn to run$h[sound recording] /$c[written and performed by] Bruce Springsteen.


A 7.1F1 VD Transcribe statements of responsibility as per A1.1F, for persons or bodies credited in the chief source with a major role in creating a film, e.g., [production companies], producers, directors, animators. Give others in an appropriate Statement of Responsibility Note (508—Credit Note or 511—Performer Note).

245 Statement of responsibility /$c


Hint Enter in 245$c persons or bodies credited with overall responsibility [e.g.,

producers, directors, writers (e.g., screenwriters), animators of animated films], and individuals who had significant control in determining the content of the work, e.g., a principal performer in a music video. [LCRI was removed "to allow more cataloger's judgment"]

AMIM2 1G2

"The production company(ies) or person(s) who performs the production company function is always the first statement of responsibility for moving image material. With that exception, the order of the statements of responsibility should be determined by the requirements of individual archives. Give the credits as they appear on the work ... Follow the production company credits with personal name credits." "Optionally, give the statements of responsibility in the following order: production company(ies) or person(s) that performs the production company function or compiler, sponsor, companies or persons credited with various types of co-production, director, producer, screenwriter, and animator."

245 00 $aEast of Eden.$nPart 1 /$ca Mace Neufeld production ; directed by Harvey Hart ; produced by Barney Rosenzweig ; written for television by Richard Shapiro.

Hint General practice appears to be to enter production companies first, then

directors, producers, writers, and/or animators in the order given on the source. If a principal performer of a music video is to be entered in 245$c, however, it seems logical to give that performer first. It is generally accepted that we should enter an executive producer in 245$c if no other type of producer is named, but if other producers are also provided, we should give the others and not the executive producer, unless he is important in his own right and so should also be given an added entry. Enter persons or bodies credited with individual responsibility (e.g., editors, photographers, cast, etc.), in an appropriate Statement of Responsibility Note (508—Credit Note or 511—Performer Note).


245 00 $aSkaterdater$h[videorecording] /$c[produced by] Marshal Backlar.


A 7.1F3 If a statement of responsibility includes both a production agency and the agency for which it is produced, give both, as found:

245 00 $aNew readers begin here$h[videorecording] /$cUniversity of Salford Audiovisual Media for University of Salford Library.

A 12.1F1 SE Transcribe statements of responsibility as per A1.1F.

Varying form of title 246


246 $i Display text Rule A1.7B4 ; L21.30J

Source of information (1.7A2) Any source Preceding punctuation None


Repeatable No Hint 246$i contains text to be displayed as a label rather than the label that would be

produced by one of the display constant indicators. It precedes subfield $a: 245 10 $aIn the teeth of the evidence$h[sound

recording] /$cby Dorothy L. Sayers. 246 1 $iContainer title:$aIn the teeth of the evidence

and other mysteries The $i will display as a note but will not be not indexed, while the $a will both display and be indexed.

246 $a Variant title

Rule A1.7B4 ; L21.30J Source of information (1.7A2) Any source Preceding punctuation None


Repeatable No Hint 246$a contains the variant title of a work:

245 04 $aThe insiders' guide to California's wine country.

246 30 $aGuide to California's wine country Whenever you are entering a variant title (246$a), also think about whether you might need another 246 for a variation on it:

245 10 $aRay Charles genius & soul 246 3 $aRay Charles genius and soul 246 30 $aGenius & soul 246 3 $aGenius and soul

Omit initial articles from titles in 246$a.

246 Varying form of title


246 .$n Number of part or section

Rule A1.7B4 ; L21.30J Source of information (1.7A2) Any source Preceding punctuation Period (.$n)


Repeatable Yes Hint 246$n contains a part or section number or letter that qualifies a variant title:

245 00 $aRapanese.$nSeries 3$h[sound recording] :$bthe musical method of learning Spanish.

246 1 $iContainer title:$aMusical method of learning Spanish.$nSeries 3

A 'numbered' part can be either numeric or alphabetic, e.g., Part 1, or Supplement A.

246 .$p Name of part or section

Rule A1.7B4 ; L21.30J Source of information (1.7A2) Any source Preceding punctuation Period when following $a (.$p)



Hint 246$p contains a part or section title that qualifies the variant title:

245 00 $aReady for school.$pToddler$h[electronic resource].

246 14 $aFisher-Price Ready for school.$pToddler

Omit initial articles from titles in 246$a.

246 :$b Remainder of title

Rule A1.7B4 ; L21.30J Source of information (1.7A2) Any source Preceding punctuation Space colon (#:$b other title information)

Space equals sign (#=$b parallel title) Input standards—LC: Full Required if applicable

Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Required if applicable / Required if applicable Repeatable No

Hint 246$b contains the remainder of the variant title, e.g., a subtitle, parallel title or

other title information: 245 10 $aRowan Atkinson /$cBruce Dessau. 246 14 $aBean there done that :$bthe life and times of

Rowan Atkinson 246 30 $aLife and times of Rowan Atkinson 245 00 $aBig deal on Madonna Street$h[videorecording]. 246 1 $iContainer title:$aI Soliti ignoti=$bPersons

unknown

Computer file characteristics 256


256 Computer file characteristics Rule 9.5B1 Obsolete

Source of information ER (9.0B2) Obsolete

End of field punctuation Period Input standards—LC: Full Required if applicable

Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Required if applicable / Required if applicable Repeatable No Indicators Blank—Undefined Subfields

$a Computer file characteristics (NR) Related fields 000 Type ; 008 File ; 516

Hint 2004

A 256 was used to contain information about the type and size of a computer file. As of the 2004 amendments, this area is no longer included in the AACR rules. If size information is readily available and important, we are now to enter it after the SMD in the Extent of item (300$a)

• the number of files • the number of records (for data files) • the number of statements (for program files) • the number of bytes

If the types of numbering above cannot be given succinctly, we can still give them in a Type and Extent of Resource Note (500—A9.7B8) instead

260 Publication, distribution, etc.


260 Publication, distribution, etc. Rule A1.4

Source of information BK (2.0B2) Title page or title page substitute (if no title page is available), other

preliminaries [including title page verso and cover], colophon ER (9.0B2) The resource itself (title screen, main menu, program statement,


SR (6.0B2) Physical carrier and label(s), accompanying textual material, container

VD (7.0B2) Title screens, physical carrier and label(s), accompanying material, container (box)

SE (12.0B2) First issue or first available issue: Print: Title page or title page substitute (if no title page available),

other preliminaries [including title page verso and cover], colophon Non-print: See the appropriate type of material

End of field punctuation Period, hyphen, parenthesis, bracket, or angle bracket Input standards—LC: Full Required if applicable

SE: Mandatory Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Required if applicable / Required if applicable

SE: Mandatory / Mandatory Repeatable Yes (but only for serials and integrating resources) Indicator 1 Sequence of publishing statements

# Earliest available publisher (SE), no info. provided (monographs) 2 Intervening publisher 3 Current/latest publisher

Indicator 2 Blank—Undefined Subfields

$a Place of publication, distribution, etc. (R) #:$b Name of publisher (R)

,$c Date of publication, distribution, etc. (R) $e( ) Place of manufacture (R) $f( ) Manufacturer (R) $g( ) Date of manufacture (R)

$3 Materials specified (NR) Related fields 008 ; 500 Publication Note

Hint A 260 contains publication, printing, distribution, issue, release, or production

information for a resource. Even though it is listed as optional for a minimal record, this field should always be present, except for records for naturally occurring objects. If a resource is unpublished, this field should contain only a date of publication ($c), e.g., theses. If a resource is a naturally occurring object, this field should not be provided at all.

A 1.4B1 Use the 260 for information about published material (for instructions on entering information for unpublished materials (e.g., letters, theses, etc.) see A1.4C8, A1.4D8, and A1.4F9-A1.4F10).

A 1.4B2 Also use the 260 for manufacturing information.

A 1.4B3 If more than one place, publisher and/or date is provided, give them in the order outlined by the following rules.

Publication, distribution, etc. 260


A 1.4B4 Give names as they appear, but omit unnecessary prepositions, and use abbreviations from AACR App. B.

L 1.0 Omit initial articles preceding the name of the publisher, distributor, etc.

A 1.4B5 If original publication details are covered by a label or stamp, etc., give the covering details here; give original details in a Publication Note (500—A1.7B9) if they are easily available.

L 1.4A2 If publication information is on a stamp or label on the source, give that information without brackets in the 260, and add a Publication Note (500—A1.7B9) to explain it:

500 $aImprint stamped on verso of title page. 500 $aPublisher from label on title page.

A 1.4B6 If publication details are known to be fictitious, give them as given and supply the real information as a correction, if known:

260 $aBelfast [i.e. Dublin :$bs.n.],$c1982.

A 2.4B1 BK Transcribe place, name, and date of publishing as per A1.4B.

A 9.4B1 ER Transcribe place, name, and date of publishing as per A1.4B.

A 9.4B2 2001

All remote access electronic resources are published.

A 6.4B1 SR Transcribe place, name, and date of publishing as per A1.4B.

A 7.4B1 VD Transcribe place, name, and date of publishing as per A1.4B.

A 12.4B1 SE Transcribe place, name, and date of publishing as per A1.4B.

C 10.1 SE See the rule for details about sources and bracketing.

260 Place of publication, distribution, etc. $a


260 $a Place of publication, distribution, etc. Rule A1.4C








Preceding punctuation None for first subfield Space semicolon for succeeding places ( # ;$a )

Input standards—LC: Full Required if applicable SE: Mandatory

Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Required if applicable / Optional SE: Mandatory / Required if applicable

Repeatable Yes Related fields 008 Ctry ; 500 Publication Note

Hint 260$a contains the place of publication of a resource, along with a qualifier (if

the qualifier is present on the resource or supplied by the cataloger). Subfield $a is repeatable in 260, so if more than one place is to be provided, each succeeding place is given in a separate subfield $a, preceded by a semicolon ( ; ). Code the 008 Ctry code to match the place of publication provided in the first 260$a, as in the examples given in { } below (see the MARC Code List for Countries for the appropriate codes).

A 1.4C1 Transcribe the place of publication for the resource as it is given on the resource:

260 $aToronto {Ctry: onc}

Hint By "place of publication" AACR usually means the city of publication. CONSER is more forthright and says, "The place of publication is the local place or city in which the publisher is located. The place may also be a non-city area such as an army base. Places below the city level such as districts, subdivisions, or neighborhoods may be recorded …" ISBD(M), the international cataloging rules, is also more direct, and says, "The place of publication and/or distribution is the name of the town or other locality associated on the prescribed source of information with the name of the publisher …" If no place is given for a subsidiary (imprint) that is going to be given as the

Date of publication, distribution, etc. 260 ,$c


260 ,$c Date of publication, distribution, etc. Rule A1.4F








Preceding punctuation Comma (,$c) Input standards—LC: Full Required if applicable


Related fields 008 Date1, Date2 ; 046 BK 500 Edition and history Note ER 518 SR 518 VD 518 SE 362

Hint 260$c contains the date of publication, distribution, or release of a resource,

and/or a copyright date. Subfield $c is repeatable in 260, but it should seldom if ever be repeated. Dates are sometimes given in Roman numerals. You might find it useful to find and bookmark one of the many websites available for converting such numbers to Arabic numbers. As shown in the examples below, enter the first date from the 260$c in 008 Date 1, except corrected dates (A1.4F1), multiple dates (L1.4F2), serials (prefer date from 362), and reproductions.

A 1.4F1 For a published resource, enter the publication date of the edition: Give the year of publication of the edition named in the edition area (250); e.g., "Second edition: 1999":

250 $a2nd ed. 260 ...,$c1999. {s 1999, }

The date (publication date) in 260$c is copied to 008 Date 1. Since there is no date to copy to 008 Date 2, Date 1 is a single date, so 008 Date Type is 's' (single).

If no edition statement is available, give the year of first publication of the edition of the resource:

260 $aLondon :$bGollancz,$c1951. {s 1951, } The date (publication date) in 260$c is copied to 008 Date 1. Since there is

260 Date of publication, distribution, etc. ,$c


no date to copy to 008 Date 2, Date 1 is a single date, so 008 Date Type is 's' (single).

L 1.4F1 See the LCRI for details about entering non-Gregorian dates.

Hint Apply this rule only when you know the date of publication/distribution/release

of the resource. Be careful that it is really a date of publication and not a printing date or copyright date.

A 1.4F2 Add a corrected publication date if known [rare]: Give the publication date as it is provided, even if you know it is wrong. If you know the correct date, add it and an explanatory Publication Note (500) if necessary; e.g., the t.p. verso of a book says "Published 1697", but the book is about U.S. space exploration and the preface is dated 1967:

260 ...,$c1697 [i.e. 1967] {s 1967, } 046 $ax$c1967$e1697

The correct date in 260$c is copied to 008 Date 1, the incorrect date is not copied to 008 Date 2. Since there is no other date in this example to copy to 008 Date 2, Date 1 is a single date, so 008 Date Type is 's' (single). To pick up coding for the incorrect date, add an 046: $a contains 'x' (incorrect dates); $c contains the correct date (repeated from the 008); $e contains the error date.

L 1.4F2 If a date is a FIRST printing date, and it is later than the publication date, add

the printing date as a corrected, inferred publication date, since a resource cannot be published until it is printed; e.g., t.p. says "1965", t.p. verso says "First printing, 1966":

260 ...,$c1965 [i.e., 1966] {s 1966, } 046 $ax$c1966$e1965

The correct date in 260$c is copied to 008 Date 1, the incorrect date is not copied to 008 Date 2. Since there is no other date in this example to copy to 008 Date 2, Date 1 is a single date, so 008 Date Type is 's' (single). To pick up coding for the incorrect date, add an 046: $a contains 'x' (incorrect dates); $c contains the correct date (repeated from the 008); $e contains the error date.

L 1.4F1 2001

Do not add a corrected date for a resource that states that it is published after you have received it; e.g., if a resource says it was published in 2004, but you have it in your hand in 2003, just enter the stated publication date in 260$c:

260 ...,$c2004. {s, 2004, } "If a U.S. trade publication has a publication date that is in the year following the year in which the publication is received, accept the later publication date as the date of the edition being cataloged. For example, if '2002' appears as the publication date on a publication received in 2001, give '2002' as the publication date."

Hint For a resource that gives a publication date that is in a year following the year in which the publication was received, you could add a 500 Publication Note saying something like: "Resource received in …", if you wish to warn patrons that the publication was published earlier than its stated publication date.



L 1.4F2 If a date is given as a multiple date, give as given, and add the actual or approx. date in brackets:

260 ...,$c1978/79 [i.e. 1979] {s 1979, } or 260 ...,$c1978/79 [i.e. 1978?] {s 1978, } or 260 ...,$c1978/79 [i.e. 1978 or 1979] {s 1978, }

The date from the brackets in 260$c is copied to 008 Date 1. If more than one possible date is given in the brackets, enter the earlier date in 008 Date 1. Since there is no date to copy to 008 Date 2, Date 1 is a single date, so 008 Date Type is 's' (single).

A 1.4F3 Enter the publication date of a revision: If a named revision of an edition is provided in an edition area (250), give the date of the named revision; e.g., a book's t.p. says "1st ed." and "1966" and t.p. verso says "corrected and revised in 1968":

250 $a1st ed. corr., and rev. 260 ...,$c1968. {s 1968, }


Hint Also apply this rule when you have no publication date for the revision and so

must give a copyright date instead, i.e., give the copyright date of the revision; e.g., t.p. says "1988" and t.p. verso says "corrected and revised, © 1989, 1987" so the resource was published in 1988 and revised in 1989 but we only have a copyright date for 1989, not a publication date:

260 ...,$cc1989. {s 1989, }

A 1.4F4 Add a distribution date if known [very rare]: If the date of distribution differs from the date of publication, add it, if you think it is significant. If a publisher and a distributor are present and their dates are different, give the publication date after the publisher, and the distribution date after the distributor:

260 $aLondon :$bBlue Gates Press,$cc1992 ;$aMiami, Fla. :$bDistributed by Palm Beach Distributing,$c1993. {s 1992, }

The date (publication date) in the first subfield $c is copied to 008 Date 1; ignore the distribution date. Since there is no other date to copy to 008 Date 2, Date 1 is a single date, so 008 Date Type is 's' (single).

If a publisher and a distributor are different, but their dates are the same, give the single date after the last publisher/distributor:

260 $aNew York :$bCrescent Books ;$aAvenel, N.J. :$bDistributed by Random House Value Pub.,$c1995. {s 1995, }


Hint OCLC says to ignore the distribution date in the fixed fields. Distribution dates

are not as important as other dates, and adding them may turn out to be



confusing for users.

A 1.4F5 Add a copyright date, if different [Optional]: Add the copyright date that applies to the edition if it is different to the publication date of an edition; e.g., a book's t.p. says "1967", and t.p. verso says "© 1965":

260 ...,$c1967, c1965. {t 1967,1965} The first date (publication date) in 260$c is copied to 008 Date 1. The

copyright date is copied to 008 Date 2. Since Date 2 contains a copyright date, 008 Date Type is 't' (copyright).

L 1.4F5 LC will add copyright dates for non-books [and usually does so for books also]. Enter copyright dates preceded by a lowercase 'c', but enter sound recording copyright dates which have the symbol (p) preceded by a lowercase 'p', e.g.:

260 ...,$c2000, p1999. {t 2000,1999} The first date (publication date) in 260$c is copied to 008 Date 1. The

copyright date is copied to 008 Date 2. Since Date 2 contains a copyright date, 008 Date Type is 't' (copyright).

Hint A creator of a work usually copyrights it as soon as it is complete in order to

protect his or her rights to the contents of the work. Therefore a copyright date can be useful to tell us when a work was created, e.g., when the manuscript for a book was completed. A copyright date must be for the entire resource to be added to or given in lieu of a publication date (see A1.4F6). If multiple copyright dates are present on a resource and they are for portions of the resource, e.g., individual poems in a collection, those copyright dates do not tell us when the actual work that we are cataloging was created, and so none of them should be given as copyright dates in 260$c.

A 1.4F6 If no publication date is present, enter a copyright date: If no publication date is present, enter the copyright date of the edition or revision; e.g., a book's t.p. verso says "© 1968":

260 ...,$cc1968. {s 1968, } The date (copyright date) in 260$c is copied to 008 Date 1. Since there is no

date to copy to 008 Date 2, Date 1 is a single date, so 008 Date Type is 's' (single).

Hint Some publishers give only a copyright date without adding a publication date

when a work was published in the same year that it was copyrighted. In such a case, the copyright date can be a useful indication of when the work was published. However a copyright date must seem feasible in order for it to be given in lieu of a publication date. If a work cannot possibly have been published at the time that it was copyrighted (e.g., because a physical format did not exist at that time), then we must guess at a publication date and add the copyright date (see L1.4F7).

L 1.4F6 2001

If a date of copyright is a date that is after a resource has actually been received, enter the copyright date as given; e.g., t.p. verso says "© 2004", but



A 1.4F6 If no publication date or copyright date is present, enter a printing date.

L 1.4F6 If only a printing date is available and it is a first printing date, use it as an inferred publication date; e.g., t.p. verso says " First printing, 1980":

260 ...,$c[1980] {s 1980, } The date (guessed publication date) in 260$c is copied to 008 Date 1. Since

there is no date to copy to 008 Date 2, Date 1 is a single date, so 008 Date Type is 's' (single).

If only the printing date is available and it is not the first printing date, enter it as a printing date, e.g., t.p. verso says " Sixth printing, 1967":

260 ...,$c1967 printing. {s 1967, } The date (printing date) in 260$c is copied to 008 Date 1. Since there is no

date to copy to 008 Date 2, Date 1 is a single date, so 008 Date Type is 's' (single).

Hint Printing dates are not important for cataloging except for printing dates that

are: first printing; very different to publication or copyright dates; the only dates available.

A 1.4F7 If no publication date, copyright date or printing date is present, enter a guessed date of publication: Guess at a date if no date of publication, copyright, or printing is given on a resource. These are some examples of the types of guesses that AACR suggests:

260 ...,$c[1971 or 1972] {s 1971, } The date (guessed publication date) in 260$c is copied to 008 Date 1. If

more than one possible date is given in the brackets, enter the earlier date in 008 Date 1. Since there is no date to copy to 008 Date 2, Date 1 is a single date, so 008 Date Type is 's' (single).

260 ...,$c[1969?] {s 1969, }

The date (uncertain publication date) in 260$c is copied to 008 Date 1. Since there is no date to copy to 008 Date 2, Date 1 is a single date, so 008 Date Type is 's' (single).

260 ...,$c[between 1906 and 1912] {q 1906,1912}

Both dates of the date range in 260$c are copied to 008 Dates. The earliest date is copied to Date 1, the latest date is copied to Date 2. Since this is a questionable date range situation, 008 Date Type is 'q' (questionable range).

260 ...,$c[ca. 1960] {s 1960, }

The date (approximate publication date) in 260$c is copied to 008 Date 1. Since there is no date to copy to 008 Date 2, Date 1 is a single date, so 008 Date Type is 's' (single).

260 ...,$c[197-] {s 197u, }

The date (guessed publication decade) in 260$c is copied to 008 Date 1. A hyphen in 260$c is entered as a 'u' in 008 Dates. Since there is no date to copy to 008 Date 2, Date 1 is a single date, so 008 Date Type is 's' (single).



260 ...,$c[197-?] {s 197u, } The date (uncertain publication decade) in 260$c is copied to 008 Date 1. A

hyphen in 260$c is entered as a 'u' in 008 Dates. Since there is no date to copy to 008 Date 2, Date 1 is a single date, so 008 Date Type is 's' (single).

260 ...,$c[18--] {s 18uu, }

The date (guessed publication century) in 260$c is copied to 008 Date 1. A hyphen in 260$c is entered as a 'u' in 008 Dates. Since there is no date to copy to 008 Date 2, Date 1 is a single date, so 008 Date Type is 's' (single).

260 ...,$c[18--?] {s 18uu, }

The date (uncertain publication century) in 260$c is copied to 008 Date 1. A hyphen in 260$c is entered as a 'u' in 008 Dates. Since there is no date to copy to 008 Date 2, Date 1 is a single date, so 008 Date Type is 's' (single).

Optional: add an approximate publication date if you know it is very different to a copyright or printing date provided on a resource; e.g., no publication date is given, but the publisher is fairly new and the new introduction is dated 1988, but the t.p. verso says "© 1907":

260 ...,$c[1988], c1907. {t 1988,1907} The first date (guessed publication date) in 260$c is copied to 008 Date 1.

The copyright date is copied to 008 Date 2. Since Date 2 contains a copyright date, 008 Date Type is 't' (copyright).

Or a CD label says "© 1967" (CD's were not available until the 1980s):

260 ...,$c[198-], c1967. {t 198u,1967} The first date (guessed publication date) in 260$c is copied to 008 Date 1,

replacing the hyphen with 'u'. The copyright date is copied to 008 Date 2. Since Date 2 contains a copyright date, 008 Date Type is 't' (copyright).

L 1.4F7 LC will apply the option to add an approximate publication date that is known

to be very different to a copyright or printing date.

Hint Always enter a date in 260$c even if you have to guess a range or a decade or century, except for serials and integrating resources for which you do not have the first issue (see SE rules, later). For serials for which you have the first issue but no date, do not guess a specific date, guess a decade or century (e.g., 199- or 19--)

A 1.4F8 For a multipart resource, enter the earliest and latest dates: If different dates are given on the various parts of a multipart resource, enter the earliest and the latest dates:

260 ...,$c1968-1973. {m 1968,1973} Both dates of the date range in 260$c are copied to 008 Dates. The earliest

date is copied to Date 1, the latest date is copied to Date 2. Since these are dates for a multipart resource, 008 Date Type is 'm' (multipart).

Date of publication, distribution, etc. 260 Sound recordings ,$c


A 6.4F1 SR Enter the year of publication as per A1.4F.

CAM "If several dates appear on an item, the latest may be used to infer date of publication. An inferred date is bracketed."

A 6.4F2 Add a date of original recording in a Date/Time and Place of an Event Note (518—A6.7B7) if that date is on the sound recording.

Hint If this note is present in a record and the recording date differs by at least one

year from the current release date, give the publication or copyright date from 260$c in 008 Date 1, give the recording date in 008 Date 2, and code Date Type 'p' (production):

DtSt: p Dates: 1971,1961 260 $a[New York] :$bMusic Guild,$c1971. 518 $aRecorded in 1961.

MCAT If multiple recording dates are given on the sound recording, enter the earliest

date in 008 Date 2: DtSt: p Dates:1990,1987 260 0 $aSalem, MA :$bRykodisc,$cp1990. 518 $aRecorded at Studio X, 1987-1990.

A 6.4F3 Enter the date of recording for a non-processed sound recording: DtSt: s Dates: 1984, 260 ...,$c1984. 518 $aRecording of speech given at the University of

Kentucky Academic Library Institute, Lexington, Ky., May 24, 1984.

Hint If a sound recording is not published, enter the date of recording from the 518

Date/Time/Place Note in 260$c. If that date was not on the disc or cassette label, accompanying textual material, or container, enter it in brackets.

A 6.7B7 Add an Edition and History Note (500) about the history of the sound recording.

MCAT "Sound recordings are considered reissues when they are: • issued with a new music publisher's number • issued on a new label • released in a new recording medium"

Hint If a sound recording has been re-issued or re-released without a change in

contents, add an Edition and History Note (500) with information about the previous or original release.

If this note is present in a record, give the publication or copyright date from 260$c in 008 Date 1, give the previous or original release date from the note in 008 Date 2, and code Date Type 'r' (re-issue):

DtSt: r Dates: 1980,1959 260 ...,$c1980. 500 $aOriginally issued as Columbia ML5932 in 1959. DtSt: r Dates: 1978,uuuu 260 ...,$c1978. 500 $a"Previously released as SR 90165 and 90449."

260 Date of publication, distribution, etc. ,$c Sound recordings


MARC OCLC

If more than one code could apply for 008 Date Type, then 'r' (republication/re-issue) takes precedence over 's' (single), 'p' (production) and 't' (copyright). Use 008 Date Type 'r' if you have a date of original or previous release. Use 008 Date Type 'p' if you cannot code 'r' and have a date of original production. Use 008 Date Type 't' if you cannot code 'r' or 'p' and have a copyright date for the sound.

Hint Dates are tricky for sound recordings. You will rarely find a publication date on a sound recording. You are far more likely to find a copyright date, and often more than one of them. Remember that you are trying to provide information in the 260$c about when the resource in hand was published. Here are some important dates to remember for sound recordings: 1965—Audio cassettes became commercially available 1982—CDs became commercially available 1971—© changed to (p) and we switched from using © to using (p) for copyright dates of sound; before 1971, © means the copyright for sound, but after 1970 a © on a sound recording means copyright of something other than sound. 1978—Copyright renewal changed; after 1977, we switch from using the earliest copyright date to using the latest copyright renewal date. Physical mediums became available: The 'date of publication' for a sound recording is not always easy to find. Often only a copyright date is available, and quite often a number of copyright dates will be present, both for the work, and for accompanying material, e.g., program notes, etc. Bear in mind that CDs only became commercially available in 1982, and cassette tapes in 1965. Therefore nothing could have been published in those formats before those dates, though the sound could most certainly have been recorded and copyrighted. © changed to (p): Richard Smiraglia, a well known expert in cataloging sound recordings, says: "Since 1971 by international convention the symbol (p) has been used to indicate the copyright date of recorded sound. Because the date used is the year of first release (publication) of the recording, such dates are useful in the absence of formally stated dates of publication. When a single [copyright] date is present it should be transcribed as the date of copyright of the recorded sound ... When various [copyright] dates appear on a single recording, the cataloger must determine whether they represent a reissue (as would be the case when the recording has only one work) in which case the latest date should be transcribed, or whether each date represents the copyright for a different part of the recording. In the latter instance no [copyright] date should be transcribed, because there is no [copyright] date that applies to the recording as a whole. An estimated date of publication can be arrived at by considering the latest date on the item to be the likely date of publication ... When no (p)

Date of publication, distribution, etc. 260 Videos ,$c


production date, and have both a publication date and a copyright date for a video, then give the publication date from the 260$c in 008 Date 1, give the copyright date from the 260$c in 008 Date 2, and code Date Type 't':

DtSt: t Dates: 1986,1985 260 ...,$c1986, c1985.

Note that if the latest available date on a video is a copyright for its package and design, then you should use that date as an inferred date of publication, as outlined above. However, if you find a record that matches your video in every way, but the date in brackets in the 260$c in the record is not the same as your latest available date, accept the record. Video publishers have a habit of changing packages and a different package does not merit a new record (according to the OCLC standards for when to make a new record). If you are bringing a copy cat record in from an outside source, then you can change the date to match yours, or you can add a 500 Edition and History Note saying something like "New package and design, c1997." If you are attaching to a record already in your system, then you can add the note to the existing record.

MARC OCLC

If more than one code could apply for 008 Date Type, then 'r' (republication/re-issue) takes precedence over 's' (single), 'p' (production) and 't' (copyright). Only use 008 Date Type 'r' if you have a date of original or previous release and both the medium and the contents of a video have not been changed. Use 008 Date Type 'p' if you cannot code 'r' and have a date of original production and the content of a video has not been changed, whether the medium of the video has or has not been changed. Use 008 Date Type 't' if you cannot code 'r' or 'p' and have a copyright date for the video as long as the content of the video has not been changed. If the content of a video has been changed in any way, use 008 Date Type 's'.

260 Date of publication rules—SUMMARY ,$c Videos


DATE RULES SUMMARY—VIDEOS A 7.4F3 VD For an unedited or unpublished video, enter a date of creation:

260 ...,$c1984. {s 1984, } 518 $aFilmed in its entirety in the producer's

backyard, May 24, 1984

A 1.4F1 For a published video, enter the publication date of the edition: 260 ...,$c1998. {s 1998, }

A 1.4F2 Add a corrected publication date if known [very rare].

A 1.4F3 Enter the publication date of a revision: 250 $a2nd ed., corr. and rev. 260 ...,$c1999. {s 1999, }

A 1.4F4 Add a distribution date if known [very rare]: 260 $aCamden, N.S.W. :$bCoral Sea Imagery,$cc1992

;$aNashville, Tenn. :$bDistributed by Small World Music,$c1993. {s 1992, }

A 1.4F5 L 1.4F5

Add a copyright date if different [optional]: 260 ...,$c1986, c1985. {t 1986,1985}

Hint The copyright date must be for the entire resource, including any additional material on the video, e.g., extra scenes. If a copyright date is for the original film and not the entire resource, you can add it in a 500 Edition and History Note, e.g.:

500 $aOriginal film copyrighted in 1935. 500 $aOriginally produced as a motion picture,

copyrighted in 1988. Remember that 008 Date Type 'r' and 'p' take precedence over 't'.

A 1.4F6 If no publication date is present, enter a copyright date: 260 ...,$cc1988. {s 1988, }

Hint The copyright date must be for the entire resource, including any additional

material on the video, e.g., extra scenes.

A 1.4F7 If no publication date or copyright date is present, enter a guessed date of publication.

Hint Guess at a date of publication if you do not have a publication or copyright date for the entire resource. Use the latest date found anywhere on the video or its container or accompanying material to make your best guess.

L 1.4F7 LC will apply the option to give an approximate publication date if it is known to be significantly different to a © date:

260 ...,$c[1976?], c1966. {t 1976,1966} 260 ...,$c[199-], c1947. {t 199u,1947}

Hint If a video could not have been published at the time of the copyright date (e.g., if the physical medium had not been invented yet), then guess at a publication date and add the copyright date to the guessed publication date (as per the A1.4F option).

Date of publication rules—SUMMARY 260 Serials ,$c


DATE RULES SUMMARY—SERIALS A 12.4F1 SE If a serial begins and ends in one year, enter the year

260 ...,$c1980.

A 12.4F1 If you have the first issue but not the last issue, enter the beginning date but do not enter an ending date (even if you know the serial has ceased publication)

260 ...,$c1967-

A 12.4F2 If you have the first issue and the last issue, enter the beginning and ending dates

260 ...,$c1955-2003.

Hint If you do not have the first issue, but have the last issue, enter the ending date only

260 ...,$c-1987.

Hint If you do not have the first or the last issue, do not enter any date 260 ...

A 1.4F1 If you have the first and/or last issue, enter the publication date of the first and/or last issue

260 ...,$c1967-

A 1.4F3

If you have the first and/or last issue, enter the revision date of the first and/or last issue, if the serial has been revised

260 ...,$c1977-

A 1.4F6 L 1.4F6 A 12.4F1

If you have the first and/or last issue, enter a copyright date of the first and/or last issue if no publication date is present

260 ...,$cc1954-c1991.

A 1.4F6 L 1.4F6 A 12.4F1

If you have the first and/or last issue, enter a printing date of the first and/or last issue if no copyright or publication date is present

260 ...,$c-1983 printing.

A 1.4F7 A 12.4F1

If you have the first and/or last issue, enter a guessed date of publication of the first and/or last issue if no publication, copyright, or printing date is present

260 ...,$c[198-]-

Hint If you have the first issue of a serial that could not have been published at the time of the copyright date (e.g., if the physical medium had not been invented yet), guess at a publication date

260 Place, name, and date of manufacture $e $f $g


260$e( ) Place of manufacture Rule A1.4G








Enclosing punctuation Parentheses $e( ) Input standards—LC: Full Required if applicable (SE Optional)

Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Required if applicable / Optional Repeatable Yes

260 $f( ) Manufacture

Rule A1.4G Source of information

BK (2.0B2) Title page or title page substitute (if no title page is available), other preliminaries [including title page verso and cover], colophon

ER (9.0B2) The resource itself (title screen, main menu, program statement, initial display of info., home page, file header, or encoded metadata) or its physical carrier & labels—whichever has a coll. title and the most complete info.





Enclosing punctuation Parentheses $f ( ) if no $e present Preceding punctuation When given outside parentheses—none

When given inside parentheses—space colon (#:$f) Input standards—LC: Full Required if applicable (SE Optional)

Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Required if applicable / Optional Repeatable Yes

Hint 260$e and 260$f contain the place of manufacture and name of manufacturer

of the resource, respectively. It is usually not necessary to add this information.

A 1.4G1 If the publisher is unknown, add the place and name of the manufacturer: 260 $aLondon :$b[s.n.],$c1971$e(London :$fHiTimes

Press)

L 1.4G See the LCRI for details on entering bracketed publication and manufacture information.

Place, name, and date of manufacture 260 $e $f $g


A 1.4G2 Follow the publication rules when entering manufacture information.

260 $g( ) Date of manufacture

Rule A1.4G Source of information

BK (2.0B2) Title page or title page substitute (if no title page is available), other preliminaries [including title page verso and cover], colophon

ER (9.0B2) The resource itself (title screen, main menu, program statement, initial display of info., home page, file header, or encoded metadata) or its physical carrier & labels—whichever has a coll. title and the most complete info.





Enclosing punctuation Parentheses $g( ) if no $e or $f present Preceding punctuation When given outside parentheses—none

When given inside parentheses—comma (,$g) Input standards—LC: Full Optional

Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Optional / Optional Repeatable Yes

Hint 260$g contains the date of manufacture of a resource. This is occasionally

provided to add a printing date that is very different to a publication or copyright date.

A 1.4G3 If a printing date is given in 260$c because there is no publication date or copyright date available on the resource, then do not repeat the printing date in 260$g.

A 1.4G4 Optional: If manufacturing information (place, publisher, and/or date) is available and different to the publication information for a resource, add it if you think it is important.

L 1.4G4 Always add the printing date if it is very different to the publication [or copyright] date of a book:

260 $aNew York :$bMacmillan,$c1945$g(1995 printing) {s 1995, }

If you are copying a record, and your book has a different printing date than the 260$g of the record, accept the record. LC will add manufacture information for non-book resources on a case-by-case basis.

OCLC Do not add the date of manufacture from 260$g to the 008 Dates.

A 2.4G1 BK Give the place and name of a manufacturer as per A1.4G.

260 Place, name, and date of manufacture $e $f $g


A 2.4G2 Optional: If any printing information differs from publication information, add the printing information to the publication information.

L 2.4G2 See L1.4G4 above.

A 9.4G1 ER Give the place and name of a manufacturer as per A1.4G. A 9.4G2 Optional: If any printing information differs from publication information, add

the printing information to the publication information.


A 6.4G1 SR Give the place and name of a manufacturer as per A1.4G.



A 7.4G1 VD Give the place and name of a manufacturer as per A1.4G.



A 12.4G1 SE Give the place and name of a manufacturer as per A1.4G.

A 12.4G2 2002

Changes: if important, make a note about changes to the place and name of a manufacturer found on later issues (A12.7B11.2).

A 12.4G3 2002

Optional: add a place, name, and date of manufacture if they are different to the publisher and are important.


C 10.5 See the rule for details about place, name, and date of manufacture. Definition When to record the details of manufacturing Recording the place, name, and date of manufacture

C 10 Summary: "Record the printer only when a publisher has not been recorded."

260$3 Materials specified

Rule None Source of information No prescribed source Preceding punctuation None


Repeatable No Hint 260$3 contains the designation of the issues to which the changed publication

information applies. It is used when multiple 260 are present, and is given as the first subfield:

260 3 $31980-May 1993$aLondon :$bVogue

Physical description 300 Sound recordings


300$a Extent of item (SR) Rule A 6.5B

Sources of information SR (6.0B2) Any source


Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Mandatory / Mandatory Repeatable Yes [but rarely repeated]

Related fields 000 Type: 'i' or 'j' as appropriate ; 007/01($b) ; 306 Hint SR 300$a contains the specific material designation (SMD) for the resource. For a

sound recording this is the number of physical units and the SMD term for the sound recording. Remember to code the related 007 elements, since machine matching uses 007 codes rather than the 300 field.

A 6.5B1

Give the number of physical units and one of the following SMD terms: 300 $a1 sound cartridge {007/01/$b: g (sound cartridge) } 300 $a1 sound cassette {007/01/$b: s (sound cassette) } 300 $a1 sound disc {007/01/$b: d (sound disc) }[CD or LP] 300 $a1 sound tape reel {007/01/$b: t (sound tape reel) } 300 $a1 sound track film {007/01/$b: i (sound track film) }

If none of these terms apply, give the specific, concise name of the item. [However, if any of these terms do apply, do not use any other terms.] Optional: If 245$h[sound recording] is present, omit 'sound' from the 300$a, but see L 6.5B1 below.

2004 Optional: use commonly known terms instead, e.g.: 300 $a1 CD-audio {007/01/$b: d (sound disc) } 300 $a1 DVD-audio {007/01/$b: d (sound disc) }

L 6.5B1 2001 2005

Use only the AACR terms above and: 300 $a1 sound disc cartridge {007/01/$b: d (sound disc) }

LC does not apply the option to use commonly known terms instead of the standard terms listed above. Do not omit 'sound' from 300$a, as per L 1.1C

Hint 2005

In order to preserve consistency in the wording in this field, we join LC, MOUG, and OLAC in recommending that you continue to use the standard SMD terms provided in the AACR rule above, and do not switch to using

300 Physical description Sound recordings


'commonly-used' terms, in order to preserve consistency in the wording in this field. If you are not going to use the AACR terms, then try to be consistent and use only the absolutely most commonly known terms.

A 6.5B2 Give the playing time in parentheses, as per A1.5B4 under the general rules for 300$a above:

300 $a2 sound discs (1 hr., 30 min.) 306 $a013000 300 $a2 sound cassettes (90 min.) 306 $a013000 300 $a31 sound cassettes (60 min. each) 306 $a310000

L 6.5B2 If the total playing time is not given on a sound recording, but durations of

parts are given, you may add the stated durations and record the total, rounding up to the next minute if the total is more than 5 min. Use 'ca.' for 'approximate' but only if the sound recording says 'ca.' or 'approx.'; do not add the term otherwise. Do not work out durations. For musical sound recordings, give a total duration here only if the recording is for a single work (e.g., an opera). If the recording is for a collection of works (e.g., multiple songs), give durations in a note instead [either a 500 Physical description note—if there is no collective title, so that the titles of the works are listed in the 245, or a 505 Contents note—if there is a collective title, so that the titles of the works are listed in the 505]

A 6.5B3 See the rule for details about using separate records to describe separately titled parts of items that are lacking collective titles.

Hint Do not follow this rule if your system does not allow you to use separate records for the same physical item.

300 :$b Other physical details (SR)

Rule A 6.5C Sources of information

SR (6.0B2) Any source Preceding punctuation Space colon (#:$b)


Repeatable No Related fields 007/03 ($d); 007/04($e); 007/05($f); 007/08($i); 007/12($m)

Hint SR 300$b contains information about the type of recording, the playing speed, the

groove characteristics, the track configuration, the number of tracks and sound channels, and the recording and reproduction characteristics of the sound recording. Remember to code the related 007 elements, since machine matching uses 007

Physical description 300 Sound recordings


codes rather than the 300 field.

A 6.5C1 Give details as appropriate, in the following order.

A 6.5C2 For a disc or tape: give the type of recording, [actually 'type of playback characteristics'], i.e., what type of equipment do you need to play this item, e.g.: a CD player or a phonogram player? Enter either 'analog' or 'digital' for a disc (LP/CD) or tape (cassette). LPs—always analog:

300 $a1 sound disc (45 min.) :$banalog {007/12/$m: n (no special playback) }

CDs—always digital: 300 $a1 sound disc (50 min.) :$bdigital {007/12/$m: e (digital playback) }

Cassettes—analog (usually): 300 $a2 sound cassettes (90 min.) :$banalog {007/12/$m: n (no special playback) }

Cassettes—digital: 300 $a2 sound cassettes (90 min.) :$bdigital {007/12/$m: e (digital playback) }

See the rule for giving type of recording for sound track films.

A 6.5C3 Give the playing speed for discs (e.g., for LPs or 45s) or tapes, but not if that speed is standard (e.g., for regular cassettes and all CDs). Code the 007 even if this information is not provided in 300$b. LPs:

300 $a1 sound disc (45 min.) :$banalog, 33 1/3 rpm {007/03/$d: b (33 1/3 rpm) }

CDs: 300 $a1 sound disc (50 min.) :$bdigital {007/03/$d: f (1.4 m. per sec.) }

Cassettes: 300 $a2 sound cassettes (90 min.) :$banalog {007/03/$d: l (1 7/8 ips) }

See the rule for giving playing speed for sound track films.

A 6.5C4 Give the groove characteristics for analog discs, but not if they are standard (coarse), so they are rarely needed. Code the 007, however, even if this information is not provided in 300$b. LPs with special grooves:

300 $a1 sound disc (45 min.) :$banalog, 78 rpm, microgroove

{007/05/$f: m (microgroove) } LPs with regular grooves—standard:

300 $a1 sound disc (45 min.) :$banalog, 78 rpm {007/05/$f: s (standard) }

CDs—not applicable: 300 $a1 sound disc (50 min.) :$bdigital {007/05/$f: n (no grooves) }

Cassettes—not applicable: 300 $a2 sound cassettes (90 min.) :$banalog {007/05/$f: n (no grooves) }

300 Physical description Sound recordings


A 6.5C5 See the rule for giving track configurations for sound track films.

A 6.5C6 Give the number of tracks for tapes, but not if that number is standard (e.g., 4-track for regular cassettes). Code the 007 even if this information is not provided in 300$b. LPs:

300 $a1 sound disc (45 min.) :$banalog, 33 1/3 rpm {007/08/$i: n (no tracks) }

CDs: 300 $a1 sound disc (50 min.) :$bdigital {007/08/$i: n (no tracks) }

Cassettes: 300 $a2 sound cassettes (90 min.) :$banalog {007/08/$i: c (4 track) }

A 6.5C7 Give the number of sound (playback) channels (e.g., mono., stereo, or quad) if given on the sound recording. If the resource says 'hi-fi', enter 'stereo'. LPs:

300 $a1 sound disc (45 min.) :$banalog, 78 rpm, microgroove, quad.

{007/04/$e: q (quadrophonic) } CDs:

300 $a1 sound disc (50 min.) :$bdigital, stereo. {007/04/$e: s (stereo) }

Cassettes: 300 $a2 sound cassettes (90 min.) :$banalog, mono. {007/04/$e: m (monoaural) }

L 6.5C7 Do not provide this information if it is not stated explicitly.

A 6.5C8 Optional: Give recording and reproduction characteristics if applicable. For example, for tapes add 'Dolby processed' if applicable:

300 $a2 sound cassettes (90 min.) :$banalog, mono., Dolby processed

{007/12/$m: c (Dolby B playback) }

L 6.5C8 2005

LC gives this information whenever it "would be needed for selecting playback equipment for the full audio effect".

Hint Dolby is a noise reduction technique, and is the type of information most commonly added under this rule. "Dolby" is always capitalized. If the double-D Dolby symbol is present without any additional terms (e.g., Dolby Digital, Dolby Stereo, or Dolby Surround, etc.) then they mean Dolby B, which is given simply as "Dolby processed", with or without further information re. stereo. or mono.

Physical description 300 Videos


300$a Extent of item (VD) Rule A 7.5B

Sources of information VD (7.0B2) Any source


Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Mandatory / Mandatory Repeatable Yes [but rarely repeated]

Related fields 000 Type: 'g'; 007/01($b) Hint VD 300$a contains the specific material designation (SMD) for the resource. For a

video this is the number of physical units and the SMD term for the video. Remember to code the related 007 elements, since machine matching uses 007 codes rather than the 300 field.

A 7.5B1

Give the number of physical units and one of the following SMD terms: 300 $a1 videocassette {007/01/$b: f (videocassette) } 300 $a1 videodisc {007/01/$b: d (videodisc) } 300 $a1 videocartridge {007/01/$b: c (videocartridge) } 300 $a1 videoreel {007/01/$b: r (videoreel) }

Use 'videodisc' for laserdiscs and DVDs. If none of the above terms apply, give the specific, concise name of the item. [However, if any of these terms do apply, do not use any other terms.] Optional: If 245$h[videorecording] is present, omit 'video' from the 300$a; but LC will not do this (see L7.5B1 below).

2004 Optional: use commonly known terms instead, e.g.: 300 $a1 DVD-video {007/01/$b: d (videodisc) }

Hint 2004

Because LC follows AMIM rather than AACR for describing videos, it does not address this new option to use commonly known terms. Note, however, that LC will not follow this option for sound recordings. We join OLAC in recommending that you continue to use the standard SMD terms provided in the AACR rule above, and do not switch to using 'commonly-used' terms, in order to preserve consistency in the wording in this field. If you are not going to use the AACR terms, then try to be consistent and use only the absolutely most commonly known terms.

L 7.5B1 Do not omit 'video' from 300$a, as per L 1.1C

300 Physical description Videos


A 7.5B2 Give the playing time in parentheses, as per A1.5B4 under the general rules for 300$a above:

300 $a3 videocassettes (25 min. each) {008 Time: 075 } 300 $a2 videocassettes (1 hr., 30 min.) {008 Time: 090 } 300 $a1 videodisc {008 Time: --- }

See the rule for details about entering playing time for videodiscs with both moving and still images.

CDV Playing time here refers to "the time of the title recorded in field 245", e.g., the motion picture or the TV program contained in the video. "Times of supplementary material and/or special features may be given in the notes relating to that material or those features."

L 7.5B2 See the LCRI for details about the option for giving the number of frames.

Hint Follow the same guidelines as are given for sound recordings under L6.5B2 to use 'ca.' for 'approximate', but only if the video says 'ca.' or 'approx.'; do not add the term otherwise. Do not work out durations.

NBO Give the time of the title recorded in field 245. Information about times of supplementary material and/or special features may be added to the notes about that material or those features.

A 7.5B3 See the rule for details about using separate records to describe separately titled parts of items that are lacking collective titles.

Hint Do not follow this rule if your system does not allow you to use separate records for the same physical item.

300 :$b Other physical details (VD)

Rule A 7.5C Sources of information

VD (7.0B2) Any source Preceding punctuation Space colon (#:$b)


Repeatable No Related fields 007/03 ($d); 007/05($f); 007/06($g)

Hint VD 300$b contains information about the aspect ratio and special projection

characteristics, sound characteristics, color characteristics, and projection speed of the video. Remember to code the related 007 elements, since machine matching uses 007 codes rather than the 300 field.

Current frequency 310


310 Current frequency Rule A 12.7B1

Sources of information SE (A12.0B2) Any source

End of field punctuation None, unless the last word ends with its own punctuation Input standards—LC: Full Required if applicable

Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Required if applicable / Optional Repeatable No Indicators Blank—Undefined Subfields

$a Current frequency (NR) $b Date of current frequency (NR)

Related fields 008 Freq ; 008 Regl ; 321 Hint The 310 contains a note that describes the frequency of a serial. Always add a

310 for the current frequency of a serial, and for the last known frequency of a ceased publication. Use 321 for former frequencies.

310$a Current frequency

Rule 12.7B1 Sources of information

SE (A12.0B2) Any source Preceding punctuation None


Repeatable No Hint 310$a contains a free-text note about the existing frequency of a serial, but see

the 008 Freq codes for common statements, e.g., Annual, or use your own terms, e.g., Two issues yearly, or Frequency unknown, etc. 310 are considered notes and AACR App. C says to enter beginning numbers in notes as words:

310 $aFour issues yearly,$bAug. 1904- {008 Freq: q}

Note that AACR says that a Former Frequency Note (321) should be given before a Current Frequency Note (310). However CONSER says to enter notes in tag order.

A 12.7B1 Add a Current Frequency Note unless it is unknown or obvious: 310 $aMonthly {008 Freq: m}

L 12.7B1 LC will always give a Current Frequency Note even if it is obvious.

C 13.3 See the rule for details about Frequency notes (310/321): When to give Sources of information Terminology Designations and Former frequencies

310 Current frequency


310,$b Date of current frequency Rule 12.7B1

Sources of information SE (A12.0B2) Any source

Preceding punctuation Comma (,$b) Input standards—LC: Full Required if applicable


Hint 310$b contains the date of the existing frequency of a serial. Only add a date

to a current frequency if the frequency has changed (i.e., there is also a 321 in the record):

321 $aQuarterly,$b1960-1961 310 $aMonthly,$b1962- {008 Freq: m}

If you are not sure of the date that a change in frequency took place, give the date of the earliest issue that reflects the change in angle brackets ( < > ).

General note 500 Accompanying material


500 Accompanying material note Rule A 1.7B11

Source of information (1.7A2) Any source End of field punctuation Period, question mark, exclamation mark, hyphen, ( . ? ! - ), but

period after closing parenthesis or bracket ( ) ] ), and give all punctuation before $5



$a Accompanying material note (NR) Related fields 006 ; 300$e

ER 556 SR 008 AccM

Hint A 500 Accompanying Material Note contains any important details about

accompanying material that cannot be given in 300$e, including the location of the accompanying material. Remember that you should now also code 006 for accompanying material.

A 1.7B11 [The rule for an Accompanying Material Note gives examples only]: 500 $aAccompanied by: Slides in pocket. 500 $aAccompanied by: Lyrics on sheets in

container.

A 2.7B11 BK Add a note for locations of accompanying material and other details that could not be provided in 300$e:

500 $aAccompanied by: 3 green plastic figures shaped like frogs in a clear plastic pocket attached to the back inside cover.

A 9.7B11 ER Add a note for locations of accompanying material and other details that could not be provided in 300$e:

500 $aAccompanied by: a series of 5 programs in PL/1, with assembler subroutines.

Hint Use a 556 Information About Documentation Note for information about

documentation for an electronic resource.

A 6.7B11 SR Add a note for locations of accompanying material and other details that could not be provided in 300$e:

500 $aAccompanied by: 50 Slides in pocket. {008AccM: z (other accompanying matter)} 500 $aAccompanied by: Lyrics on sheets in

container. {008AccM: d (libretto or text)}

L 6.7B11 2005

Do not bother to add this note for simple program notes and/or inserts unless you think they are particularly important.

500 General note Accompanying material


A 7.7B11 VD Add a note for locations of accompanying material and other details that could not be provided in 300$e:

500 $aAccompanied by: a shot list in a plastic pocket.

500 $aAccompanied by: 1 instruction manual.

A 12.7B13 SE Add a note for locations of material accompanying all issues and for other details that could not be provided in 300$e:

500 $aAccompanied by: Slides in pocket.

500 $aAccompanied by a 3 1/2 in. computer disk called: Access advisor.

Also use this note for the frequency of regular accompanying material:

500 $aAccompanied by: Slides with every 7th issue. Also use this note for accompanying material that is irregular or only provided once, if important (A 12.5E1); add the designations of affected issues(s).

General note 500 Numbers


500 Numbers note Rule A 1.7B19


period after closing parenthesis or bracket ( ) ] ), and give all punctuation before $5



$a Numbers note (NR) Related fields 028

Hint A 500 Numbers Note contains numbers found on a resource if those numbers

do not belong in any of the specific number fields (010, 020, etc.)

A 1.7B19 Note "numbers associated with the item".

Hint Prefer to use a special number field for numbers whenever possible: 010—LCCN 020—ISBN 022—ISSN 024—UPC or EAN 028—Publisher number 037—Stock number etc.

If none of these number fields apply, however, enter the number as a quoted note:

500 $a"10003". 500 $a"10003"--Cover.

Also use a 500 Numbers Note for complicated numbering patterns for publisher numbers. Use 028 for simple publisher's numbers. (See rule A6.7B19/SR under 028). If a set number does not appear on each of the individual items in the set, give the set number first followed by the numbers on the individual items in parentheses. Give the brand/trade name first, and then a colon and the stock numbers:

500 $aLondon: 443 021-2 (443 022-2--443 023-2).

A 2.7B19 BK Note "numbers associated with the item".

A 9.7B19 ER Note "numbers associated with the item".

A 6.7B19 SR Transcribe a publisher's number exactly as it is given on the item. If two or more numbers are present, give the principal one, if it is obvious, otherwise give them all. (See also 028) If different consecutive numbers are on each part of a multipart item, give them inclusively. If they are not consecutive, give each number, but if there are more than three, give the first and the last number separated by a slash.

500 General note Numbers


L 6.7B19 "Separate the first and last numbers of a [consecutive] sequence by a dash"

[instead of a slash as per A6.7B19 above].

A 7.7B19 VD Note "numbers associated with the item".

A 7.7B20 SE Note important "numbers associated with the resource".

General note 500 Physical description


Add a note about how the sound was originally recorded, if known:

500 $aDigital recording. {007/13/$n: d} [for an analog tape] 500 $aCompact disc; analog recording. {007/13/$n: e}

Also use this note for durations of each part if a resource has no collective title:

500 $aDurations: 25:32 ; 31:16 respectively.

L 6.7B10 2005

If individual works are given in a Contents Note (505), enter durations there. When durations are given here:

• if there are more than 6 durations, you do not have to give any • enter durations as hr : min : sec, e.g., : 48 (48 sec), 45 : 00 (45 min), 1 :

25 : 00 (1 hr, 25 min) • if durations are for parts of a single work, you may add them together and

give the total in minutes, rounding up to the next minute • • use "ca." only if approximate durations are stated on the resource • if no durations or only some durations are given, do not try to work out

approximate durations LC will no longer add a note for "Analog recording" or "Digital recording".

Hint Enter the terms: "Analog recording" or "Digital recording" in a 500 Physical Description Note to explain how the work was originally recorded. This is called the 'Capture and storage technique' in the 007 field. Look for these three character symbols on CDs: 'AAD', 'ADD', 'DDD'. The first character identifies the capture technique, the last character identifies the playback method needed, and the middle character refers to mastering. We do not (apparently) care about mastering. These symbols are translated in our records as: AAD or ADD—analog capture (500), digital playback (300$b):

007/12/$m: e (digital recording [playback]) 007/13/$n: e (analog electrical storage) 300 ... :$bdigital 500 $aCompact disc, analog recording.

DDD—digital capture (500), digital playback (300$b)

007/12/$m: e (digital recording [playback]) 007/13/$n: d (digital storage) 300 ... :$bdigital 500 $aCompact disc, digital recording.

Although some say it is not necessary to indicate that a digital tape or disc was digitally recorded, or an analog disc or tape was analog recorded, you should always indicate if a digital tape or disc was analog recorded, or an analog disc or tape was digitally recorded. In my opinion, it might be a good idea to add this note in either case, if it is known, as shown in the examples above. It appears to be common practice to code 007/13 (Capture) as 'e' (analog) for

500 General note Physical description


all analog tapes unless they specifically say otherwise. If you are using a 538 System Details Note for the term "Compact disc", include this capture information with that note in the 538.

A 7.7B10 VD Add a 500 Physical Description Note for the following physical details: • Sound characteristics 500 $aDolby stereo., mono. compatible.

• Color details 500 $aTechnicolor. {007/04/$d: c (color)} 500 $aSepia print. {007/04/$d: z (other)}

Hint Remember to capitalize 'Hi-fi', 'Dolby', and other words that are trade names.

CDV Combine information about sound with system requirement information in a

538 System Details Note or with language information in a 546 Language Note if either is present:

538 $aDVD; Dolby surround sound for English sound track.

546 $aSoundtracks: English (stereo.) or French

(mono.). Combine any physical description information with system requirement information in a 538 System Details Note. If information about 'layers' appears on a DVD, give it as given, in 538. If aspect ratio information appears on a DVD, give it as given, in 538.

If 'pan-and-scan' information appears on a DVD, give it as given, in 538.

A 12.7B12.2 2002

SE Changes: change physical information provided in a 300$b to match later issues of a serial if new details are added to the serial. Do not change 300$b if physical information details are omitted or changed in later issues. If it seems important, then add a Physical Description Note about such changes (A 12.5C2). Use a general note if changes are frequent:

500 $aSome issues illustrated.

Formatted contents note 505

Cataloging With AACR2 and MARC21 (9/15/2005) 3.5-39

505 Formatted contents note Rule A 1.7B18


period after closing parenthesis or bracket ( ) ] ), but if the note is incomplete, or continues in a following 505 then no punctuation, unless the last word ends with its own punctuation.


Repeatable Yes Indicator 1 Display constant controller

0 Contents 1 Incomplete contents 2 Partial contents 8 No display constant

Indicator 2 Level of content designation # Basic 0 Enhanced

Subfields $a Formatted contents (NR) $g Miscellaneous information (R)

#/$r Statement of responsibility (R) $t Title (R) $u Uniform Resource Identifier (R)

Related fields 7XX analytic entries SR For durations: 306 VD For durations: 008 Time

Hint A 505 Formatted Contents Note contains the titles of separate works found in

a collection (if they are not already given elsewhere in the description), or the table of contents of a work. We should always add a 505 for a collection of works, and we are strongly encouraged to add one for a useful table of contents. If you provide the complete contents of the work, then enter '0' (complete) in I1. If you do not have the complete work, and thus cannot enter the complete contents, then enter '1' (incomplete) in I1. If you have the complete work, but do not choose to list the complete contents, then enter '2' (partial) in I1. If you want to call the contents something completely different, enter '8' in I1 (no display constant), and enter your own label for the note. Before format integration, all Contents Notes were 'Basic', and I2 was always blank. Now we can break the elements of a Contents Note into subfields that will allow better keyword indexing. An 'Enhanced' 505 (I2 = 0) lets us enter:

• titles in subfield $t so that they can be added to a title keyword index • statements of responsibility in subfield $r so that they can be added to an

author keyword index • miscellaneous information in subfield $g so that it can be displayed but

not added to any keyword index Remember, as in the 245$c, if you have more than three persons or corporate bodies to enter in a 505, give the first only and use [et al.] for the rest.

505 Formatted contents note

3.5-40 Cataloging With AACR2 and MARC21 (9/15/2005)

As of 2001, we can add $u with a URI (e.g., URL or URN) to take us to a site on the Internet where the entire (or additional) contents data can be found. MARBI proposal no.: 2000-06 (Dec. 6, 1999) says: "Field 505 (Formatted Contents Note) is an obvious choice for containing a URI subfield. Many publishers/distributors of print and/or electronic material make available table of contents electronically. Although the enhanced 505 allows for encoding lengthy Contents Notes, this approach may not be desirable when the information is available through a link. Some institutions have recorded URIs to table of contents in field 856 with a subfield $3 with the data 'table of contents'. However, a direct link from field 505 to the electronic table of contents may be more desirable. It could also take a user directly from the catalog record to a search interface for contents."

A 1.7B18 [The rule for Contents Notes gives formatted examples only].

A 2.7B18 BK Use a 505 Formatted Contents Note for a list of the contents of a resource (given either fully or in part), if they are not already implied elsewhere in the description.

L 2.7B18 See the LCRI for details about when LC will add a Formatted Contents Note, and how they should be transcribed.

A 9.7B18 ER "List the parts of an [electronic] resource."

A 6.7B18 SR "List the titles of individual works contained on a sound recording." Add durations and/or statements of responsibility that are not already given in 245$c to the titles of the individual works:

505 00 $tThe fourth millennium /$rHenry Brant$g(9 min.) --$tMusic for brass quintet$g(14 min.)

{306 $a000900$a001400}

Hint Add a 505 for all sound recordings, unless the recording is of one work only, the complete works of one composer, or the complete type of composition of one composer (e.g., all of Beethoven's symphonies):

505 00 $tIn the mood$r(Glenn Miller and his orchestra) --$tThere I go$r(Vaughn Monroe and his orchestra) --$tDarn that dream$r(Benny Goodman and his orchestra) --$tSierra Sue$r(Bing Crosby) --$tOn the Isle of May$r(Connee Boswell) --$tThe breeze and I$r(Jimmy Dorsey and his orchestra) --$tDown Argentina way$r(Bob Crosby and his orchestra) --$tFrenesi$r(Artie Shaw and his orchestra)

L 6.7B18 2005

Take titles from whatever source provides the best identification and add additional information if you think it would be useful. See the rule for details on entering contents notes for the parts of a multipart item. If there are more than 6 durations, you do not have to give any.

Formatted contents note 505


L 5.7B18 Add opus numbers to the titles in a Contents Note (505) if they are necessary to identify musical works. If the works are all in the same musical form and that form is named in the title proper, do not repeat that form in the Contents Note.

A 6.7B6 You can also add performers of the works to titles, in parentheses. Enter performers in the same way that they would be given in a 511 (Name, function or role):

505 00 $tAve Maria /$rJ.S. Bach, C. Gounod (Lisa Otto, soprano ; Berlin Handel Chorus ; Berlin Radio Symphony Orchestra ; Gunther Arndt, conductor) --$tAve Maria /$rA. Bruckner (Berlin Handel Chorus ; Gunther Arndt, conductor) --$tAve Maria /$rW.A. Mozart (Rita Streich, soprano ; Regensburg Cathedral Choir; Kurt Gaebel, conductor) --$tAve Maria /$rF. Schubert (Lisa Otto, soprano ; Berlin Handel Chorus ; Gunther Arndt, conductor).

A 7.7B18 VD "List the titles of individual works contained in, or the parts of, a motion picture or videorecording". Add durations and/or statements of responsibility that are not already given in 245$c to the titles of the individual works:

505 0 $apt. 1. The cause of liberty (24 min.) -- pt. 2. The impossible war (25 min.)

{008 Time: 049}

505$a Formatted contents note

Rule A 1.7B18 Source of information No prescribed source Preceding punctuation None


Repeatable No Hint 505$a contains the titles of individual works or parts of works contained in a

resource. If subfield $a is used, then I2 must be blank (Basic 505): 505 0 $aGetting organized -- Kitchen help -- Wash day

hints -- Cleaning made easy -- Your green thumb -- Not for men only -- Bedrooms and closets -- When you're sick -- Camping & picnic fun -- Around the house -- Around the office.

505 1 $apt. 1. Carbon -- pt. 2. Nitrogen -- pt. 3.

Sulphur -- pt. 4. Metals. 505 2 $aQuatrain II (16:35) -- Water ways (1:57) --

Waves (10:49).

If no name is entered in a Contents Note and your system is set to index 505$a in the title keyword index only (not the title browse index), you can continue

505 Formatted contents note


to use a basic 505, rather than having to make a subfield $t for every title in the 505:

505 0 $aHow these records were discovered -- A short sketch of the Talmuds -- Constantine's letter.

505$g Miscellaneous information

Rule A 1.7B18 Source of information No prescribed source Enclosing punctuation Parentheses $g( )


Repeatable Yes Hint 505$g contains miscellaneous information (e.g., vol., part, page numbers,

dates, etc.) that should be displayed but not keyword indexed. If subfield $g is used, then I2 must be '0' (Enhanced 505):

505 00 $tQuatrain II$g(16:35) --$tWater ways$g(1:57) --$tWaves$g(10:49).

If you decide to index titles from a 505 in your title browse index, as well as your title keyword index, then you can use subfield $g for initial articles, capitalizing the first word after the initial article (despite the AACR instructions), to make the title look correct in a title browse list:

505 20 $tHow these records were discovered --$gA$tShort sketch of the Talmuds --$tConstantine's letter.

505 /$r Statement of responsibility

Rule A 1.7B18 Source of information No prescribed source Preceding punctuation Space forward slash (#/$r)


Repeatable Yes Hint 505$r contains names associated with the individual parts or works contained

in a resource. If subfield $r is used, then I2 must be '0' (Enhanced 505): 505 00 $tQuark models /$rJ. Rosner --$tJet phenomena

/$rM. Jacob.

505$t Title Rule A 1.7B18

Source of information No prescribed source Preceding punctuation None, if first subfield

Space dash (#--$t) except period after a common title by the same author (.$t) and space semicolon after a common title by a different author (#;$t)


Repeatable Yes

Credits note 508


508 Credits note Rule A 1.7B6


period after closing parenthesis or bracket ( ) ] ) Input standards—LC: Full Required if applicable

Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Required if applicable / Optional Repeatable Yes Indicators Blank—Undefined (Display constant = Credits:) Subfields

$a Creation/production credits note (NR) Hint A 508 Credits Note contains a list of people who are responsible for certain

aspects of the production of a video, but who have not been entered in 245$c. Give cast in a 511.

A 7.7B6 VD List persons not given in the 245$c who contribute to the artistic and/or technical production of the work. Enter names and functions in a standardized format: Function, Name; Function, Name, Name. [The opposite of how participants/performers are entered in a 511 note.]

MARC The MARC examples show a space before the separating semicolon, i.e., Function, Name ; Function, Name, Name.

L 7.7B6 Canceled but still useful

Include people performing the following functions: Photographer(s), Cameraman/men, Cinematographer(s), Animator(s), Artist(s), Illustrator(s), Graphics, Film editor(s), Photo editor(s), Editor(s), Narrator(s), (unless seen on screen, then in cast) Voices, Music, Consultant(s), Adviser(s)

But this note should not include people who perform the following functions: assistants or associates; production supervisors or coordinators; project or

executive editors; technical advisers or consultants; audio or sound engineers; writers of discussion or program; other persons or bodies making only a minor or purely technical contribution

Hint Although LC has canceled the above rule interpretation, it still remains a useful

guide for the sort of people to mention in a credits note, but only if you feel that they are important. For a small production film, you should add these people if they are mentioned. For a big production film, you should only add any of these people that seem important, especially if you want to make an added entry for any of them (e.g., a famous voice or music composer)

511 Participant or performer note


511 Participant or performer note Rule A 1.7B6

Source of information (1.7A2) Any source End of field punctuation Period, question mark, exclamation mark, hyphen, ( . ? ! - )


Repeatable Yes Indicator 1 Display constant controller

0 No display constant generated 511 0 $aPresenter: Jackie Glanville.

1 Cast: (for videos or players in nonmusical S/R) 511 1 $aLaurence Harvey, Mia Farrow, Lionel Stander, Harry Andrews.


$a Participant or performer note (NR) Related fields 245$c ; 505 ; 7XX

Hint A 511 Participant or Performer Note contains a list of featured performers,

unless they are already given in a 505 Contents Note.

A 6.7B6 SR If important, give the names of featured performers and their mediums of performance unless they have already been given elsewhere, [e.g., a 245$c]. Include performers in a Contents Note (505) instead of a Performer Note, if appropriate.

L 6.7B6 Use the term "Cast:" [I1 = 1 will produce this term] for players in a non-musical sound recording, [e.g., a play]. Add the roles or parts played by players in a non-musical sound recording (e.g., a play), in parentheses, after the names of the players, if appropriate:

511 1 $aAnne Baxter (Louise), Maria Perschy (Angela), Gustavo Rojo (Bill), Reginald Gilliam (Mr. Johnson), [Catherine Elliot?] (Aunt Sallie), Ben Tarter (waiter).

Hint Enter musical sound recording performers in a standard format: Name(s),

function ; Name(s), function. [The opposite of how names are entered in a 508 Credits Note.] The examples in the LC and OCLC format manuals have a space before the separating semicolon, as above. The example in AACR has no space before the semicolon: Name(s), function; Name(s), function. Musical sound recording performers are usually entered in the following order: vocalists ; individual instrumentalists (e.g., accompanists) ; groups (e.g., orchestras) ; the conductor/director of music:

511 0 $aGenevieve Warner, Lois Hunt, sopranos ; Leon Engel, conductor.

Target audience note 521


521 Target audience note Rule A 1.7B14


period after closing parenthesis or bracket ( ) ] ) Input standards—LC: Full Optional

Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Optional / Optional Repeatable Yes Indicator 1 Display constant controller

# No information provided (Audience) 0 Reading grade level 1 Interest age level 2 Interest grade level 3 Special audience characteristics 4 Motivation interest level 8 No display constant generated


$a Target audience note (R) $b Source (NR) $3 Materials specified (NR)

Related fields BK ER SR VD 008 Audn

Hint A 521 Target Audience Note contains a report of exactly what the publisher

says is the intended audience or the intellectual level of a resource. Watch out for a blank in the first indicator which should produce the label "Audience:". Enter an '8' in that indicator if you wish to enter your own label for the note. Use one of the other display constant indicator values if they apply, i.e., if the wording they will produce is given on the resource.

A 1.7B14 [The rule for an Audience Note gives examples only]: 521 8 $aIntended audience: Elementary grades.

A 2.7B14 BK If it is stated on the resource, add a brief note about the intended audience or intellectual level of the resource.

L 2.7B14 LC will only give this note when it is "quoted from the publication".

A 9.7B14 ER If it is stated on the resource, add a brief note about the intended audience or intellectual level of the resource.

A 6.7B14 SR If it is stated on the resource, add a brief note about the intended audience or intellectual level of the resource.

A 7.7B14 VD If it is stated on the resource, add a brief note about the intended audience or intellectual level of the resource:

521 8 $aMPAA rating: PG-13. 521 8 $aTV Parental Guidelines: TVY

A 12.7B15 SE If it is stated on the resource, add a brief note about the intended audience or intellectual level of the resource:

521 8 $aPresents articles, crafts, puzzles, games, and other items for readers living on farms and ranches or interested in agriculture and rural life.

521 Target audience note


C 13.9.2 See the CONSER rule for details about Target Audience Notes:

521 8 $a"For nurses and health care practitioners."

521$a Target audience note



Repeatable Yes Hint 521$a contains the text of the note, exactly as it is provided on the resource.

Remember to use the display constants provided by the indicators, when appropriate; use I1 = 8 if you are going to provide your own label or do not need a label:

521 $aPreschool children. 521 3 $aTactile learner$adiscalculia. 521 8 $aIntended audience: Elementary grades. 521 8 $aFor children aged 7-9.

521$b Source



Repeatable No Hint 521$b contains the name of or abbreviation for the source of the note, if

audience information comes from anywhere except the resource itself: 521 2 $aK-3$bFollett Library Book Co. 521 0 $a5$bMemorial Public Library.

521$3 Materials specified



Repeatable No Hint 521$3 indicates the particular part of a multipart item to which the note

applies, e.g., a videocassette, when it is 'accompanying material' or is a part of a kit:

521 8 $3Videocassette$aMPAA rating: G.

System details note 538


A 7.7B10 VD Add a note about the system used for playing a videorecording: 538 $aVHS. {007/04/$e: b} 538 $aDVD. {007/04/$e: v}

CDV Add a 538 for additional physical information that might control the user’s

choice of playback equipment, including equipment needed for the computer portion of an enhanced or web-enabled DVD:

538 $aEnhanced DVD; for the 3 games a DVD-ROM drive with Windows 95 or higher is required. Will not work on a Mac or in a CD-ROM drive.

If the information that is provided is too confusing to interpret, take the description directly from the resource, and give it in quotations. If you collect DVDs that originated outside of North America, note the regions from which those DVDs come. A globe with the number '1' tells us that the DVD can be played on DVD players designed for North America. Make a note of any other number found on a globe, indicating that the DVD will only play on a DVD player designed for the region so designated:

538 $aDVD; region 4 encoding (Central and South America).

See "Guide to Cataloging DVDs Using AACR2r Chapters 7 and 9" http://ublib.buffalo.edu/libraries/units/cts/olac/capc/dvd/dvdprimer2.html for many more examples.

Hint Look for symbols, such as: This is a region symbol and needs a note, e.g., "DVD; produced for region 1."

This means the DVD is web-enabled (has links to the web built in) "DVD; web-enabled."

Add sound information, unless it is better given in 546 with languages:

538 $aVHS; Hi-Fi. 538 $aDVD; digital surround.

Add 'layers' information if given on a DVD (as given): 538 $aDVD; Dual-layer format.

Add aspect ratio information if given on a DVD (as given):

538 $aDVD; Aspect ratio 1.85:1. 538 $aDVD; Single layer; aspect ratio 1.77:1;

enhanced for 16 x 9 television.

Add 'pan-and-scan' information if given on a DVD (as given): 538 $aDVD; Original film in widescreen; reproduced

using pan-and-scan technique. This note is usually given as the first note for a video, as allowed by A1.7B.

540 Terms governing use and reproduction note


540 Terms governing use and reproduction note Rule A 1.7B20


period after closing ] or ) and give all punctuation before $5 Input standards—LC: Full Optional

Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Optional / Optional Repeatable Yes Indicators Blank—Undefined Subfields

$a Terms governing use and reproduction (NR) ;$b Jurisdiction (NR) $c Authorization (NR) $d Authorized users (NR) $u Uniform Resource Identifier (R) $3 Materials specified (NR) $5 Institution to which field applies (NR)

Related fields 506 Hint A 540 Terms Governing Use and Reproduction Note contains terms that

dictate the use and reproduction of a resource; for example, restrictions on the use of the resource after access has been provided (e.g., imposed by the library), or special permissions for the use of the resource. If restrictions are imposed on all copies of the resource, use 506 instead of 540.

A 1.7B20 Note restrictions on the use of the resource: 540 $aRestricted to scholarly use.$5DLC

A 2.7B20 BK Add a note on restrictions as per 1.7B20.

A 9.7B20 ER Add a note on restrictions as per 1.7B20.

A 6.7B20 SR Add a note on restrictions as per 1.7B20.

A 7.7B20 VD Add a note on restrictions as per 1.7B20: 540 $aPublic performance rights purchased.$5FMlbTMQ

A 12.7B21 2002

SE Add a note on restrictions as per 1.7B20: 540 $aRestricted to association members.$5FMlbTMQ

540$a Terms governing use and reproduction



Repeatable No Hint 540$a contains the text of a legal or official statement about restrictions or

permission for the use or reproduction of a resource: 540 $aRestricted: Copying allowed only for non-

profit organizations.

Language note 546


546 Language note Rule A 1.7B2


period after closing ] or ) Input standards—LC: Full Optional

Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Required if applicable / Required if applicable Repeatable Yes Indicators Blank—Undefined Subfields

$a Language note (NR) $b Information code or alphabet (R) $3 Materials specified (NR)

Related fields 008 Lang; 041 ; 765 ; 767 Hint A 546 Language Note contains information about the language of the

described resource if it is not already obvious from the rest of the record. Older records may have this note in a 500 field. Change the tag to 546.

A 1.7B2 [The rule for a Language Note gives examples only]: 546 $aText in English, French and Spanish. {008 Lang: eng} {041 1 $aeng$afre$aspa}

546 $aLatin text, parallel English translation. {008 Lang: lat} {041 1 $alat$aeng$hlat

L 1.7B2 Give the predominant language first and the others in English alphabetical

order; if none are predominant give them in English alphabetical order. See the LCRI for further details about:

Translation notes Sign languages—give the particular sign system; clarify whether the whole

contents are signed (e.g., Signed in American Sign Language), or just some signing is present (e.g., Includes sign language; the sign system represented is British Sign Language).

Hint If a work is a translation, and translation information is not entered elsewhere, add a translation note. Currently there is not a consensus of opinion among the experts on whether to use field 500, field 546, or field 580 for a translation note. Until final consensus is reached on the most appropriate field for such a note, it seems to me that the 546 is the most logical field to use for all notes on languages:

245 10 $aChapel Road /$cLouis Paul Boon ; translated by Adrienne Dixon.

546 $aTranslated from the Flemish. It is LC practice to not add such a note if a uniform title is already present with a language added:

240 10 $aKapellekensbaan.$lEnglish 245 10 $aChapel Road /$cLouis Paul Boon ; translated by

Adrienne Dixon. However, some catalogers feel it is useful to add a translation note even if a uniform title is already present:

546 Language note


240 10 $aKapellekensbaan.$lEnglish 245 10 $aChapel Road /$cLouis Paul Boon ; translated by

Adrienne Dixon. 546 $aTranslated from the Flemish.

A 2.7B2 BK Add a note about the language(s) of the text of a work, or indicate that it is a translation or adaptation, unless this information is obvious from the rest of the description:

546 $aText is in English and Spanish. {008 Lang: eng} {041 0 $aeng$aspa} 546 $aText in English and French on inverted pages. {008 Lang: eng} {041 0 $aeng$afre} 546 $aTranslated from the German. {008 Lang: eng} {041 1 $aeng$hger}

A 9.7B2 ER Add a note for the language(s) and/or script(s) of the spoken or written contents of an electronic resource, or indicate that it is a translation or adaptation, unless this information is obvious from the rest of the description:

546 $aUser's guide in English and Spanish. {008 Lang: eng} {041 0 $aeng$aspa} 546 $aAudio portion in English and Spanish. {008 Lang: eng} {041 0 $aeng$aspa}

Do NOT use this note for programming languages. Instead use a 538 System Details Note (see A9.7B1b)

A 6.7B2 SR Add a note for the language(s) of the spoken or sung contents of a sound recording, unless the language is obvious from the rest of the description:

546 $aSung in French. {008 Lang: fre}

546 $aIn French, introduced in English. {008 Lang: fre} {041 0 $dfre$deng}

A 7.7B2 VD Give the language(s) of the spoken or sung contents of a video, unless the language is obvious from the rest of the description:

546 $aIn French, with English subtitles. {008 Lang: fre} {041 1 $afre$beng} 546 $aDubbed in English. {008 Lang: eng}

Copy being described, library's holdings note 590


590 Copy being described, library's holdings note Rule 1.7B20


period after closing ] or ) Input standards—LC: Full Not listed

Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min Optional / Optional Repeatable Yes Indicators Blank—Undefined Subfields

$a Copy being described, library's holdings note (NR) Hint A 590 Copy Being Described, Library's Holdings Note contains information

about a particular copy of a resource that is held by a particular library, e.g., "Title page torn". DO NOT USE THIS NOTE IN A SHARED SYSTEM. It is better to enter this type of information in a note in an item record on your system.

A 1.7B20 Add a note about important details about a particular copy of a resource or the volumes, parts, years, etc., of a multipart item that are held by the library.

L 1.7B20 See the LCRI for details about LC's treatment of copy-specific notes. 590 $aLibrary lacks: Vol. 2.

NOTES:

Subject headings 6XX

Cataloging with AACR and MARC21 (9/15/2005)—Update 2, Sep 2005 3.6-5

6XX $v Form subdivision

Rule None Sources of information Not applicable Preceding punctuation None


Repeatable Yes Hint 6XX$v contains a term that describes the kind of material or genre that the

resource is, e.g., "$aHorses$vPeriodicals" means the resource is a periodical about horses:

650 0 $aScuba diving$vPeriodicals. 651 0 $aSalem (Mass.)$vFiction. 655 7 $aFairy tales$vMaps.$2gsafd

Older records used subfield $x for this purpose. Technically, every subfield $x that contains a subdivision that represents the form of the item should be changed to subfield $v.

6XX $x General subdivision



Repeatable Yes Hint 6XX$x contains a general topical subdivision that narrows the scope of the

subject heading in subfield $a; subfield $x further explains what the resource is about:

650 0 $aAnimals$xFood habits. 651 0 $aTexas$xGovernors$xStaff. 655 7 $aDictionaries$xFrench.$2rbgenr

Older records also used subfield $x for form subdivisions. Technically, every subfield $x that contains a subdivision that represents the form of the item should be changed to subfield $v.

6XX $y Chronological subdivision



Repeatable Yes Hint 6XX$y contains a chronological subdivision that represents a period of time

and is intended to narrow the scope of the subject heading in subfield $a: 650 0 $aReligious thought$yModern period, 1500- 651 0 $aUruguay$xHistory$yGreat War, 1843-1852. 655 7 $aCompetition drawings$y1984.$2gmgpc

6XX Subject headings


6XX $z Geographical subdivision



Repeatable Yes Hint 6XX$z contains a geographic subdivision that represents a place and is

intended to narrow the scope of the subject heading in subfield $a: 650 0 $aTobacco$xToxicology$zGreat Britain. 651 0 $aInterstate 70$zColorado$zVail Pass. 655 7 $aHymnals$zMassachusetts$y18th century.$2rbgner

6XX $2 Source of heading or term

Rule None Sources of information Not applicable Preceding punctuation The end of field punctuation for the field


Repeatable No Hint 6XX$2 contains a code that represents the thesaurus from which the subject

heading in subfield $a was taken. These codes come from: MARC Code Lists for Relators, Sources, Description Conventions:

650 7 $aCake decorating.$2sears

6XX $3 Materials specified



Repeatable No Hint 6XX$3 indicates the particular part of a multipart item to which the subject

heading applies, e.g., a videocassette when it is accompanying material or is a part of a kit:

650 0 $3Videocassette$aHistory, Modern$y1945-

Geographic subject heading 651


See the LC or OCLC MARC manuals for further details on the types of names that can be given as 651. For help in deciding on the kinds of things to be treated as geographic subject headings, see the MARC 21 Format for Authority and Bibliographic Data—Alphabetical List of Ambiguous Headings at: http://www.loc.gov/marc/ambiguous-headings.html If there is no entry in LCSH for a place, as long as the place name is formatted correctly according to AACR Chapter 23, the subject heading can be coded as coming from LCSH (I2 = 0). See the LCSH manual for further details. The second indicator for the 651 field specifies the source of the subject heading in the field. A more detailed explanation is given under 6XX beginning on p. 3.6-1. Coding instructions for the Subject subdivision subfields ($v, $x, $y, $z) and Control subfields ($2, $3) of a 651 are given under 6XX beginning on p. 3.6-5. Remember that all headings must be verified against an authority file (such as the Library of Congress Authority file or a local authority file) to ensure that they are given in a consistent format.

655 Genre/form index term


655 Genre/form index term Rule None

Sources of information N/A End of field punctuation Period, question mark, exclamation mark, hyphen, ( . ? ! - ) or

closing parenthesis ')'; if the final subfield is 2, 3, or 4, then the mark of punctuation or parenthesis precedes it.


Repeatable Yes Indicator 1 Type of Heading

# Basic 0 Faceted

Indicator 2 Thesaurus—Source of subject heading 0 Library of Congress Subject Headings—LCSH 1 LC subject headings for children's literature—AC 2 Medical Subject Headings—MeSH 3 National Agricultural Library subject authority file—NAL 4 Source not specified (including local headings) 5 Canadian Subject Headings (English) 6 Répertoire de vedettes-matière (Canadian Subj. Headings—French) 7 Source specified in subfield $2

Subfields $a Genre/form data or focus term (NR)

Subject subdivision subfields (see 6XX above for full descriptions) $v Form subdivision (R) $x General subdivision (R) $y Chronological subdivision (R) $z Geographical subdivision (R)

Control subfields (see 6XX above for full descriptions) $2 Source of heading or term (NR) $3 Materials specified (NR)

Hint A 655 contains a term indicating the genre, form, or physical characteristic of

a resource (what a resource is): 655 7 $aScience fiction.$2gsafd 655 0 $aShort stories.

See the LC or OCLC MARC manuals for further details on the types of terms that can be given as 655. The first indicator in a 655 is typically left blank for genre/form terms. It is only coded '0' when terms are taken from a faceted thesaurus, in which case each term is coded in a separate subfield $a and/or subfield $b (non-focus term). The second indicator in a 655 specifies the source of the term in the field. A more detailed explanation of this indicator is given under 6XX beginning on p. 3.6-1. Before 2002, the second indicator for a 655 was always '7' with a code in subfield $2 for the source of the heading:

655 7 $aGhost stories.$2lcsh After 2002 (and in records edited to conform to new standards), the second

Genre/form index term 655


indicator should be '0' (LCSH) or one of the other valid values as appropriate: 655 0 $aGhost stories.

Terms taken from "Guidelines on subject access to individual works of fiction, drama, etc." are always entered as 655, with '7' as the second indicator and 'gsafd' in subfield $2. Use GSAFD headings when appropriate; use genre/form headings from LCSH when no GSAFD headings are available. Coding instructions for the Subject subdivision subfields ($v, $x, $y, $z) and Control subfields ($2, $3) of a 655 are given under 6XX beginning on p. 3.6-5. Remember that all headings must be verified against an authority file (such as the Library of Congress Authority file or a local authority file) to ensure that they are given in a consistent format. As of this writing, LC is not yet distributing authority records with 155 headings (genre/form headings). You can, however, download a file of MARC21 authority records for GSAFD headings from: http://www.library.northwestern.edu/public/gsafd/ Until LC authority records are available for their genre/form headings, you will need to make your own 155 authority records for genre/form headings that come from LCSH. Consider having a separate index for genre/form headings to distinguish between the same terms as subject headings and genre or form headings.

NOTES:

Added entries 7XX


3.7 7XX Added entries Rule A21.30

Sources of information Any source, if you think they would be useful (A21.29), but primarily:

BK (21.0B / 2.0B2) Title page or title page substitute (if no title page is available) ER (21.0B / 9.0B2) The resource itself (title screen, main menu, program statement,


SR (21.0B / 6.0B2) Physical carrier and label(s) VD (21.0B / 7.0B2) Title screens, physical carrier and label (s) SE (21.0B / 12.0B2) First issue or first available issue:


End of field punctuation Period, question mark, exclamation mark, hyphen, ( . ? ! - ) or closing parenthesis ')'; if the final subfield is 3, 4, or 5, then the mark of punctuation or parenthesis precedes it.


Repeatable Yes Indicator 1 See individual 7XX fields Indicator 2 Type of added entry

# No information provided 2 Analytical entry

Name subfields (see individual 7XX fields) Title subfields (see individual 7XX fields)

Control subfields $3 Materials specified (NR) $5 Institution to which field applies (NR)

Hint A 7XX field contains an added entry heading for the resource being described.

The first indicator of the 7XX fields has a different meaning depending on the type of heading found in the field, so see the individual 7XX fields for more details. The second indicator for all 7XX added entry fields specifies whether or not the added entry is analytical (referring to only a part of the resource rather than the whole resource). For example, if an added entry is needed for the author of one of the short stories in a collection, then the 700 will be a name/title analytical added entry (I2 = 2). For more information, see Analytical entries below. Added entry fields are made for persons (700), corporate bodies (710), and meetings (711) having some form of relationship with the resource being described. Added entry fields can also refer to other works that are related in some way to the resource being described. If an added entry is referring to a work rather than to a person or body, then the added entry will either be a title added entry (730 or 740) or a name/title added entry (700, 710, or 711).

7XX Added entries


A name/title added entry is used when the added entry refers to a work for which responsibility has been assigned to a person, body or meeting. When a person, body, or meeting is deemed to be responsible for a work, the corresponding added entry begins with the name of the person (700), body (711), or meeting (711), followed by the title of the work. If responsibility for a work cannot be assigned to a person, body, or meeting, then the added entry for the work will either be under a uniform title (see 730) or the title proper of the work (see 740). Remember that all headings must be verified against an authority file (such as the Library of Congress Authority file or a local authority file) to ensure that they are given in a consistent format. Explanations for names or titles as added entry headings are given under 1XX, along with the instructions on coding the names or titles, whether they are main entries, added entries, subject headings, or series added entries. This is because the name and/or title portions of all of these fields will be given in an established form and coded in exactly the same way wherever they are found. For details about establishing and coding: • a personal name to be used in a 700, see under 100 (Personal name main

entry), beginning on p. 3.1-21 • a corporate name to be used in a 710, see under 110 (Corporate name

main entry), beginning on p. 3.1-30 • a conference name to be used in a 711, see under 111 (Conference name

main entry), beginning on p. 3.1-42 • a uniform title to be used in a 730, see under 130 (Uniform title main

entry), beginning on p. 3.1-46 • the title portion of a name/title heading, also see under 130 (Uniform title

main entry), beginning on p. 3.1-46; however, note that titles are put in subfield $t when they follow a name in a heading.

A 21 CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS (Main vs. Added Entries) The same rules that tell you how to decide what heading to make the main entry (the primary heading) for a resource, also tell you what headings to add as added entries (secondary headings) for the resource. See under 1XX for those rules. To supplement those rules, however, AACR also gives separate rules to assist you in assigning extra added entries for resources.

A 21.29 Make added entries as per 21.30, but also make them whenever you simply think they would be useful.

L 21.29 See the LCRI for details about the preferred order in which to give added entries and why we do not add GMD to added entry fields.

A 21.29F Explain an added entry in a note if it is not already explained elsewhere in the bibliographic description.

A 21.30A If more than three persons or bodies could be given added entries, [you can, if you prefer] give only the one that is listed first on the source of information for the resource.

Added entries 7XX


A 21.30B Collaborators (700 or 710) • if the main entry is under a person or body that collaborated (worked

together) with one or two other persons or bodies to produce a resource, make added entries for the other collaborating persons or bodies

• if the main entry is under a corporate body or a uniform title, and three or less people collaborated to produce the resource, make added entries for the collaborating people

• if the main entry is under a corporate body or a uniform title and more than three people collaborated to produce the resource, make added entries for the first collaborating person

A 21.30C Writers (700) • if the main entry is under a person, or a corporate body, or a uniform title,

make an added entry for a "prominently named writer of a work"

A 21.30D Editors and compilers (700) • if a work is a monograph, make an added entry for a "prominently named

editor or compiler" • if a work is a serial, do not make an added entry for an editor unless the

work is likely to be known by the editor

A 21.30E Corporate bodies (710) • make an added entry for a prominently named corporate body, unless it is

only a distributor or manufacturer (but see the actual LCRI under L29.29D)

• make an added entry for a prominently named publisher if it is responsible for more than just publication (but see the actual LCRI under L29.29D)

L 21.30E Conferences (711)

• make an added entry for a conference, expedition, etc., that is named anywhere on a resource, unless the main entry is already under the conference, etc.

Issuing body of a series (710) • do NOT make an added entry for a corporate body that is merely the

issuing body of a series [note that this LCRI says "series" and not "serial"]

A 21.30F Other related persons or bodies (700 or 710) • make an added entry for a person or body if you feel that the access is

important

L 21.30F

Art exhibition institutions (710) • make an added entry for the institution at which an art exhibition is held if

it is named anywhere on a resource Festschriften (700 or 710) • make an added entry for the person or body being honored by a

festschrift, if that person or body is named on the chief source of a resource

7XX Added entries


2005 Music • make an added entry for any person named in the title or other title info.

of a musical work, unless that person is the subject of the work • make an added entry for the studio that produced a recording of

electronic or computer music, if the studio is named on the resource

A 21.30G Related works • make an added entry under the heading for a related work • if the related work heading is for a person or body, and the title of the

related work is different from the title proper (in the 245), use a name/title heading for the related work. [This seems to be saying, therefore, that if the title of the related work is the same as the title of the work being cataloged (in the 245), then we can use a name heading alone, without repeating the title for the related work.]

• when a uniform title is appropriate for a related work, use the uniform title in a name/title or title added entry for the work

L 21.30G • see the LCRI for details on making added entries in AACR form.

Hint To make an added entry for a related work, pretend that you are cataloging the

related work. If the main entry for the related work would be a personal name if it was being cataloged, enter the related work added entry under the personal name:

245 00 $aJFK$h[videorecording] /$c... 500 $aBased on the books On the trail of the

assassins by Jim Garrison and Crossfire: the plot that killed Kennedy by Jim Marrs.

700 1 $aGarrison, Jim,$d1921-$tOn the trail of the assassins.

700 1 $aMarrs, Jim.$tCrossfire. If the main entry for the related work would be a corporate name if it was being cataloged, enter the related work added entry under the corporate name:

245 10 $aMembership book /$cInternational Skeletal Society ; compiled [and edited] on behalf of the Society by Morrie E. Kricun.

500 $aRev. ed. of: Book of members. c1989. 710 2 $aInternational Skeletal Society.$tBook of

members. If the main entry for the related work would be a meeting name if it was being cataloged, enter the related work added entry under the meeting name:

245 00 $aNeoplasm and gnosticism /$cRichard T. Wallis, editor, Jay Bregman, associate editor.

500 $aPapers presented at the 6th international conference of the International Society for Neoplatonic Studies, entitled International Conference on Neoplatonism and Gnosticism, held at University of Oklahoma, Mar. 18-21, 1984.

711 2 $aInternational Conference on Neoplatonism and Gnosticism$d(1984 :$cUniversity of Oklahoma)

Added entries 7XX


If the main entry for the related work would be an uncontrolled title (i.e., for a work that does not need a uniform title) if it was being cataloged, enter the related work added entry under its title proper:

245 14 $aThe concise Cambridge history of English literature.

500 $aBased on the Cambridge history of English literature.

740 0 $aCambridge history of English literature. If the main entry for the related work would be a uniform title if it was being cataloged, enter the related work added entry under its uniform title:

245 10 $aNew year's revolution! /$cDiana G. Gallagher. 500 $aBased on the TV series The secret world of

Alex Mack. 730 0 $aSecret world of Alex Mack (Television

program)

A 21.30H Other relationships • make added entries under the appropriate headings for other related

names that seem useful for patrons

L 21.30H • see the LCRI for details on making added entries for manuscripts and for collections

A 21.30K1 Translators • if the main entry is a corporate body or a title, make added entries for

translators • if the main entry is a person, make added entries for translators if:

the translation is in verse the translation itself is important the work has been translated in the same language more than once it is implied that the translator is the author the main entry heading might be hard to find

L 21.30K1 • see the LCRI for details on making an added entry for a translator of

'belles lettres'

A 21.30K2 Illustrators • make an added entry for an illustrator if:

the name of the illustrator is on the chief source and is as prominent or more prominent than the name that is the main entry

the illustrations are half or more of the resource the illustrations are an important feature of the resource

L 21.30K2 2004

Make an added entry for an illustrator of a resource intended for children.

A 21.30M Analytical added entries • make an analytical added entry for a work contained within the work

being cataloged • see AACR Chapter 13 [Analytics] for additional guidance on when to

make analytical added entries. Also see the rules for works under editorial direction (A21.7B-21.7C), works with commentary (A21.13B), and musical works (A21.15A)

7XX Added entries


A 13.2A • if a part is named in a statement of responsibility [as a subsequent title with a different author (see A1.1G3 under 245$c)], or a Contents note (505), make an analytical added entry for that part

A 21.30M L 21.30M

• the form of the heading that is used for an analytical added entry (for a work contained in another work) depends upon the type of main entry that the individual work would have if it was cataloged separately.

If the main entry for the analytical work would be a personal name if it was cataloged separately, enter the analytical entry for the work under the personal name followed by the title [Note: in the example below, Shirley's name was repeated on the title page]:

100 1 $aVillane, Ron. 245 13 $aAn empty space /$cby Ron Villane. Open

admissions / by Shirley Lauro. Nothing immediate / by Shirley Lauro.

700 12 $aLauro, Shirley.$tOpen admissions. 700 12 $aLauro, Shirley.$tNothing immediate.

If the main entry for the analytical work would be a corporate name if it was cataloged separately, enter the analytical entry for the work under the corporate name followed by the title:

245 00 $aBest of ska!$h[sound recording]. 710 22 $aBluesbusters (Musical group).$tShame and

scandal in the family. 710 22 $aMaytals (Musical group).$tNever you change.

If the main entry for the analytical work would be a uniform title if it was cataloged separately, enter the analytical entry for the work under the uniform title:

245 14 $aThe comparative study Bible :$ba parallel bible presenting the New International Version, New American Standard Bible, Amplified Bible, King James Version.

730 02 $aBible.$lEnglish.$sNew International. 730 02 $aBible.$lEnglish.$sNew American Standard. 730 02 $aBible.$lEnglish.$sAmplified. 730 02 $aBible.$lEnglish.$sAuthorized.

If the main entry for the analytical work would be its title proper if it was cataloged separately, enter the analytical entry for the work under the title proper:

245 00 $aBulldog Drummond's secret police$h[videorecording] ;$bBulldog Drummond's bride /$ca Janus Films presentation ; Congress Films, Inc.

740 02 $aBulldog Drummond's bride. When a uniform title is appropriate, use the uniform title in a name/title or title added entry for the work. See the LCRI for details about the difference between analytical added entries and 'simple' added entries.

Added entries 7XX


6) "If there are many performers performing the same function (e.g., singers in an opera, actors in a drama), make added entries only for those who are given the greatest prominence in the chief source of information."

"If all are given equal prominence, make added entries only for those who are given prominence over the others in other places on the sound recording (e.g., the container, the program booklet) or, if that criterion does not apply, for those performing the most important functions (e.g., singing the principal roles, acting the principal parts)."

• "If a performer for whom an added entry would be made according to the guidelines above is also the composer of one or more works on the recording, make an added entry to represent the performing function in addition to any name/title access points (main entry or analytical added entries) made for his or her works."

L 21.30E Opera Houses (710):

• make an added entry for an opera house if it is named on a sound recording

L 21.7B L 21.7C L 25.34B L 25.34C

Name/title analytics for collections of musical works (700 or 710): • see the LCRIs for details on making name/title analytical added entries for

collections of musical works. LC has special rules governing the number of analytics that it will make, based on the number of composers represented. This can reduce access for your patron, so use your own judgment if you wish to make more entries. Do not make less.

VD Choice of added entries—Videos—Summary: Title (A21.30J; L21.30J; C 7) Series (A21.30L; L21.30L) Names (A21.29D; L21.29D):

People from 245$c if there is no production company: Producers Directors Writers Animators (but see below for further details)

Featured players, performers, narrators Interviewers, interviewees Lecturers People discussing their lives, ideas, works, etc. Corporate bodies from 245$c:

Production companies Sponsors

Corporate bodies from 260$b Related works (A21.30G; L21.30G) Other relationships, if useful for access (A21.30H) Analytics (A21.30M; L21.30M) For music videos, see also Sound recording (SR) added entries.

7XX Added entries


L 21.29D For added entries for persons or bodies connected with a video, follow A21.29 and A21.30 and the instructions below: • if there is no added entry for a production company, make added entries

for all persons or corporate bodies that are given in a 245$c: producers directors writers other significant persons

• however, you do not have to make added entries for those persons if there is an added entry for a production company, unless the person is:

an animator of an animated film the producer/director of a student film the director of a theatrical [feature] film the filmmaker or developer of a graphic item who is attributed as the

author on the data sheet prominently named on the accompanying material ("a film by")

• if the main entry is for a person, filmmaker, or developer of a graphic item, make added entries for other persons involved in production only if they have joint responsibility or collaboration, or if their contributions are significant

• make added entries for all corporate bodies in the 260$b (publishers, distributors, etc.)

• make added entries for all featured players, performers, and narrators, but do NOT make added entries:

for the members of a performing group if the main entry is under a performing group

if there are more than 3 players listed, in which case, make added entries for only those given prominence (at the beginning credits)

• make added entries for interviewers, interviewees, lecturers, or people discussing their lives, ideas, works, etc., if they are not already main entries

OLAC 2005

Make added entries for everyone from a 245$c for "fiction and nonfiction works that are released theatrically, direct to video, or made-for-television". If, however, you have made an added entry for a production company, you do not have to make added entries for those persons for "specialized, instructional, and other similar sorts of films not intended for a mass audience".

SE Choice of added entries—Serials—Summary: Title (A21.30J; L21.30J; C7) Series (A21.30L; L21.30L) Names (C8):

Editors/compilers (A21.30D), but see below Corporate bodies:

Prominently named (A21.30E) Giving important access points (A21.30H) Responsible for the serial, but not the main entry (A21.1B2) Joint responsibility for the serial (A21.30C)

Other persons or bodies, useful for access (A21.30F) Related works (A21.30G; L21.30G)

Supplements Indexes

Added entries 7XX


Subseries Special issues of serials Collections of extracts from serials

Other relationships, if useful for access (A21.30H) Analytics (A21.30M; L21.30M)

A 21.29B 2004

Persons, corporate bodies and, titles on later issues or parts of a serial: • if you think it would be useful, make added entries for persons, corporate

bodies and/or titles on later issues or parts of a serial; remember to add a note explaining such added entries

L 21.30D Editors and compilers (700):

• do not make an added entry for an editor unless the work is likely to be known by that editor's name

L 21.30E Corporate bodies that are more than publishers (710):

• make an added entry for a prominently named corporate body if it is more than merely a publisher, distributor, or manufacturer

C 7.5 Analytical and related work added entries:

• see the CONSER rule for details about analytical added entries and related work added entries for serials

7XX$3 Materials specified



Repeatable No Hint 7XX$3 indicates the particular part of a multipart item to which the added

entry applies, e.g., a videocassette when it is accompanying material or is a part of a kit:

700 1 $3Videocassette$aGibson, Mel.

7XX$5 Institution to which field applies

Rule None Source of information No prescribed source Preceding punctuation The end of field punctuation for the field


Repeatable No Hint 7XX$5 contains the MARC21 organization code of the body to which the field

applies. The source of the MARC code is the MARC Code List for Organizations. Using this field allows you to specify that the added entry might apply to your library only, e.g., an added entry is for the co-author of the 10th chapter in a book because that person is a professor at your college:

700 1 $aWilliamson, Nancy Joyce.$5CaOTU

700 Personal name added entry


700 Personal name added entry Rule A21.30

Sources of information BK (21.0B / 2.0B2) Title page or title page substitute (if no title page is available) ER (21.0B / 9.0B2) The resource itself (title screen, main menu, program statement,






Repeatable Yes Indicator 1 Type of personal name entry element

0 Forename 1 Surname 3 Family name

Indicator 2 Type of added entry # No information provided 2 Analytical entry

Subfields Name subfields (see 100 for full descriptions)

$a Personal name (NR) $q( ) Fuller form of name (NR)

$b Numeration (NR) ,$c Titles and other words associated with a name (R) ,$d Dates associated with a name (NR) ,$e Relator term (R) $4 Relator code (R)

Title subfields (see 130 for full descriptions) .$t Title of a work (NR) $t Title of a work preceded by an open date (NR)

.$n Number of part/section of a work (R) ,$n Opus, serial or thematic index no., or a date used as a no. (R) .$p Name of part/section of a work (R) ,$p Name of part/section of a work preceded by $n (R) .$l Language of a work (NR) .$f Date of a work (NR) .$k Form subheading in title (R) .$s Version or edition of a work (NR)

,$m Medium of performance for music (R) ;$o Arranged statement for music—contains the abbreviation 'arr.' (NR) ,$r Key for music (NR) ,$x ISSN (NR)

Control Subfields (see 7XX above for full descriptions) $3 Materials specified (NR) $5 Institution to which field applies (NR)

Personal name added entry 700


Hint A 700 contains an added entry (heading) for a person that has some form of relationship with the resource being described:

245 10 $aOffice 97 annoyances /$cWoody Leonhard, Lee Hudspeth, and T.J. Lee.

700 1 $aHudspeth, Lee. 700 1 $aLee, Timothy-James.

The first indicator for the 700 field specifies the type of personal name found in the field. A more detailed explanation is given under tag 100 on p. 3.1-20. The second indicator for all 7XX fields specifies whether or not the added entry is analytical. A more detailed explanation is given under 7XX on p. 3.7-1. Rules and coding instructions for the Name subfields of a 700 are given under tag 100 beginning on p. 3.1-27. Rules and coding instructions for the Title subfields of a 700 are given under 130 beginning on p. 3.1-51. However, note that titles are put in subfield $t when they follow a name in a heading. Coding instructions for the Control Subfields of a 700 are given under 7XX on p. 3.7-11. The rules for when to add a 700 field are given under 7XX beginning on p. 3.7-2. Remember that all headings must be verified against an authority file (such as the Library of Congress Authority file or a local authority file) to ensure that they are given in a consistent format.

710 Corporate name added entry


710 Corporate name added entry Rule A21.30







Repeatable Yes Indicator 1 Type of corporate name entry element

0 Inverted name; a personal name in inverted order (pre-AACR2) 1 Jurisdiction name (i.e., place, or place and name, e.g., govt. bodies) 2 Name in direct order



$a Corporate name or jurisdiction name as entry element (NR) .$b Each subordinate unit in a hierarchy (R) $n A number designation for a meeting entered under a corp. name (R) $c Location of meeting—when given outside parentheses (NR)

#:$c Location of meeting—when given inside parentheses (NR) $d Date of meeting —when given outside parentheses (NR)

#:$d Date of meeting —when given inside parentheses (NR) $d( ) Date of treaty signing (R)

,$e Relator term—relationship between a name and the work (R) $4 Relator code (R)


.$n Number of part/section of a work (R)

.$p Name of part/section of a work (R) ,$p Name of part/section of a work preceded by $n (R) .$l Language of a work (NR) .$f Date of a work (NR) .$k Form subheading in title (R) .$s Version or edition of a work (NR) ,$x ISSN (NR)


Corporate name added entry 710


Hint A 710 contains an added entry (heading) for a corporate body that has some form of relationship with the resource being described:

245 00 $aHumility$h[videorecording] /$cPorchLight Entertainment.

710 2 $aPorchlight Entertainment. The first indicator for the 710 field specifies the type of corporate name found in the field. A more detailed explanation is given under tag 110 on p. 3.1-30. The second indicator for all 7XX fields specifies whether or not the added entry is analytical. A more detailed explanation is given under 7XX on p. 3.7-1. Rules and coding instructions for the Name subfields of a 710 are given under tag 110 beginning on p. 3.1-39. Rules and coding instructions for the Title subfields of a 710 are given under 130 beginning on p. 3.1-51. However, note that titles are put in subfield $t when they follow a name in a heading. Note: music subfields ($m, $o, $r) are omitted from X10 tables because those subfields are unlikely to be used in conjunction with a corporate name. Coding instructions for the Control Subfields of a 710 are given under 7XX on p. 3.7-11. The rules for when to add a 710 field are given under 7XX beginning on p. 3.7-2. Remember that all headings must be verified against an authority file (such as the Library of Congress Authority file or a local authority file) to ensure that they are given in a consistent format.

711 Meeting name added entry


711 Meeting name added entry Rule A21.30







Repeatable Yes Indicator 1 Type of meeting name entry element

0 Inverted name (not used in AACR2) 1 Jurisdiction name (not used in AACR2) 2 Name in direct order



$a Meeting name or jurisdiction name as entry element (NR) $n A number designation for a meeting (R) $c Location of meeting—when given outside parentheses (NR)

#:$c Location of meeting—when given inside parentheses (NR) $d Date of meeting —when given outside parentheses (R)

#:$d Date of meeting —when given inside parentheses (R) .$e Subordinate unit entered under a meeting name (R) $4 Relator code (R)


.$n Number of part/section of a work (R)

.$p Name of part/section of a work (R) ,$p Name of part/section of a work preceded by $n (R) .$l Language of a work (NR) .$f Date of a work (NR) .$k Form subheading in title (R) .$s Version or edition of a work (NR) ,$x ISSN (NR)


Uncontrolled related/analytical title added entry 740


However, if the individual works in a collection are by different authors, then the analytical entries for the works must be entered as name/title added entries (A21.30M). We also use 740 for any variations of subsequent independent titles, as per L21.30J below. We used to use 740 for variant titles, with notes to explain from where the variant titles came. We now use 246 instead for variant titles, and use 740 only for uncontrolled related work and analytic title added entries. Use a 730 for a uniform title added entry for a related work and for an analytical title that requires a uniform title. The first indicator for the 740 field is a filing indicator. An explanation of this is given under tag 245 beginning on p. 3.2-6. However we are currently to omit initial articles from 740, so I1 in 740 should always be '0'. The second indicator for all 7XX fields specifies whether or not the added entry is analytical. A more detailed explanation is given under 7XX on p. 3.7-1. Coding instructions for the Control Subfields of a 740 are given under 7XX on p. 3.7-11.

L 21.30J Drop initial articles in title added entries (246 and 740), unless those initial articles are part of a personal, geographic, or corporate name, or the meaning of the title would be obscured. See the LCRI for details about:

Added entries for title in the context of a machine-readable catalog Controlled/uncontrolled Data constituting title added entries/means of carrying them in MARC

record: 1) Title added entry derived from 245 field 2) Title added entry derived from 246 field 3) Title added entry recorded in 740

Items without collective title: 2. Title access to independent titles: Sometimes a resource that is a collection lacks a collective title and just lists the independent titles in the collection. In this case LC makes a title added entry for the title that is in the title proper ($a$n$p) using the first indicator of the 245. Then LC says it uses 740 (I2 = 2) to index the subsequent titles in the 245, if there are a total of 3 or less:

245 00 $aArthur's teacher trouble$h[videorecording] ;$bArthur's spelling trubble /$cWGBH and CINAR.

740 02 $aArthur's spelling trubble.

740 Uncontrolled related/analytical title added entry


If there are more than 3 titles present, LC makes a title added entry for the 245 title only. [Note, however, that the correct way to provide access to works in a collection is to make an analytical added entry; see A 21.30M] Use 246 3# for variations of the first title in the 245$a, but use 740 02 for any variations of subsequent independent titles:

245 14 $aThe ecclesiastical history of the English people ;$bThe greater chronicle ; Bede's letter to Egbert /$cBede ; edited by ...

740 02 $aGreater chronicle. 740 02 $aBede's letter to Egbert. 740 02 $aLetter to Egbert.

4. Accompanying material: if you wish to give access to a title that comes from accompanying material, treat that title as an analytic and use a 740 02 for it. Also use a 740 02 for any varying forms of that title:

245 00 $aOSHA plan writer$h[electronic resource] 300 $a1 computer disk ;$c5 1/4 in. +$e1 manual (1

v.) 500 $aTitle on manual: Dr. Young’s OSHA plan

writer. 740 02 $aDr. Young’s OSHA plan writer.

740 $a Uncontrolled related/analytical title

Rule A 21.30 Source of information Not applicable Preceding punctuation None


Repeatable No Hint 740$a contains the uncontrolled related or analytical title of a work:

245 10 $aPearson's handbook :$bcrystallographic data for intermetallic phases /$cP. Villars.

500 $aFirst-2nd ed. published as: Pearson's handbook of crystallographic data for intermetallic phases / P. Villars, L.D. Calvert.

740 0 $aPearson's handbook of crystallographic data for intermetallic phases.

Uncontrolled related/analytical title added entry 740


740 .$n Number of part or section

Rule A 21.30 Source of information Not applicable Preceding punctuation Period (.$n)


Repeatable Yes Hint 740$n contains a part or section number or letter that qualifies an uncontrolled

related or analytical title.

740 .$p Name of part or section

Rule A 21.30 Source of information Not applicable Preceding punctuation Period when following $a (.$p)



Hint 740$p contains a part or section title that qualifies the uncontrolled related or

analytical title: 740 02 $aDissolution of the family unit.$pDivorce,

separation, and annulment.

753 System details access to computer files


753 System details access to computer files Rule None

Sources of information Not applicable End of field punctuation None, unless the last word ends with its own punctuation



$a Make and model of machine (NR) $b Programming language (NR) $c Operating system (NR)

Related fields 538 Hint A 753 contains information about the make and model of a computer,

programming language, and/or operating system used with an electronic resource and its accompanying material:

753 $aIBM PC$bPascal$cDOS 1.1 Use this field to give more consistent access to this information than you may be able to provide in a 538 System Details Note.

Linking entry fields 76X-78X


76X-78X Linking entry fields Rule 12.7B8

Sources of information (1.7A2) Any source End of field punctuation None, unless the last word ends with its own punctuation, or if $a is

the last subfield—$a ends with a period Input standards—LC: Full See the individual fields

Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min See the individual fields Repeatable Yes Indicator 1 Display controller

0 Display as a note 1 Do not display as a note

Indicator 2 See the individual fields Subfields

$i Display text (NR) $a Main entry heading (NR) $t Title (NR) $x ISSN (NR) $w Record control number (R)

See the LC or OCLC MARC manuals for details on other subfields Related fields 580

Hint 76X-78X Linking Entry fields contain descriptive data concerning a related

resource. See 580 (Linking Entry Complexity Note) for additional rules relating to these fields. These linking fields are used to provide links between related records. Ideally, systems create an automated link between the records using the control numbers provided in subfield $w of these fields. Linking fields may also be used to generate notes, depending on the values given in their first indicators. See the individual fields that follow for linking fields that are required by AACR 12.7B8 (i.e., 765, 767, 770, 772, 775, 776, 777, 780, 785, and 787). Other linking fields are also available, but are not discussed here. See the LC or OCLC MARC manual for details on those linking fields (e.g., 760, 762, 773, or 774). Explanations for the most frequently used subfields that are common to all linking fields are given below. Note: Linking entries link together separately cataloged publications that have separate records.

C 14 See the CONSER rule for details about linking relationships and linking entry fields:

An overview Chronological and horizontal relationships Steps in creating a link What linking entry fields do and don't do Components of a linking entry field Reciprocal links

When to use an explicit linking note [580] Chronological relationships (fields 780/785)

Continues / Continued by

76X-78X Linking entry fields


Separated from / Continued in part by Continues in part / Split into Absorbed / Absorbed by Absorbed in part / Absorbed in part by Merged with: ... to form: ... / Merger of: ... and: ...

Horizontal relationships Translations (fields 765/767) and language editions (field 775) Other types of editions (field 775) Reprints (field 775) Supplements (fields 770/772) Other physical media (fields 776) "Issued with" (field 777) Companions, summaries, and other related resources (field 787)

Linking to monographs and integrating resources Monographs Integrating resources

When not to link The relationship is too vague or unclear Related serials for which the title is the same and there is no online

record The related serial is not separately cataloged Brother-sister relationships Related serial is acting only as a publisher

Summary: "Determine first whether there is a true linking relationship. Link only to other serials that are or would be separately cataloged. When the related serial is cataloged online use the form of the entry found

in the related record. Any headings used in links must be given in AACR2R form (see CEG for details).

Give the uniform title (130) or the title proper (245$a, $n, $p) in subfield $t.

Use a 580 note and a link when the note that would be printed from the link is not sufficient. When using a 580 note, be sure that the first indicator in the link is set to "1".

Do not link to another serial if the relationship is unclear or uncertain. Links may be made to monographs and integrating resources."

C 14.1.3b 7XX linking fields are NOT intended to replace added entries. They are

intended to allow patrons to retrieve linked records in an online search. Make an appropriate added entry (in a 700-730 field) for a related work, if one is needed. [However, some systems do index linking fields allowing them to, in effect, replace added entries. In this case, do not add related work added entries for any titles already provided in a linking field. Be aware of how your own system handles these linking fields.]

Linking entry fields 76X-78X


76X-78X$i Display text



Repeatable No Hint 76X-78X $i contains a label that you would prefer to be displayed instead of

the one produced by the display constant for the field: $iCD-ROM of:$tEncyclopedia of associations$x0071-

0202$w(DLC) 76046129 $w(OCoLC)1223579

76X-78X$a Main entry heading

Rule 12.7B8 Source of information (1.7A2) Any source Preceding punctuation None


Repeatable No Hint 76X-78X $a contains the main entry heading (1XX) from the related record.

Include the separating punctuation, but not the subfield codes, from the related 1XX:

$aSpecial Libraries Association. New York Chapter.$tSpecial libraries of Greater New York

76X-78X$t Title

Rule None Source of information Not applicable Preceding punctuation Period, if preceded by $a (.$t)

Colon, if preceded by $i (:$t) Input standards—LC: Full Required if applicable


Hint 76X-78X $t contains the title from the 245 ($a$n$p) or the 130 of the related

record. Omit initial articles. Include separating punctuation but not the subfield codes from the related 245 or 130:

$tArmy, Navy, Air Force journal

76X-78X Linking entry fields


76X-78X$x ISSN



Repeatable No Hint 76X-78X $x contains the ISSN from the 022 of the related serial record:

$tUniversity of Western Australia law review$x0042-0328$w(OCoLC)1587621

76X-78X$w Record control number



Repeatable Yes Hint 76X-78X $w contains the control number from the 001 of the related record,

preceded, in parentheses, by the MARC code that identifies the source of the control number—use '(DLC)' for an LCCN; use '(OCoLC)' for an OCLC control number:

$tJournal of neurosurgery$w(DLC)med47001541

Original language entry 765/767 Translation entry


765 767

Original language entry Translation entry

Rule A 12.7B8e Sources of information (1.7A2) Any source

End of field punctuation None, unless the last word ends with its own punctuation, or if $a is the last subfield—$a ends with a period

Input standards—LC: Full 765—Required if applicable 767—Optional

Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min 765—Required if applicable / Optional 767—Optional / Optional

Repeatable Yes Indicator 1 Display controller

0 Display 1 Do not display

Indicator 2 Display constant controller # 765—Translation of:

767—Translated as: 8 No display constant (note is in 580)

Subfields (see 76X-78X for full descriptions) $a Display text (NR) $i Main entry heading (NR) $t Title (NR) $x ISSN (NR) $w Record control number (R)

Related fields 546 ; 580 ; 041 Hint A 765 contains information about the original work when a record is for a

translation of that work.

A 12.7B8e SE Give the name of the original work in a record for a translation of a previously published work:

765 0 $tAstrofizicheskie issledovaniíà$w(DLC) 78648457 $w(OCoLC)4798581

Displays as a note as: Translation of: Astrofizicheskie issledovaniíà Make a Linking Entry Complexity Note (580) if the title of the original or the translation is not available:

580 $aTranslation of the German edition.

Hint A 767 contains information about a translation of a work when a record is for the original work that has been translated, or is for another translation.

A 12.7B8e Give the name of a translation in the record for the original work: 767 0 $tAstrofizicheskie issledovaniíà. English.

Bulletin of the Special Astrophysical Observatory -- North Caucasus$x0190-2709$w (DLC) 86649325 $w(OCoLC)4698159

Displays as a note as: Translated as: Astrofizicheskie issledovaniíà. English. Bulletin of the Special Astrophysical

Observatory — North Caucasus

Hint Use 775 (Other Edition Entry) for language editions (resources published simultaneously in different languages).

770/772 Supplement/special issue entry Supplement parent entry


770 772

Supplement/special issue entry Supplement parent entry

Rule A 12.7B8g Sources of information (1.7A2) Any source

End of field punctuation None, unless the last word ends with its own punctuation, or if $a is the last subfield—$a ends with a period

Input standards—LC: Full 770—Optional 772—Required if applicable

Input standards—OCLC: Full/Min 770—Optional / Optional 772—Required if applicable / Optional

Repeatable Yes Indicator 1 Display controller

0 Display 1 Do not display

Indicator 2 Display constant controller # 770—Has supplement:

772—Supplement to: 0 772—Parent: 8 No display constant (note is in 525)

Subfields (see 76X-78X for full descriptions) $a Display text (NR) $i Main entry heading (NR) $t Title (NR) $x ISSN (NR) $w Record control number (R)

Related fields 525 Hint A 770 contains information about a supplement record when a resource has a

supplement that is cataloged using a separate record.

A 12.7B8g SE Give the name of separately described supplements in the record for the main resource:

770 0 $tDirectory: United States, territories, and Canada$w(DLC) 78646712 $w(OCoLC)4579783

Displays as a note as: Has supplement: Directory: United States, territories, and Canada Make a Supplement Note (525) if the supplements are irregular, informal, numerous, or unimportant:

525 $aNumerous supplements.

Hint A 772 contains information about the main resource when a record is for a supplement.

A 12.7B8g Give the name of the main resource in the record for the supplement: 772 0 $tWorld agricultural situation (Washington, D.C.

: 1970)$x0084-1358$w(DLC)sf 81008035 Displays as a note as: Supplement to: World agricultural situation (Washington, D.C. : 1970)

C 14.3.4 See the CONSER rule for details about what a supplement is and when to add a linking entry/note for it.

Series added entries 8XX


the series added entry if there is any difference between a series statement on the resource and the established form of the series heading, or between the series numbering on the resource and the form of numbering in the series authority record. See the LCRI for further details about:

Numbering grammatically integrated with series title More than one system of numbering Numbering errors Numbering consisting of an indication of a year and sequential number

within a year Number preceded by one or more letters Numbering for publications of the U.S. Congress Main series and indirectly entered subseries:

Main series is unnumbered Main series is numbered Hierarchy of numbered and unnumbered main series/subseries

Single series statement encompassing more than one series Collected musical works of composers

Hint If a heading has already been established in an authority record for a series, then it is simple to decide on the heading to use as the series added entry in the bibliographic record. Search for the series statement from the resource in your local authority file or the LC Authority File. If you find an authority record and:

• the series heading is in a 100 field of the authority record: enter the series statement from the resource in a 490 in the

bibliographic record (I1 = 1) copy the series heading from the 100 in the authority record to an 800

in the bibliographic record (as the series added entry)

• the series heading is in the 110 field of the authority record: enter the series statement from the resource in a 490 in the



• the series heading is in the 111 field of the authority record: enter the series statement from the resource in a 490 in the



• the series heading is in the 130 field of the authority record, and the heading is exactly the same as the statement on the resource:

enter the series statement from the resource in a 440 in the bibliographic record as both the series statement and the series added entry

8XX Series added entries


• the series heading is in the 130 field of the authority record, and the heading differs from the statement on the resource:

enter the series statement from the resource in a 490 in the bibliographic record (I1 = 1)

copy the series heading from the 130 in the authority record to an 830 in the bibliographic record (as the series added entry)

On the other hand, if no authority record is yet available for a series, you must work out for yourself the proper form for the established heading of the series that is to be used for the series added entry. This form depends upon the type of main entry that the entire series would have if it was cataloged as a whole. If the main entry for the entire series cataloged as a whole would be a personal name, then enter the series added entry under the personal name. For example, Ann Martin is responsible for every work in her series:

490 1 $aBaby-sitters club ;$v#5 800 1 $aMartin, Ann M.,$d1955-$tBaby-sitters Club

;$v#5. If the main entry for the entire series cataloged as a whole would be a corporate name, then enter the series added entry under the corporate name. For example, the V&A Museum is responsible for every work in its series:

490 0 $aLarge picture book ;$vno. 9 810 2 $aVictoria and Albert Museum.$tLarge picture

book ;$vno. 9. If the main entry for the entire series cataloged as a whole would be a meeting name, then enter the series added entry under the meeting name. For example, every work in the following series comes out of the Symposium:

490 1 $aProceedings of the Comparative Literature Symposium ;$vv. 8

811 2 $aComparative Literature Symposium.$tProceedings of the Comparative Literature Symposium ;$vv. 8.

If the main entry for the entire series cataloged as a whole would be a title, then enter the series added entry under its uniform title. In the following example, different authors are responsible for each work in the series, so the series must be entered under its title. Series titles in headings are always 'controlled', so are always given as uniform titles:

490 1 $aLiving language 830 0 $aLiving language series.

L 1.6 See the LCRI for very important details about when to add a series statement and make an added entry for a series, versus when to add the statement but not make an added entry, versus when to not add anything at all (when wording on a resource is a 'series-like phrase' rather than a series statement).

Hint As a quick rule-of-thumb, make a series added entries for most series statements, but do not make a series added entry for a series that is primarily just a publisher's name.

Books


SEARCH FOR COPY CAT RECORDS

Field Pros Cons LCCN (010) usually from title page

verso

Often available on books Numbers are easy to search Usually good, direct access to matching or

nearly matching records

Occasionally does not retrieve a matching record

Can retrieve more than one record, even though they are supposed to be unique

Can retrieve a non-matching record ISBN (020) usually from title page

verso &/or back cover

Often available on most types of materials Numbers are easy to search Usually good, direct access to matching or




Can retrieve a non-matching record

SRN (UPC/EAN)

(024) usually from back cover

Sometimes available on recent resources Numbers are easy to search Usually good, direct access to matching or




Can retrieve a non-matching record Name/Title (1XX / 7XX /

8XX / 245) from title page

Usually available on most types of materials

Names can be editors, illustrators, translators, etc., not just authors

Combining names with titles can retrieve less matches to sift through

Must know the correct form of name to search, watch out for pseudonyms.

Others may not have provided the name as a heading

Prolific authors can retrieve long hitlists

Title (245) from title page

Nearly always available on most types of materials

Easy to search

Prone to typos Can retrieve many matching records to sift

through, especially if you truncate too much

Name (1XX / 7XX /

8XX) from title page


Names can be editors, illustrators, translators, etc., not just authors



Prolific authors can retrieve long hitlists Series (4XX / 8XX) from whole

publication

Sometimes available on most types of material

Can narrow a search if you have a prolific classic author/title, especially if you combine with a name

Can retrieve many matching records; use as a last resort

Date qualifier (008 Date1) from title page

or verso


Can narrow a search very nicely Some systems allow using date ranges

Use only if date is VERY CLEAR, otherwise others may not have chosen the same date.

Try using a range of dates, if more than one date is on the resource

Material qualifier from resource

Can be very useful to narrow a search if you are looking for a non-book record

Not very useful for finding book records, since most records are still for books

Books


QUICK MATCH CRITERIA

Basis of these guidelines: • "When to Input a New Record" in OCLC Bibliographic Formats and Standards. 3rd ed.

2003. Online document. August 31, 2005. http://www.oclc.org/bibformats/en/input/ • Differences Between, Changes Within. 2004. Chicago: ALCTS.

http://www.ala.org/ala/alcts/alctspubs/catalog/catalog.htm • AACR2 2nd ed. 2002 rev.--21.2 and 21.3 and Ch. 12 rules on changes for individual

areas of information. • LCRI 1.0

These guidelines apply to single part monographs and to comparisons between the same parts of a multipart monograph. Consider changes in most fields between the parts of a multipart monograph to be minor. Remember to take the information that you are trying to match from the appropriate prescribed source of information (see italics in column on left). If no source is listed, the information can come from any source. In this table, t.p., etc = title page, other preliminaries (incl. t.p. verso and covers), and colophon; whole = the whole resource. Field Criteria 000/17 Encoding level

If ELvl is '8', then record is CIP. If the LCCN matches and the record seems at all possible as a match, then consider it a match and skip all the criteria below.

Other signs of CIP: 263 present (projected date of publication) 300 contains "p. cm." If ELvl is not '8' and no other CIP signs are present, then go through all the steps below.

245 $anp Title (title page)

Not OK: if there is a difference in the words in the title proper; but watch out for differences due to cataloger error (e.g., words wrongly abbreviated or capitalized, or initial articles missing, or titles taken from wrong sources, e.g., cover instead of title page, etc.)

245 $h GMD

OK: if the absence or presence of, or difference in the GMD is the only difference in the record; but usually if there is a difference, then other fields are different too; so GMD is a very quick indication of a problem; check 300$a.

245 $b Parallel title /

Subtitle / Subsequent title

(title page)

Not OK: if there is a difference in the words in a parallel title, subtitle or subsequent title (or if they are present in the record and not on the resource); but watch out for differences due to cataloger error (e.g., words wrongly abbreviated or capitalized, or subtitles taken from wrong sources, e.g., cover instead of title page, etc.)

OK: if they are on the resource and not in the record if it is possible that the other cataloger may have missed them.

245 $c Responsibility (title page)

Not OK: if there is a difference in responsibility given on the resource and in the record, or if responsibility that is given in the record cannot be found on the resource.

OK: if responsibility that is given on the resource is not mentioned in the record if it is possible that the other cataloger might have missed it.

1XX/7XX Main entry /Added entries (title page)

Check only if no 245$c (responsibility) is in the record. Not OK: if there is no statement of responsibility in the record and there is a difference

between the person or body in the main entry &/or added entries in the record and on the resource, but watch out for pseudonyms.

250 $a Edition (t.p., etc.)

Not OK: if there is a difference in edition statements involving numbers (1st vs. 2nd), or languages, or geography, or content (Professional ed. vs. Regular ed.); also beware of presence vs. absence of edition statements.

OK: if resource or record says 1st ed. or Pbk. ed., or Book Club ed. and the other has no ed. statement.

Watch out for edition statements that are actually printing information.

Quick match criteria Books


Field Criteria 250 $b Edition

responsibility (t.p., etc.)

Not OK: if there is a difference in responsibility for an edition, or if responsibility for the edition that is given in the record cannot be found on the resource.

OK: if edition responsibility that is given on the resource is not mentioned in the record if it is possible that the other cataloger might have missed it.

260 $b Publisher (t.p., etc.)

Not OK: if there is a true difference in publisher, including a change of name. OK: if there are multiple publishers on the resource and one matches in the record, or if

the same publishers' name is given in either place in a different form. 260 $a Place (t.p., etc.)

Not OK: if there is a difference in country of publication. OK: if place is in the same country, or there are multiple places on the resource and one

matches in the record. 260 $c Date (t.p., etc.)

Not OK: if there is a difference in publication date or if there is a different copyright date when it is used as a publication date, or if there is a different printing date and a difference in content.

OK: if the difference is due to cataloging interpretation. 300 $a Extent (whole)

Not OK: if there is a difference in SMD (e.g., 1 vol. vs. multiple vol., or 1 sheet vs. 2; etc.), or large print or tactile vs. regular print, or a significant difference in paging.

OK if the difference is due to cataloging interpretation or errors (e.g., missing preliminary paging).

300 $b Illustrations (whole)

Not OK: if there is a true difference in illustrations vs. no illustrations. OK if the difference is due to cataloging interpretation (e.g., considering minor

illustrations to be ‘ill.’) 300 $c Size (whole)

Not OK: if there is a difference of more than 2 cm. other than local binding (other elements will usually also be different).

300 $e Accompanying material (whole)

Not OK: if there is accompanying material in the record and none or different accompanying material with the resource or vv. (also check for a note)

OK if the difference in accompanying material is minor (e.g., the number of copies of the same accompanying material is different)

4XX Series (whole)

Not OK: if there is a difference in series statement or series number; but watch out for differences due to cataloger error (e.g., words wrongly abbreviated or capitalized, or initial articles missing)

OK if parallel title, other title info, statement of responsibility, or ISSN are given on the resource and are not in the record, if the other cataloger might have missed them.

546/500 Language note

Not OK: if there is a difference in the language of the resource and the language given in a note in the record.

500 Edition note

Not OK: if there is a difference in an edition note, e.g., condensed, updated, corrected, or if such a note is needed and not present, or present and not applicable.

500 Physical desc. note

Not OK: if there is a difference in a physical description note that affects use or if such a note is needed and not present, or present and not applicable, e.g., cloth vs. plastic pages.

500 Accompanying material note

Not OK: if there is a note about accompanying material in the record and none or different accompanying material with the resource or vv. (also check 300$e)


505 Contents note

Not OK: if there is an actual difference in the contents of a resource.

533 Reproduction

note

Not OK: if there is a difference in a reproduction note, or if such a note is needed and not present, or present and not applicable.

008/23 Form

Watch out for 008 Form of resource codes: 'a', 'b', 'c' (Microform), 'd' (Large print), 'r' (Photocopy); look for confirming indications of a difference in form of the resource.

010 LCCN

OK: if there is a difference in LCCN, or if one is present on the resource and absent from the record, or one is absent from the resource and present in the record.

020 ISBN

OK: if there is a difference in ISBN, or if one is present on the resource and absent from the record, or one is absent from the resource and present in the record.

Books


EDITING/CLONING/CREATING RECORDS CHEATSHEET

EXPLANATION OF TABLE HEADINGS: Field The tag number of each field, and its name (often abbrev. considerably); also the names

of subfields, if applicable R Whether or not the field/subfield is repeatable; N = not repeatable (you may have only

one of these fields in a record or subfields in a field); R = repeatable (you may have more than one of these fields in a record or subfields in a field)

I1 I2 Indicator one and indicator two, when applicable (• = blank; _ = enter a value); explanations for some indicators are given in the Hints column

SubF Subfield codes and their preceding punctuation, if any; explanations for some subfields are given in the Hints column

Src The prescribed source of information for data, as per AACR EOF The appropriate end of field punctuation for the field. MARC21 Introduction says: "In

the discussion of punctuation practices, a mark of punctuation is a period (.), a question mark (?), an exclamation mark (!), or a hyphen (-). The MARC21 print manual lists ending punctuation under 'input conventions' at the end of each MARC field.

Hints The author's suggestions Page no. The page number in this book where you can find further information about the field A: AACR The associated AACR (Anglo American Cataloguing Rules) rule, if appropriate {Related} Related MARC elements; i.e., when entering information in a field / indicator / subfield,

think about entering corresponding information in the related field, etc. EXPLANATION OF TERMS: EDIT: Special hints for when you are editing a record you have copied ORIG: Special hints for when you are creating an original record from scratch DE: Special hints for when you are copying a record that does not quite match, and

changing it so that it is a new record that completely matches, i.e., a 'different edition', aka 'cloning'

M21: Cataloging software based on MARC21, not OCLC OCLC: Specific differences in the OCLC cataloging requirements Note: Not all subfields are mentioned in this cheatsheet; only the most commonly used subfields and indicator values are given with usage details. See the Tags chapter or an official MARC manual for descriptions of other available subfields and indicator values. This is a highly compressed cheatsheet, so also see the Tags chapter for detailed instructions to explain some of the more cryptic messages that you might find here. Remember that if you are upgrading punctuation to ISBD, then you must upgrade the entire record to AACR, and change Leader/18 Desc to 'a'. When you are making a different edition record, remember to check each field very carefully and delete/change anything that does not apply to the new resource that you have. You may be saving some typing by 'cloning' a near-matching record, but you are making a NEW record and must base the description for your new record on the issue that you have in-hand. If the record that you are cloning contains MARC elements that you do not understand, either look them up to be sure that they still apply to your new record, or delete them. Remember this for cloned records: if in doubt, take it out!

Editing/cloning/creating records cheatsheet Books


Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints

Page no. A: AACR {Related}

246 Variant title

note and a.e.

R _ _ Src: any EOF: none Different titles on a work (e.g., spine or cover), or alternatives to words in a

title (e.g., spelling out a number, or ampersand), or portions of a title I1=0 (display but not index), 1 (display and index), 2 (not display, not index),

3 (not display but index); most often 1 or 3

p. 3.2-38 A: 2.7B4-6;

21.30J {245}

I2=# (no display constant), 0 (portion of title), 1 (parallel title), 2-8 (display constants); BK: usually # (no display const.), 4 (cover title), 8 (spine title)

Title proper N $a The variant title; omit initial articles unless they are to be filed under Numb. part R .$n A numbered part when multiple works have the same common title Name part R *$p A named part when multiple works have the same common title; * preceded

by a comma if after $n, a period if not after $n

Rem. title N :$b Usually a subtitle Display text N $i Text to display when I2 display const. (2-8) won't do, e.g., "Container title:" EDIT/DE/ORIG: add if useful DE: delete any 246 that do not apply to the different edition 250 Edition area

N • • Src: title page or title page substitute, other preliminaries (incl. t.p. verso and covers), colophon EOF: period

Edition statements found on the resource and sometimes special responsibility for a specific edition; transcribed as given, but App. B for abbreviations (e.g., ed.) & App. C for numbers (Arabic, and ordinals as, e.g., 1st)

p. 3.2-56 A: 2.2 {500 Ed.}

Edition N $a Look for … "edition" "issue" "version", and words implying different versions Resp. N /$b Responsibility for the edition, not the original work {7XX} EDIT/DE/ORIG: add if on resource DE: delete if not on resource 260 Imprint area

R _ • Src: title page or title page substitute, other preliminaries (incl. t.p. verso and covers), colophon

EOF: period, hyphen, parenthesis, bracket, or angle bracket Publication information found on the resource; transcribed as given, but App.

B for abbreviations; I1=# for all monographs

p. 3.2-66 A: 2.4

Place R $a Give first place, or guess, or "[S.l.]"; add place in your country if not 1st (;$a) {008Ctry} Publisher R :$b Give first publisher, or "[s.n.]"; add other publishers on chief source (:$b) {008GPub} Dates R ,$c Give publication date ($c1990), add date if different ($c1990, c1989); if no

publication date give date ($cc1999); if no publication or date, give printing date ($c2003 printing); if no date, guess ($c[1989?] or $c[19--] or $c[199-], etc.); if printing very different can add ($c1945$g(1995 printing))

{008Dates; 500 Ed.; 008DtSt}

263 Proj. pub. date

Projected publication date, not needed once resource is published CIP: delete the field

300 Physical desc.

R • •

Src: whole resource EOF: period, question mark, exclamation mark, hyphen, or parenthesis, but

period after others if 4XX follows Use terms allowed by the rules but use App. B for abbreviations; description

must match coding given in 000/06 Type of record

p. 3.3-5 A: 2.5 {000Type}

Extent R $a Common terms are: "p." "v." "sheet(s)" "column(s)" "leaves" "# of plates"; if unpaged: [count] or enter "1 v. (unpaged)" ; if large print, add "(large print)"

{008Ills: f}

Other phys. N :$b Usual terms are: "ill." &/or "map(s)" {008 Ills} Size N ;$c Height in cm. to next highest: 22.1 = 23 cm. Accomp. mat. N +$e Enter a valid SMD or if none, a generic term; can add physical desc., e.g.:

+$e1 v. (11 p. : ill. ; 22 cm.) {006; 007 500 AccM}

CIP: add pagination, illustrations (if applicable), dimensions 440 Series

statement + added entry

R • _ Src: series title page, monograph title page, covers, rest of the resource EOF: none The series statement and added entry when indexed exactly as given on a

resource; be consistent in indexing or not indexing; 440 are indexed

p. 3.4-7 A: 2.6

I2=0-9 (characters to skip, e.g., for initial articles) Series title N $a A series title transcribed exactly as given Numb. part R .$n A subseries number, not for series numbering ($v) Name part R *$p A subseries name; * preceded by a comma if after $n, a period if not after $n ISSN N ,$x Rarely known, but can be added if known Series no. N ;$v Use App. B for abbreviations, App. C for numbers (Arabic, e.g., One = 1) EDIT/DE/ORIG: transcribe exactly as given; verify against authority files

Books Editing/cloning/creating records cheatsheet


Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


490 Series

statement, diff. or no added entry

R _ • Src: series title page, monograph title page, covers, rest of the resource EOF: none The series statement exactly as given on a resource when indexed differently

(with an 8XX for the series added entry) or not indexed at all; be consistent in indexing or not indexing; 490 are not indexed, 8XX are indexed instead

p. 3.4-13 A: 2.6

I1=0 (not indexed), 1 (indexed differently—need 8XX) Series title R $a A series statement transcribed exactly as given incl., if necessary: subseries

number, subseries name, subtitles, parallel titles, statements of responsibility

ISSN N ,$x Rarely known, but can be added if known Series no R ;$v Use App. B for abbreviations, App. C for numbers (Arabic, e.g., One = 1) EDIT/DE/ORIG: transcribe exactly as given 5XX NOTE AREA

Src for all notes: any EOF for all notes: period, question mark, exclamation mark, hyphen, but

period after closing bracket or parenthesis, unless otherwise specified; ending punctuation precedes $5

In all 5XX fields, $a contains the note itself, and so will not be listed below, unless other subfields are also needed

p. 3.5-1 A: 2.7

EDIT/DE/ORIG: add useful notes DE: delete notes that do not apply to the new edition 500 Nature, etc.

R • •

Make a note about the nature, scope, or artistic form of the resource unless it is already obvious, e.g., "Arabic reader."

p. 3.5-17 A: 2.7B1

546 Language

R • • Make a language note unless the language is apparent from the rest of the description, e.g., add if multiple languages are present or if a resource is a translation; used to use 500, change it to 546; if 546 is present, 041 should also be present

p. 3.5-73 A: 2.7B2 {008Lang;

041} 041 Language

codes

R _ • Src: n/a EOF: none Enter codes for languages when the 008Lang is not enough, i.e., when mult.

languages are involved in a resource; if 546 is present, 041 should be added except 'closed captioned'; can have an 041 without a 546; repeat subfields; code in $a must match code in 008Lang unless 008 Lang = 'mul' or blank

p. 3.0-98 {008Lang;

546; 500; 765/767}

I1=0—no translation; I1=1—translation involved Code of text R $a Codes for multiple languages associated with a resource, except SR ($d) Code of summ R $b Codes for language(s) of summaries, abstracts, or subtitles Code of SR R $d Codes for language(s) of sung or spoken content of a sound recording Code of libret R $e Codes for language(s) of librettos, e.g., lyrics in multiple languages Code of TOC R $f Codes for language(s) of tables of contents in multiple languages Code of accm R $g Codes for language(s) of accompanying material Code of transl R $h Codes for language(s) of the original work 500 Source of title

proper

R • • Make a note about the source of the title proper, if it is not from the chief source of information, e.g., "Title from cover."

p. 3.5-28 A: 2.7B3 {245}

500 Variant /

parallel / other titles

R • • Use this note for general wording about variant titles, parallel titles, and/or other title information, e.g., "Subtitle varies on spine."

Use 246 instead for wording that includes an actual variant title, parallel title and/or other title information, e.g., "Title on cover: …"

p. 3.5-21+34 A: 2.7B4-5 {246}

500 Statement of

resp.

R • • Make a note for: persons or bodies responsible for the work, but not given in the 245$c, e.g., "Additional authors: ..."; persons or bodies not responsible for, but connected with the work, e.g., "Based on the poem by ..."; persons or bodies connected with previous editions of the work, e.g., "Previous edition entered under: ..."

p. 3.5-29 A: 2.7B6 {245$c;7XX}

500 Edition &

history / Repub.

R • •

Make a note about: edition info. that does not fit in a 250, e.g., "Reprinted with corrections."; the bibliographic history of a work, e.g., "Previous ed.: …"; related work information, e.g., "Sequel to: …"; republication information (different publisher, same text), e.g., "Originally published: …"

p. 3.5-9 A: 2.7B7 {250; 7XX } {008DtSt: r}

500 Publication,

etc.

R • • Make a note about publication details not given in 260, e.g., "Privately printed."

p. 3.5-25 A: 2.7B9 {260}

500 Physical

description

R • • Make a note about physical description details that could not be given in 300, e.g., "Printed on hand-made paper."

p. 3.5-22 A: 2.7B10 {300}

Editing/cloning/creating records cheatsheet Books


Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


500 Accomp.

material

R • • Make a note instead of 300$e to provide more details about accompanying material, e.g., its location, different titles, etc., "Accompanied by toothbrush in back pocket."

p. 3.5-7 A: 2.7B11 {006; 300$e}

500 Series

R • • Make a note about series details that could not be given in 4XX, e.g., "Also issued without a series statement."

p. 3.5-27 A: 2.7B12 {4XX}

502 Dissertation

R • • For a formal thesis statement, enter "Thesis", the abbreviation for the degree sought, a dash, the institution, and finally the date the degree was granted, e.g., "Thesis (Ph.D)--University of Toronto, 1974."

p. 3.5-37 A: 2.7B13

521 Target

audience

R _ •

Make a note for brief information about the intended audience for a work; this note should only be added if the information is stated on the item

I1=# (Audience), 0-4 (other display constants), 8 (no display constant)

p. 3.5-57 A: 2.7B14 {008Audn}

Note N $a E.g., "For nurses and health care practitioners." Source N $b Name or abbreviation of the source of the note if it is not from item 530 Add. forms

R • •

Make a note, if desired, for additional physical forms in which the work has been issued

p. 3.5-61 A: 2.7B16

Note N $a The other format of the resource, e.g., "Issued also on microfiche." Source N ;$b Where the other format is available from Conditions N ;$c Cost, etc. of the other format Order # N ;$d Stock no., etc. of the other format URI R $u Link to an Internet site {856} 520 Summary

R _ •

Make a note for a brief objective summary of the content of the work, preferably with good keywords (for indexing to provide additional access)

p. 3.5-54 A: 2.7B17

I1=# ("Summary:"), 0-3 (other display constants), 8 (no display constant) Note N $a Brief summary note Expansion N $b Longer summary note, if necessary URI R $u Link to an Internet site EDIT/DE/ORIG: check for typos 504 Bibliography

R • •

Make this note in the standard LC format: "Includes bibliographical references"—if references are scattered "Includes bibliographical references (p. )"— if references are grouped

p. 3.5-38 A: 2.7B18 {008Cont: b}

500 Index

R • • Combine this note with 504 if one is present Either "Includes index." or "Includes indexes."

p. 3.5-13 A: 2.7B18

500 Unformatted

contents

R • •

Use this note for a vague note on contents, e.g., "Contains excerpts of the performer's song lyrics."

p. 3.5-32 A: 2.7B18

505 Formatted

contents

R _ _ List the contents of an item, e.g., titles of chapters, stories, poems or songs, either fully or in part; keyword indexed, so check spelling and coding

I1=0 ("Contents:"), 1 ("Incomplete contents:"), 2 ("Partial contents:"), 8 (no display constant); I2=# (all text in $a), 0 ($r$t$g present)

p. 3.5-39 A: 2.7B18

Note N $a Data indexed in Title Keyword; a basic 505 ($a only) contains all of the note when no names are present in the field and when a system does not index 505$t in the Title Browse index; an enhanced 505 ($t $r $g) is used when the field contains names and/or when a system indexes 505$t in the Title Browse index

Misc. info. R $g Data that is not to be indexed Resp. R /$r Names, indexed in Name Keyword Title R --$t Titles, indexed in Title Keyword and, in some systems, Title Browse URI R $u Link to an Internet site EDIT: Change from basic ($a) to enhanced ($t$r$g) if names are included 500 Numbers

R • • Use this note for numbers you don't know what else to do with E.g., "10003."

p. 3.5-19 A: 2.7B19 {010/020/…}

590 Copy describ.

R • •

Contains details about a particular copy of a resource; do NOT use in a shared system, use an item record note instead

p. 3.5-83 A: 2.7B20

EDIT/DE: delete 590 found in a record 506 Restrictions

R • • Legal, physical, etc. restrictions on access to resources that apply to every copy produced, usually assigned by the publisher/creator of the resource

p. 3.5-44 A: 2.7B20

Note N $a The restrictions imposed, e.g., "Classified." {540} Jurisdiction R ;$b The agent imposing the restrictions, e.g., "Secretary of the Treasury."

Books Editing/cloning/creating records cheatsheet


Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


540 Terms govern.

use/reprod.

R • • Special local restrictions or permissions applied to specific copies of a resource, sometimes assigned by the publisher, or a library, etc.

p. 3.5-68 A: 2.7B20 {506}

Note N $a The local restriction or permission, e.g., "Public performance permitted." Jurisdiction R ;$b The agent imposing the restriction or granting permission, e.g., "[Publisher]" Institution N $5 Code for the institution to which the special restrictions or permissions apply 586 Awards

R _ • EOF: none Names of award(s) won by the resource, e.g., Caldecott, Dove, Grammy,

Emmy, etc.; for consistency either always add or always not add I1=# ("Awards:"), 8 (no display constant)

p. 3.5-82

6XX Subject

headings (600, 610,

611, 630, 650, 651, 655)

R _ _ Src: any EOF: period, question mark, exclamation mark, hyphen, or parenthesis—ending punctuation precedes $2, $3, $4

I1= type of name, or non-filing, or blank; I2 = heading source; most common: 0=Library of Congress SH (preferred) 1=LC Annotated Children's SH 4=Local subject headings 7=Source is provided in $2 Consider adding new 655 (genre/form headings)—patrons like them

p. 3.6-1 A: 22-25

Heading N $a The name, uniform title or subject; additional subfields may be added to differentiate between names, titles, or subjects

EDIT/DE/ORIG: add useful subject headings; establish names—choice of name/form of name/coding; verify against authority files

DE: delete subject headings that do not apply to the new edition 7XX Added entries (700, 710,

711, 730)

R _ _ Src: any EOF: period, question mark, exclamation mark, hyphen, or parenthesis, but ending punctuation precedes $3, $4, $5

I1= type of name or non-filing; I2 = 2 (analytic—for a part), # (not analytic) Establish headings—choice of name/form of name/coding; verify against

authority files

p. 3.7-7 A: 21-25 {245$c;

500 Resp}

Heading N $a The name or uniform title; additional subfields may be added to differentiate between names or titles

EDIT/DE/ORIG: add useful added entries, e.g.: prominent corporate bodies; related works; analytics; people or bodies from 245$c—joint authors, writers, collaborators, editors, compilers, sometimes translators, illustrators, etc.; other people or bodies if needed

DE: delete added entries that do not apply to the new edition 8XX Series added

entries (800, 810,

811, 830)

R _ •

Src: any EOF: period, question mark, exclamation mark, hyphen, or parenthesis, but ending punctuation precedes $4

I1= type of name or non-filing; I2 = blank or non-filing The series added entry for the series statement provided in 490 when it is to be

indexed differently; establish headings—choice of name/form of name/coding; verify against authority files

p. 3.8-1 A: 21.30L


DE: delete series added entries that do not apply to the new edition 006 Add. material

char.

R

Src: n/a EOF: none It is useful to add codes for accompanying material

p. 3.0-10 {300$e;

500 AccM}007 Phys. desc.

fixed field

R

Src: n/a EOF: none Code for the physical form of non-print accompanying material; it is not

necessary to code for print materials

p. 3.0-22 {245$h;

300$a$e; 500 AccM}

008 Fixed field

N

Src: n/a EOF: none Add codes for all 008 positions from the 008 Books codes list

p. 3.0-40

M21 order (SS = system supplied) Entrd: SS DtSt: Dates: Ctry: Ills: Audn: Form: Cont: GPub: Conf: Fest: Indx: M/E: # LitF: Biog: Lang: MRec: # Srce: d

OCLC order (italics = 000 codes; SS = system supplied): OCLC: SS Rec stat: n Entered: SS Replaced: SS Used: SS Type: a ELvl: Srce: d Audn: Ctrl: # Lang: BLvl: m Form: Conf: Biog: MRec: # Ctry: Cont: GPub: LitF: Indx: Desc: Ills: Fest: DtSt: Dates:

Electronic resources







These guidelines apply to single part monographs and to comparisons between the same parts of a multipart monograph. Consider changes in most fields between the parts of a multipart monograph to be minor. Remember to take the information that you are trying to match from the appropriate prescribed source of information (see italics in column on left). If no source is listed, the information can come from any source. In this table, resource = title screen(s), main menus, program statements, initial displays of info, home page, file headers, encoded metadata; physical carrier or labels; container; prefer data from a unifying element. If an electronic resource is primarily text or one of the other types of materials, then you must also check the Quick Match Criteria table for specific elements that are appropriate for that type of material. Field Criteria 028/500 Publisher

number

NOT ok: if numbers are different and any sign of another difference. OK: if there is absolutely no other difference and you suspect that the publisher has

assigned a new number because of a change in price, for example. 245 $anp Title (resource)

NOT ok: if there is a difference in the words in the title proper; but watch out for differences due to cataloger error (e.g., words wrongly abbreviated or capitalized, or initial articles missing, or titles taken from wrong sources, e.g., container instead of title frames, etc.)

245 $h GMD



Parallel title / Subsequent title

(resource)

NOT ok: if there is a difference in the words in a parallel title, subtitle or subsequent title (or if they are present in the record and not on the resource); but watch out for differences due to cataloger error (e.g., words wrongly abbreviated or capitalized, or subtitles taken from wrong sources, e.g., container instead of title frames, etc.)


245 $c Responsibility (resource)

NOT ok: if there is a difference in responsibility given on the resource and in the record, or if responsibility that is given in the record cannot be found on the resource.


1XX/7XX Main entry /Added entries (resource)

Check only if no 245$c (responsibility) is in the record. NOT ok: if there is no statement of responsibility in the record and there is a difference


250 $a Edition (resource)

NOT ok: if there is a difference in edition statements involving numbers (1st vs. 2nd), or languages, or geography, or content (Longer version. vs. Shorter version.); also beware of presence vs. absence of edition statements.

OK: if resource or record says 1st ed. and the other has no ed. statement.

Electronic resources Quick match criteria


Field Criteria 250 $b Edition

responsibility (resource)

NOT ok: if there is a difference in responsibility for an edition, or if responsibility for the edition that is given in the record cannot be found on the resource.


260 $b Publisher (resource)

NOT ok: if there is a true difference in publisher, including a change of name. OK: if there are multiple publishers on the resource and one matches in the record, or if the

same publishers' name is given in either place in a different form. 260 $a Place (resource)

NOT ok: if there is a difference in country of publication. OK: if place is in the same country, or there are multiple places on the resource and one

matches in the record. 260 $c Date (resource)

NOT ok: if there is a difference in publication date or if there is a different copyright date when it is used as a publication date.

OK: if the difference is due to cataloging interpretation. 300 $a Extent

NOT ok: if there is a difference in SMD (e.g., CD-ROM vs. computer disk) NOT ok: if there is a difference in number of SMD (e.g., 1 computer optical disc vs. 2

computer optical discs). OK if the difference is due to cataloging interpretation or errors (e.g., CD-ROM instead of

computer optical disc). 300 $b Sound Color Etc.

NOT ok: if there is a difference between sound and silent, be careful of interpretation NOT ok: if there is a difference between color vs. black & white, be careful of

interpretation. NOT ok: if there is a difference in other technical details, be careful of interpretation.

300 $c Size

NOT ok: if there is a difference in size of disc or other carrier (e.g., 4 3/4 in. vs. 1/2 in.)




4XX Series (resource)

NOT ok: if there is a difference in series statement or series number; but watch out for differences due to cataloger error (e.g., words wrongly abbreviated or capitalized, or initial articles missing)


538 System details

NOT ok: if there is a true difference in the system requirements, e.g., computer requirements, peripheral requirements, or software programming language.

OK if the difference is due to cataloging interpretation 546/500 Language note

NOT ok: if there is a difference in the language of the resource and the language given in a note in the record.

500 Edition note

NOT ok: if there is a difference in an edition note, e.g., condensed, updated, corrected, or if such a note is needed and not present, or present and not applicable; also check 538.


NOT ok: if there is a difference in a physical description note that affects use or if such a note is needed and not present, or present and not applicable; also check 538 for this information.




505/500 Contents note

NOT ok: if there is an actual difference in the contents of a resource. This information might be in a 500 unformatted contents note instead of a 505.

020 ISBN


If an electronic resource is primarily text or one of the other types of materials, then you must also check the Quick Match Criteria table for specific elements that are appropriate for that type of material.

Editing/cloning/creating records cheatsheet Electronic resources


Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


028 Publisher

number

R _ _

Src: any EOF: none Supposed to identify a particular video, sound recording, score, etc. I1=5 (other number)

p. 3.0-88 A: 6.7B19

I2=0 (not display, not index), 1 (display and index), 2 (display but not index), 3 (not display but index)

Publisher no. N $a Enter exactly as given, including spaces and punctuation Source. N $b Brand or trade name associated with the number, matches 260$b {260$b} EDIT/DE/ORIG: add if on resource; watch out for indicators EDIT: do not delete 028 if the number is not on your resource DE: delete 028 if the number is not on your resource 035 Old Ctrl No.

R • •

Src: n/a EOF: none Contains the previous 001 for a copied record

p. 3.0-91 {001}

Number N $a (MARC21 code) + number, e.g., 035$a(OCoLC)12345678 EDIT: keep 035, esp. OCLC numbers—beginning with "(OCoLC)" or "ocm" DE: delete 035 since it applies to the other record 040 Cat'g source

N • •

Src: n/a EOF: none MARC21 Organization codes or names of agencies (DLC = LC)

p. 3.0-94

Cat'g agency N $a Agency that did the cataloging {008Srce} Input agncy N $c Agency that input the record into MARC (usually the same as $a) Modif agncy R $d Agency that has changed a record {000RecSt} EDIT—M21: add your code in $d; OCLC: enters your OCLC code DE—M21: change codes in $a$c to yours; OCLC: enters your OCLC code ORIG/DE—M21: enter your code in $a$c; OCLC: enters your OCLC code 049/852/etc. Holdings

R • •

Src: n/a EOF: none Enter holdings information in whatever field your local system requires

p. 3.0-103

050 / 082 Classification

R _ _ Src: n/a EOF: none Contains an LC (050) or DDC (082) classification number

p. 3.0-104

number EDIT: retain all class numbers, even if you do not use any of the schemes DE: retain all class numbers, even if you do not use any of the schemes;

change I2 to 4 (not assigned by LC); adjust date in 050 $b; delete if unsure

ORIG—OCLC: add either 090/050 or 092/082, etc., for other catalogers 090 / 092 Local class.

R • • Src: n/a EOF: none Add a local call number in an appropriate field

p. 3.0-106

number ORIG—OCLC: add either 090/050 or 092/082, etc., for other catalogers 245 Title area

N _ _

Src: the resource itself (title screen, main menu, program statement, initial display of info., home page, file header, or encoded metadata), or its physical carrier & labels, or documentation, accomp. mat., or container—whichever has a coll. title and the most complete info.

EOF: period, even if other punc is present, unless last word has its own period I1=0 (title is indexed as main entry, so needs no added entry), 1 (title is not

indexed as main entry, so needs an added entry); 1XX=1, no 1XX=0

p. 3.2-5 A: 9.1 {500 Srce

always}

I2=0-9 (non-filing characters to skip, e.g., for initial articles) Title proper N $a The title from the most complete source of information {246} Numb. part R .$n A numbered part when multiple works have the same common title Name part R *$p A named part when multiple works have the same common title; * preceded

by a comma if after $n, a period if not after $n {246}

GMD N $h[ ] What the material IS; for electronic resources: [electronic resource] {000Type; 008Form}

Parallel title N =$b The same title in another language, from the chief source {246} Other title N :$b Usually a subtitle (clarifies/narrows a title), from the chief source {246} Next title N ;$b Subsequent title(s) by the same author, from the chief source {740} Statement of

resp. N /$c A statement from the chief source saying who is responsible for the

intellectual /artistic content of the work; for all electronic resources, e.g.: writers, programmers, principal investigators, graphic artists, composers, animators, developers, and designers; for electronic resources of a specific type (e.g., text or video), add statements that are appropriate for that type; separate statements for different functions with space-semicolon-space

{1XX; 500; 508; 511; 7XX}

EDIT/DE/ORIG: check inds; field contents must match resource exactly

Electronic resources Editing/cloning/creating records cheatsheet


Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


1XX Main entry (100, 110,

111, 130)

N _ •

Src: video title screens, physical carrier and label(s) EOF: period, question mark, exclamation mark, hyphen, or closing

parenthesis, but ending punctuation precedes $4 The established heading for a person or corporate body solely or primarily

responsible for a work, or the first named person or body in a list of 3 or less, or if none of these, then a uniform title

p. 3.1.1 A: 21-25 {245 I1, $c}

I1= type of name or non-filing; I2 = blank Heading N $a The name or uniform title; additional subfields may be added to differentiate

between names or titles

EDIT/DE/ORIG: main vs. added entries—main entries for videos: are principal performers of music videos, otherwise most videos have title main entries; establish headings—choice of name/form of name/coding; verify against authority files

240 Uniform title

N _ 0

Src: any EOF: none I1=0 (don't display), 1 (display); I2=0-9 (characters to skip, e.g., for initial

articles—always 0 and omit initial articles)

p. 3.2-1 A: 25

Title N $a The uniform title, when a personal, corporate or conference main entry (1XX) is present; additional subfields may be added to differentiate between titles

EDIT/DE/ORIG: add if needed; verify against authority files 246 Variant title

note and a.e.

R _ _ Src: any EOF: none Different titles on a work (e.g., container), or alternatives to words in a title

(e.g., spelling out a number, or ampersand), or portions of a title I1=0 (display but not index), 1 (display and index), 2 (not display, not index),


p. 3.2-38 A: 9.7B4-6;

21.30J {245}

I2=# (no display constant), 0 (portion of title), 1 (parallel title), 2-8 (display constants); VD: usually # (no display const.)




N • • Src: the resource itself (title screen, main menu, program statement, initial display of info., home page, file header, or encoded metadata) or its physical carrier & labels—whichever has a coll. title and the most complete info.

EOF: period Edition statements found on the resource and sometimes special responsibility

for a specific edition; transcribed as given, but App. B for abbreviations (e.g., ed.) & App. C for numbers (Arabic, and ordinals as, e.g., 1st)

p. 3.2-56 A: 9.2 {500 Ed. if

source dif. than title}

Edition N $a Look for … "edition", "issue", "version", "release", "level", "update" or any other words implying different versions, e.g., "Version 2.1." or "Release 1.0." or "Windows 95 ed." or "[Version] 4.0b."

Resp. N /$b Responsibility for the edition, not the original work {7XX} EDIT/DE/ORIG: add if on resource DE: delete if not on resource 260 Imprint area

R _ • Src: the resource itself (title screen, main menu, program statement, initial display of info., home page, file header, or encoded metadata) or its physical carrier & labels—whichever has a coll. title and the most complete info.



p. 3.2-66 A: 9.4

Place R $a Give first place, or guess, or "[S.l.]"; add place in your country if not 1st (;$a) {008Ctry} Publisher R :$b Give first publisher, or "[s.n.]"; add other publishers on chief source (:$b) {008GPub;

028$b} Dates R ,$c Give publication date ($c1990), add date if different ($c1990, c1989); if no

publication date give date ($cc1999); if no date, guess ($c[1989?] or $c[19--] or $c[199-], etc.); date must be of ER, not contents

{008Dates; 008DtSt}



Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


300 Physical desc.

R • •

Src: any source EOF: period, question mark, exclamation mark, hyphen, or parenthesis, but


must match coding given in 000/06 Type of record Give physical details for a remote access ER in a Physical Description Note.

p. 3.3-10 A: 9.5 {000Type;

007/00}

Extent R $a Enter Arabic number and SMD from 9.5B1 (e.g., computer optical disc) or a commonly known term (e.g., CD-ROM or DVD-ROM)

{007/01}

Other phys. N :$b Enter 'sd.' and/or 'col.' if appropriate {007/05; 007/03}

Size N ;$c Enter disc size in inches, e.g., CD/DVD = 4 3/4 in. {007/04} Accomp. mat. N +$e Enter a valid SMD or if none, a generic term; can add physical desc., e.g.:

+$e1 v. (11 p. : ill. ; 22 cm.) {006; 007 500 AccM}

440 Series


R • _ Src: the resource itself (title screen, main menu, program statement, initial display of info., home page, file header, or encoded metadata) or its physical carrier & labels—whichever has a coll. title and the most complete info.

EOF: none The series statement and added entry when indexed exactly as given on a


p. 3.4-7 A: 9.6

I2=0-9 (characters to skip, e.g., for initial articles) Series title N $a A series title transcribed exactly as given Numb. part R .$n A subseries number, not for series numbering ($v) Name part R *$p A subseries name; * preceded by a comma if after $n, a period if not after $n ISSN N ,$x Rarely known, but can be added if known Series no. N ;$v Use App. B for abbreviations, App. C for numbers (Arabic, e.g., One = 1) EDIT/DE/ORIG: transcribe exactly as given; verify against authority files 490 Series


R _ • Src: the resource itself (title screen, main menu, program statement, initial display of info., home page, file header, or encoded metadata) or its physical carrier & labels—whichever has a coll. title and the most complete info.

EOF: none A series statement exactly as given on a resource when indexed differently

(need an 8XX for the series added entry) or not indexed at all; be consistent in indexing or not indexing; 490 are not indexed, 8XX are indexed instead

p. 3.4-13 A: 9.6







p. 3.5-1 A: 9.7

EDIT/DE/ORIG: add useful notes DE: delete notes that do not apply to the new edition 500 Nature, scope 516 Type of file

R • •

Make a note about the nature or scope of the resource unless it is already obvious, e.g., "Text", "Computer program", "Computer game", "Streaming video"; use either a 516 or a 500, or combine this information in a 520

p. 3.5-17 A: 9.7B1 {008File} p. 3.5-51

538 System details

R • •

Make a note about specific system requirements affecting access; begin with the term "System requirements:", then take wording from the resource, separate different requirements with regular semicolons; make separate 538 for different platforms, e.g., "System requirements for Windows:" and "System requirements for Macintosh:"

For remote access ER, give the mode of access beginning with the term "Mode of access:" ; add an 856$u to provide an online link to the resource

p. 3.5-65 A: 9.7B1 {856}



Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


546 Language

R • • Make a language note unless the language is apparent from the rest of the description, e.g., add if multiple languages are present or if a resource is a translation; we used to use 500, change it to 546; if 546 is present, 041 should be added; give programming languages in 538

p. 3.5-74 A: 9.7B2 {008Lang;

041} 041 Language

codes

R _ • Src: n/a EOF: none Enter codes for languages when the 008Lang is not enough, i.e., when

multiple languages are involved in a resource; if 546 is present, 041 should be added except 'closed captioned'; can have an 041 without a 546; repeat subfields; code in $a must match code in 008Lang unless 008 Lang = 'mul' or blank

p. 3.0-98 {008Lang;

546; 500; 765/767}


proper

R • • Always make a note about the source of the title proper, e.g., "Title from disc surface." or "Title from title screen (viewed on Dec. 17, 2003)."

Add the source of the edition statement, but only if it is not the same as the title proper, e.g., "Title from disc surface; ed. statement from title screen."

Always add the date of viewing for a remove access ER, e.g., "Title from home page (viewed on Sept. 12, 2003)."

p. 3.5-28 A: 9.7B3 A: 9.7B7 A: 9.7B22

500 Variant /


R • • Use this note for general wording about variant titles, parallel titles, and/or other title information, e.g., "Subtitle varies on container."

Use 246 instead for wording that includes an actual variant title, parallel title and/or other title information, e.g., "Title on container: …"

p. 3.5-21+34 A: 9.7B4-5 {246}

500 Statement of

resp.

R _ •

Make a note for: persons or bodies responsible for the work, but not given in the 245$c, e.g., "Additional contributors to program: ..."; persons or bodies not responsible for, but connected with the work, e.g., "Web site hosted by ..."; persons or bodies connected with previous editions of the work, e.g., "Program initially developed by ..."

p. 3.5-29 A: 9.7B6 {505; 7XX}

500 Edition &

history / Repub.

R • •

Make a note about: the edition being described, or the bibliographic history of the work, e.g., "Updated version of ..."; minor changes (e.g., 9.2B4), if important, e.g., "Monochrome version recoded for color."; other related works, e.g., "Based on: [Title, if no responsibility]"; dates and details given below, if important:

- dates covered by contents of the file, e.g., "Sermons, 1970-1900." - dates when data were collected, e.g., "Data collected May-Aug. 1981. - dates of accompanying material, if different from file, e.g., "Includes

supplementary file dated 1981."

p. 3.5-10 A: 9.7B7 {250; 7XX }

500 Type & extent

R • • Make a note of additional information about the type and size of the electronic resource if not given elsewhere, e.g., "File is in Postscript format."

p. 3.5-31 A: 9.7B8

500 Publication,

etc.

R • • Make a note about publication details not given in 260, e.g., "Solely distributed by ..." or "User's manual distributed by ..."

p. 3.5-25 A: 9.7B9 {260}

500 Physical

description

R • • Make a note about physical description details that could not be given in 300, e.g., "Container: 30 x 35 x 12 cm."; could be used for pages of text and ill. info. for a remote access ER

p. 3.5-22 A: 9.7B10 {300}

500 Accomp.

material

R • • Make a note instead of 300$e to provide more details about accompanying material, e.g., its location, different titles, etc., e.g., "Accompanied by disc containing trial versions of seven programs."; use 556 instead for documentation

p. 3.5-7 A: 9.7B11 {006; 300$e;

556} 556 Info. re. doc.

R • • Make a note about documentation for the resource, e.g., "User documentation available as a Word file."

p. 3.5-80 A: 9.7B11 {500AccM}

500 Series


p. 3.5-27 A: 9.7B12 {4XX}



Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


502 Dissertation


p. 3.5-37 A: 9.7B13

521 Target

audience

R _ •



p. 3.5-57 A: 9.7B14 {008Audn}

Note N $a E.g., "High school students." Source N $b Name or abbreviation of the source of the note if it is not from item 530 Add. forms

R • •


p. 3.5-61 A: 9.7B16

Note N $a The other format of the resource, e.g., "Issued also on CD-ROM." {776} Source N ;$b Where the other format is available from Conditions N ;$c Cost, etc. of the other format Order # N ;$d Stock no., etc. of the other format URI R $u Link to an Internet site {856} 520 Summary

R _ •


p. 3.5-54 A: 9.7B17

I1=# ("Summary:"), 0-3 (other display constants), 8 (no display constant) Note N $a Brief summary note Expansion N $b Longer summary note, if necessary URI R $u Link to an Internet site EDIT/DE/ORIG: check for typos 500 Unformatted

contents

R • •

Use this note for a vague note on contents, e.g., "Includes printable workbook pages and flashcards."

p. 3.5-32 A: 9.7B18

505 Formatted

contents



p. 3.5-39 A: 9.7B18

Note N $a Data indexed in Title Keyword; a basic 505 ($a only) contains all of the note when no names are present in the field and when a system does not index 505$t in the Title Browse index; an enhanced 505 ($t $r $g)is used when the field contains names and/or when a system indexes 505$t in the Title Browse index

Misc. info. R $g Data that is not to be indexed Resp. R /$r Names, indexed in Name Keyword Title R --$t Titles, indexed in Title Keyword and, in some systems, Title Browse URI R $u Link to an Internet site {856} EDIT: Change from basic ($a) to enhanced ($t$r$g) if names are included 500 Numbers

R • • Use this note for numbers you don't know what else to do with (e.g., "10003.") p. 3.5-19 A: 9.7B19

590 Copy describ.

R • •


p. 3.5-83 A: 9.7B20



p. 3.5-44 A: 9.7B20 {540}

Note N $a The restrictions imposed, e.g., "For private home use only." Jurisdiction R ;$b The agent imposing the restrictions, e.g., "[Publisher.]" 540 Terms govern.

use/reprod.


p. 3.5-68 A: 9.7B20 {506}


R _ • EOF: none Use this note for the names of award(s) won by the resource that patrons

might use for keyword searching, e.g., Caldecott, Dove, Grammy, Emmy, etc.; for consistency either always add or always not add

I1=# ("Awards:"), 8 (no display constant)

p. 3.5-82



Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


6XX Subject

headings (600, 610,

611, 630, 650, 651, 655)


I1= type of name, or non-filing, or blank; I2 = heading source; most common: 0=Library of Congress SH (preferred) 1=LC Annotated Children's SH 4=Local subject headings 7=Source is provided in $2 Consider adding new 655 (genre/form headings)—patrons like them;

p. 3.6-1 A: 22-25




711, 730)



authority files

p. 3.7-7 A: 21-25 {245$c;

500 Resp}


EDIT/DE/ORIG: add useful added entries, e.g.: prominent corporate bodies; related works; analytics; people or bodies from 245$c; other people or bodies if needed


entries (800, 810,

811, 830)

R _ •

Src: see 490 EOF: period, question mark, exclamation mark, hyphen, or parenthesis, but ending punctuation precedes $4



p. 3.8-1 A: 21.30L


DE: delete series added entries that do not apply to the new edition 856 Electronic loc.

R

Src: n/a EOF: none Add for a remote access ER, if 538$u is not used to provide a link to a site

p. 3.8-14 {538}

006 Add. material

char.

R

Src: n/a EOF: none Add an ER 006 when 000Type is not 'm', do not add if 000Type is 'm'; always

add an SE 006 for serial ER; useful to add for accomp. non-print material

p. 3.0-10 {300$e;


fixed field

R

Src: n/a EOF: none Always add an ER 007 for all ER; also useful to add for accompanying non-

print material CD: co#_g_________ ; remote: cr#_n_________

p. 3.0-22 {245$h;

300$a$e; 500 AccM}

008 Fixed field

N

EOF: none Src: n/a Add codes for all 008 positions from the 008 Videos codes list

p. 3.0-49

M21 order (SS = system supplied) Entrd: SS DtSt: Dates: Ctry: Audn: File: GPub: Lang: MRec: # Srce: d

OCLC order (italics = 000 codes; SS = system supplied): OCLC: SS Rec stat: n Entered: SS Replaced: SS Used: SS Type: m ELvl: Srce: d Audn: Ctrl: # Lang: BLvl: m File: GPub: MRec: # Ctry: Desc: DtSt: Dates: ,

Sound recordings


CATALOGING TOOLS

In addition to the standard cataloging tools outlined in "Chapter Two: Cataloging Steps" (AACR, LCRI, etc.), you will find the following tools particularly useful when cataloging sound recordings: Cataloging rules: MCB Music Cataloging Bulletin. 1970-. Canton, Mass.: Music Library Association.

Monthly. MCRI Music Cataloging Decisions As Issued by the Music Section, Special Materials

Cataloging Division, Library Of Congress in the Music Cataloging Bulletin Through December 1991. 1992. Canton, Mass.: Music Library Association.

General cataloging: CAM Olson, Nancy B. 1998. Cataloging of Audiovisual Materials and Other Special

Materials. 4th ed. DeKalb, IL: Minnesota Scholarly Press. Explanations and examples give practical answers to the questions that we

encounter when dealing with actual resources. CM Smiraglia, Richard. Cataloging Music: A Manual for Use with AACR2. 1986.

2nd ed. Lake Crystal, Minn.: Soldier Creek Press. Smiraglia, Richard. Music Cataloging: The Bibliographic Control of Printed and

Recorded Music in Libraries. 1989. Englewood, Colo.: Libraries Unlimited. Smiraglia, Richard. Describing Music Materials: A Manual for Descriptive

Cataloging of Printed and Recorded Music, Music Videos, and Archival Music Collections: For Use with AACR2 and APPM. 1997. Lake Crystal, Minn.: Soldier Creek Press.

Weitz, Jay. Cataloger's judgment: music cataloging questions and answers from

the Music OCLC User's Group Newsletter. 2004. Westport.: Libraries Unlimited. Hartsock, Ralph. Notes for Music Catalogers: Examples Illustrating AACR2 in

the Online Bibliographic Record. 1994. Lake Crystal, Minn.: Soldier Creek Press.

Includes extensive examples of notes used in cataloging music scores and sound

recordings, gleaned from LC MARC records from 1984-1989, AACR examples, and OCLC records from 1990-1991.

OLAC homepage. Website. August 7, 2003.

http://ublib.buffalo.edu/libraries/units/cts/olac/ The newsletters put out by the Online Audiovisual Catalogers Group always

include good advice on cataloging both old and new formats of AV materials. MOUG homepage. Website. October 14, 2003.

http://www.musicoclcusers.org/index.html

Sound recordings Cataloging tools


Jay Weitz's Q&A Newsletter put out by the Music OCLC Users Group provides good advice on cataloging music sound recordings.

Music Library Association Listserv archives http://listserv.indiana.edu/archives/mla-l.html You will have to join the listserv, but can set it to no mail and then just search the

archives, if that is what you would prefer. MARC coding: MCAT Weitz, Jay. Music Coding and Tagging: MARC21 Content Designation for

Scores and Sound Recordings. 2001. 2nd ed. Belle Plaine, Minn.: Soldier Creek Press.

A useful tool for the coding of MARC records for musical scores and sound

recordings, both music and non-music, it includes many examples. Uniform titles: Types of Compositions for Use in Music Uniform Titles: A Manual for Use with

AACR2 Chapter 25. 2nd Updated Edition, June 1997, revised 2002. Webpage. Viewed October 14, 2003.

http://www.library.yale.edu/cataloging/music/types.htm Very useful for deciding on what constitutes the name of a "type of musical

composition". Headings: Music Subject Headings: Compiled from Library of Congress Subject Headings.

2nd ed. 1998. Lake Crystal, Minn.: Soldier Creek Press. Useful Reference Sources: Phonolog Reports. 1948- Los Angeles: Phonolog Publishing Division. Billboard ... International Buyer's Guide. 1963- New York : Billboard

Publications. Schwann Record and Tape Guide. 1949-1990. Boston : Schwann Record

Catalogs. Rolling Stone Encyclopedia of Rock & Roll. (most current edition)

New Grove Dictionary of Jazz. (most current edition) New Grove Dictionary of Music and Musicians. (most current edition) Allmusic. Webpage. Viewed March 22, 2005 http://www.allmusic.com/ The British Library Sound Archive. Record company information. Webpage.

Viewed November 5, 2003 http://www.bl.uk/collections/sound-archive/record.html

Sound recordings


CHIEF SOURCE OF INFORMATION

A 6.0B1 SR The first place to look for bibliographic information with which to describe a sound recording (its chief source of information) is its physical carrier and labels:

• Disc—Disc and labels—if two labels are present, treat them as one • Cassette—Cassette and labels—if two labels are present, treat them as

one If the carrier or labels do not supply the necessary descriptive information, get it from (in order of preference):

• Accompanying textual material • Container (e.g., sleeve; box; "information that can be read through the

closed container"—L 6.0B1) • Other sources

If the carrier or labels do not have a collective title and the accompanying textual material or the container does, use one of them as the chief source instead, in which case, add a Source of Title Proper Note (500).

CAM "Titles always have been a problem with audiovisual material. There may be several forms of a title on an item, or even completely different titles on the same item. By first specifying a chief source of information for each type of material, the designers of AACR2 helped ensure the uniformity of bibliographic records. When we catalog a sound disc, for example, we are told the chief source of information is the disc label(s). We take the title proper from those label(s). If the sound disc has one title on the label, a different title on the front of the sleeve, another title on the spine, and yet another on the back of the sleeve, we no longer are confused. We use the label information for the title proper, and make notes of all the other titles. We make access points for all the variant titles if the differences are significant, and thus the patron can find the bibliographic record for the sound disc by whatever title happens to be remembered."

A 6.0B2 Certain descriptive information must be taken from specific (prescribed) sources of information. The title and statement of responsibility must come from the chief source. The edition, publication and series information must come from the chief source, accompanying textual material, or container. The physical description, notes, and standard numbers (e.g., ISBN) can come from any source. If you have to take any of the above information from a source other than its prescribed source, you must put that information in square brackets.

Hint Ch. 7 provides the rules for cataloging sound recordings. However, when cataloging music sound recordings, remember to also use the rules for music (Ch. 5). When cataloging music videos, also add the rules for cataloging videos (Ch. 7).

Sound recordings


GENERAL CATALOGING STEPS

Step 1

Search your own catalog to see if you already have a copy of the resource. See the table called: "Search For Copy cat Records" for hints on how to search.

Step 2 If a record is found, use the table called "Quick Match Criteria" (QMC) to decide whether or not the record matches your resource. Consider each element on the table. Do not simply look at the record; check off each item on the QMC (mentally) or you might forget something important. For example, the record may have no note about languages, so you pass on and forget to look for that information on the resource, where it says your sound recording is in more than one language.

Step 3

If you find a record that exactly matches your resource, edit it, using the table called "Editing/Cloning/Creating Records Cheatsheet". Go down the table carefully considering each field. Do not simply look at the record, because a useful field might be missing from the record and you might not notice it is missing without the cheatsheet to remind you.

Step 4

If you cannot find a match on your own catalog, search your source of copy cataloging records. This might be a bibliographic utility such as OCLC or RLIN, or a cataloging vendor's database, such as ITSMARC, or the Library of Congress database, or other library databases via Z39.50.

Step 5 As with Step 1 above, search for a record for your resource, using the table called: "Search For Copy cat Records".

Step 6 As with Step 2 above, if a record is found, apply the table called "Quick Match Criteria" (QMC) to decide whether or not the record matches your resource.

Step 7 As with Step 3 above, if you find a record that exactly matches your resource, edit it, using the table called "Editing/Cloning/Creating Records Cheatsheet".

Step 8 If the only record that you can find is not an exact match, but it is close, 'clone' it. This means that you copy the record and give it a new control number (to make it a brand new record), then change everything that you need to make that new record match your different edition. Use the table called "Editing/Cloning/Creating Records Cheatsheet" from Step 3 above to make your changes.

Step 9 If you cannot find even a near match record, make an original record, again using the table called "Editing/Cloning/Creating Records Cheatsheet". It is especially important that you follow the cheatsheet field-by-field when you are making an original record. You don't want to forget anything important.

Step 10 Whether you are editing, cloning a different edition record, or creating an original record, remember to:

• add or check subject headings • verify all headings against the appropriate authority file (LC + local) • validate coding (check for invalid MARC coding) • add a call number and holdings data

Search for copy cat records Sound recordings


SEARCH FOR COPY CAT RECORDS

Field Pros Cons ISBN (020) from anywhere

on the resource

Often available on most resources Numbers are easy to search Usually good, direct access to matching or




Can retrieve a non-matching record Publisher

number (028) from anywhere

on the resource

Often available on sound recordings Numbers are easy to search Usually good, direct access to matching or


Seldom available in older records, since 028 was only made valid in 1995.



SRN (UPC/EAN)

(024) from anywhere

on the resource

Sometimes available on recent resources Numbers are easy to search Usually good, direct access to matching or





ISSN (022) from anywhere

on the resource

Often available on serial resources. Numbers are easy to search Usually good, direct access to matching or


Be sure that you want a serial record. Occasionally does not retrieve a matching

record Can retrieve more than one record, even

though they are supposed to be unique Can retrieve a non-matching record

Name/Title (1XX / 7XX /

8XX / 245) from physical

carrier and labels

Usually available on most resources Names can be composers, performers,

conductors, writers of operas or musicals, poets of words sung, arrangers

Combining names with titles can retrieve less matches to sift through



Prolific persons or bodies can retrieve long hitlists

Title (245) from physical

carrier and labels

Nearly always available on most resources Easy to search

Prone to typos Can retrieve many matching records to sift

through, especially if you truncate too much

Others may have used title from container instead of resource labels

Name (1XX / 7XX /

8XX) from physical

carrier and labels

Usually available on most resources Names can be composers, performers,

conductors, writers of operas or musicals, poets of words sung, arrangers



Prolific persons or bodies can retrieve long hitlists

Series (4XX / 8XX) from labels,

accmp. mat., box

Sometimes available on most resources Can narrow a search if you have a prolific

classic author/title, especially if you combine with a name

Can retrieve many matching records; use as a last resort

Date qualifier (008 Date1) latest date

anywhere

Usually available on most resources Can narrow a search very nicely Some systems allow using date ranges

Use only if date is VERY CLEAR, otherwise others may not have chosen the same date.

Try using a range of dates, if more than one date is on the resource

Material qualifier from resource

Can be very useful to narrow a search if you are looking for a non-book record

Sound recordings







These guidelines apply to single part monographs and to comparisons between the same parts of a multipart monograph. Consider changes in most fields between the parts of a multipart monograph to be minor. Remember to take the information that you are trying to match from the appropriate prescribed source of information (see italics in column on left). If no source is listed, the information can come from any source. In this table, labels = physical carrier and labels; LAB = physical carrier and labels, accompanying textual material, box. Field Criteria 028/500 Publisher

number


assigned a new number because of a change in price, for example. 245 $anp Title (labels)

NOT ok: if there is a difference in the words in the title proper; but watch out for differences due to cataloger error (e.g., words wrongly abbreviated or capitalized, or initial articles missing, or titles taken from wrong sources, e.g., container instead of chief source)

245 $h GMD




(labels)

NOT ok: if there is a difference in the words in a parallel title, subtitle or subsequent title (or if they are present in the record and not on the sound recording); but watch out for differences due to cataloger error (e.g., words wrongly abbreviated or capitalized, or subtitles taken from wrong sources, e.g., container instead of chief source)

OK: if they are on the sound recording and not in the record if it is possible that the other cataloger may have missed them.

245 $c Responsibility (labels)

NOT ok: if there is a difference in responsibility given on the sound recording and in the record, or if responsibility that is given in the record cannot be found on the sound recording.

OK: if responsibility that is given on the sound recording is not mentioned in the record if it is possible that the other cataloger might have missed it.

1XX/7XX Main entry / Added entries (labels)


between the person or body in the main entry &/or added entries in the record and on the sound recording, but watch out for pseudonyms.

250 $a Edition (LAB)


OK: if sound recording or record says 1st ed. and the other has no ed. statement. 250 $b Edition

responsibility (LAB)

NOT ok: if there is a difference in responsibility for an edition, or if responsibility for the edition that is given in the record cannot be found on the sound recording.

OK: if edition responsibility that is given on the sound recording is not mentioned in the record if it is possible that the other cataloger might have missed it.

Quick match criteria Sound recordings


Field Criteria 260 $b Publisher (LAB)

NOT ok: if there is a true difference in publisher, including a change of name. OK: if there are multiple publishers on the sound recording and one matches in the record,

or if the same publishers' name is given in either place in a different form. 260 $a Place (LAB)

NOT ok: if there is a difference in country of publication. OK: if place is in the same country, or there are multiple places on the sound recording

and one matches in the record. 260 $c Date (LAB)


OK: if the difference is due to cataloging interpretation. 300 $a Extent

NOT ok: if there is a difference in SMD (e.g., sound disc vs. sound cassette) NOT ok: if there is a difference in number of SMD (e.g., 1 sound cassette vs. 2 sound

cassette). NOT ok: if there is a significant difference in playing time. OK if the difference is due to cataloging interpretation or errors (e.g., cassette instead of

sound cassette). 300 $b

NOT ok: if there is a difference in: Type of playback (e.g., analog vs. digital) Playing speed (e.g., 33 1/3 vs. 45 rpm) Groove characteristics Track configurations Number of tracks Number of sound channels (e.g., mono vs. stereo) Recording and reproduction. characteristics. (e.g., Dolby vs. not Dolby)

300 $c Size

NOT ok: if there is a difference in size of disc or cassette (e.g., 4 ¾ in. vs. 12 in.)




4XX Series (LAB)

NOT ok: if there is a difference in series statement or series number; but watch out for differences due to cataloger error (e.g., words wrongly abbreviated or capitalized, or initial articles missing)



NOT ok: if there is a difference in the language of the sound recording and the language given in a note in the record.

500 Edition note

NOT ok: if there is a difference in an edition note, e.g., condensed, updated, corrected, or if such a note is needed and not present, or present and not applicable.


NOT ok: if there is a difference in a physical description note that affects use or if such a note is needed and not present, or present and not applicable; also check 538 for this information.

511 Performer note

NOT ok: if there is a difference in performers, narrators, etc.




505/500 Contents note

NOT ok: if there is an actual difference in the contents of a sound recording.

020 ISBN

OK: if there is a difference in ISBN, or if one is present on the sound recording and absent from the record, or one is absent from the sound recording and present in the record.

Remember to take the information that you are trying to match from the appropriate prescribed source of information (see italics in column on left). If no source is listed, the information can come from any source. In this table, labels = physical carrier and labels; LAB = physical carrier and labels, accompanying textual material, box.

Sound recordings

6-8 Cataloging with AACR2 and MARC21 (9/15/2005)

EDITING/CLONING/CREATING RECORDS CHEATSHEET

EXPLANATION OF TABLE HEADINGS: Field The tag number of each field, and its name (often abbrev. considerably); also the names

of subfields, if applicable R Whether or not the field/subfield is repeatable; N = not repeatable (you may have only

one of these fields in a record or subfields in a field); R = repeatable (you may have more than one of these fields in a record or subfields in a field)

I1 I2 Indicator one and indicator two, when applicable (• = blank; _ = enter a value); explanations for some indicators are given in the Hints column

SubF Subfield codes and their preceding punctuation, if any; explanations for some subfields are given in the Hints column

Src The prescribed source of information for data, as per AACR EOF The appropriate end of field punctuation for the field. MARC21 Introduction says: "In

the discussion of punctuation practices, a mark of punctuation is a period (.), a question mark (?), an exclamation mark (!), or a hyphen (-). The MARC21 print manual lists ending punctuation under 'input conventions' at the end of each MARC field.

Hints The author's suggestions Page no. The page number in this book where you can find further information about the field A: AACR The associated AACR (Anglo American Cataloguing Rules) rule, if appropriate {Related} Related MARC elements; i.e., when entering information in a field / indicator / subfield,

think about entering corresponding information in the related field, etc. EXPLANATION OF TERMS: EDIT: Special hints for when you are editing a record you have copied ORIG: Special hints for when you are creating an original record from scratch DE: Special hints for when you are copying a record that does not quite match, and

changing it so that it is a new record that completely matches, i.e., a 'different edition', aka 'cloning'

M21: Cataloging software based on MARC21, not OCLC OCLC: Specific differences in the OCLC cataloging requirements N.B. Not all subfields are mentioned in this cheatsheet; only the most commonly used subfields and indicator values are given with usage details. See the Tags chapter or an official MARC manual for descriptions of other available subfields and indicator values. This is a highly compressed cheatsheet, so also see the Tags chapter for detailed instructions to explain some of the more cryptic messages that you might find here. Remember that if you are upgrading punctuation to ISBD, then you must upgrade the entire record to AACR, and change Leader/18 Desc to 'a'. When you are making a different edition record, remember to check each field very carefully and delete/change anything that does not apply to the new resource that you have. You may be saving some typing by 'cloning' a near-matching record, but you are making a NEW record and must base the description for your new record on the issue that you have in-hand. If the record that you are cloning contains MARC elements that you do not understand, either look them up to be sure that they still apply to your new record, or delete them. Remember this for cloned records: if in doubt, take it out!

Editing/cloning/creating records cheatsheet Sound recordings


Field R I1 I2

SubF Src EOF Hints


000 Leader

N Src: n/a EOF: none Coded information about the record. 06/Type code must match 300$a

p. 3.0-1

EDIT: change 05/Rec stat to "c"; upgrade 17/ELvl to "#" (LC-Full) or "I" (OCLC-Full); upgrade 18/Desc to "a" (AACR)

ORIG/DE: make 05/Rec stat "n"; 06/Type "i" (non-music) or "j" (music); 07/BLvl "m"; 17/ELvl "#" (LC-Full) "I" (OCLC-Full); 18/Desc "a" (AACR)

001 Control No.

N Src: n/a EOF: none Should identify one record in one database; should be an LC no. (001=010) or

an OCLC no. (prefix "ocm") or your system's unique record no.

p. 3.0-6 {003}

EDIT—M21: do not change LCCN or OCLC 001; change others to your own system number and prefix; OCLC: ignore

ORIG/DE—M21: enter your unique system number & prefix; OCLC: supplies unique OCLC number (& prefix) upon export

003 Control No.

Identifier

N Src: n/a EOF: none Identifies whose number is in 001; if 001 is LC's or OCLC's or yours, 003

must be LC's (DLC) or OCLC's (OCoLC) or your code to correspond

p. 3.0-9 {001}

EDIT—M21: if 001 is unchanged—ignore, 001 is changed—change to your MARC code to correspond; OCLC: ignore, "OCoLC" inserted upon export

ORIG/DE—M21: enter your MARC21 code to correspond to the new 001; OCLC: ignore, "OCoLC" inserted upon export

010 LCCN

N • •

Src: any EOF: none Supposed to identify one specific LC record, so the same number should not

be valid ($a) in different records

p. 3.0-71 A: 6.7B19

Valid LCCN N $a For LCCN on resources that exactly match records in the LC database Invalid LCCN R $z For LCCN on resources that do not exactly match records in the LC database EDIT/DE/ORIG: add if on resource; use $z if the LCCN on a resource brings

up an LC record that does not exactly match the resource M21: normalize LCCN, see 010 for details: pre-2001 (3,2,6): $a 99123456 2001 on (2,4,6): $a 2001123456 OCLC: do not normalize, OCLC does it for you

EDIT: do not delete 010 if the LCCN is not on a resource; ignore suffixes DE: delete 010 if the LCCN is not on a resource; if an LCCN on a resource is

already in the record used for cloning, check LC re using 010$z for LCCN

020 ISBN

R • •

Src: any EOF: none Should identify an individual publication of a work, so the same number

cannot be valid ($a) in different records

p. 3.0-77 A: 6.8

Valid ISBN N $a For ISBN that are unique (can be found in $a in only one record) Invalid ISBN R $z For ISBN that are not unique (can be found in $a in more than one record), or

that have a check digit that does not compute

EDIT/DE/ORIG: add if on resource; normalize (no hyphens, no spaces); use $z if the same ISBN is in $a in multiple records; ok to have two valid ISBN ($a) in one record, but it is not ok to have one ISBN valid in two records

EDIT: do not delete 020 if the ISBN is not on a resource DE: delete 020 if the ISBN is not on a resource; if it is, change it to $z 024 Other

standard identifier

R _ _

Src: any EOF: none I1=1 (UPC—10-12 digits below a publisher's barcode) I1=3 (EAN—numbers below a publisher's barcode, for monographs beginning

with '978' and looking like the related ISBN)

p. 3.0-86 A: 6.7B19

I2=# (barcode not scanned), 0 (scanned & eye-readable are the same), 1 (scanned & eye-readable are different)

Valid no. N $a Enter all digits below the barcode; normalize (no hyphens, no spaces) Added no. N $d Sometimes contains price, etc., but seldom added Invalid no. R $z Used for cancelled codes EDIT/DE/ORIG: add if on resource DE: delete 024 if the UPC/EAN is not on your resource

Sound recordings Editing/cloning/creating records cheatsheet


Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


028 Publisher

number

R _ _

Src: any EOF: none Supposed to identify a particular video, sound recording, score, etc. I1=0 (issue number—most common), 1 (matrix number), 2 (plate number)

p. 3.0-88 A: 6.7B19



R • •


p. 3.0-91 {001}


N • •


p. 3.0-94


R • •


p. 3.0-103



p. 3.0-104





p. 3.0-106


N _ _

Src: physical carrier and labels EOF: period, even if other punc is present, unless last word has its own period I1=0 (title is indexed as main entry, so needs no added entry), 1 (title is not


p. 3.2-5 A: 6.1 {500 Srce}

I2=0-9 (non-filing characters to skip, e.g., for initial articles) Title proper N $a The title from the chief source {246} Numb. part R .$n A numbered part when multiple works have the same common title Name part R *$p A named part when multiple works have the same common title; * preceded


GMD N $h[ ] What the material IS; for sound recordings: [sound recording] {000Type } Parallel title N =$b The same title in another language, from the chief source {246} Other title N :$b Usually a subtitle (clarifies/narrows a title), from the chief source {246} Next title N ;$b Subsequent title(s) by the same author, from the chief source {740} Statement of


intellectual /artistic content of the work; for sound recordings, e.g.: writers of spoken words; composers; collectors of field material; performers of pop, rock, jazz; important producers; separate statements for different functions with space-semicolon-space

{1XX; 500; 511; 7XX}




Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints



111, 130)

N _ •

Src: physical carrier and labels EOF: period, question mark, exclamation mark, hyphen, or closing


responsible for a work, or the first named person or body in a list of 3 or less, or if none of these, then a uniform title (see 21.23)

p. 3.1-10 A: 21-25 {245 I1, $c}



EDIT/DE/ORIG: main vs. added entries—main entries for sound recordings are: writers of spoken words, composers of music, or (for collections by different authors) principal performers; establish headings—choice of name/form of name/coding; verify against authority files

240 Uniform title

N _ 0



p. 3.2-1 A: 25



note and a.e.




p. 3.2-38 A: 6.7B4-6;

21.30J {245}

I2=# (no display constant), 0 (portion of title), 1 (parallel title), 2-8 (display constants); SR: usually # (no display const.)




N • • Src: physical carrier and labels, accompanying textual material, container (box) EOF: period


p. 3.2-56 A: 6.2 {500 Ed.}

Edition N $a Look for … "edition" "issue" "version", and words implying different versions Resp. N /$b Responsibility for the edition, not the original work {7XX} EDIT/DE/ORIG: add if on resource DE: delete if not on resource 260 Imprint area

R _ • Src: physical carrier and labels, accompanying textual material, container (box)



p. 3.2-66 A: 6.4

Place R $a Give first place, or guess, or "[S.l.]"; add place in your country if not 1st (;$a) {008Ctry} Publisher R :$b Give first publisher, or "[s.n.]"; add other publishers on chief source (:$b) {028$b} Dates R ,$c Give publication date ($c1990), add copyright date if different ($c1990,

p1989); if no publication date give copyright date ($cp1999); if no date, guess ($c[1989?] or $c[19--] or $c[199-], etc.); copyright date must be copyright of sound (look for before 1971, (p) after 1970); cassettes available 1965; CDs available 1982

{008Dates; 008DtSt}



Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


300 Physical desc.

R • •




p. 3.3-15 A: 6.5 {000Type}

Extent R $a Enter 'sound …' (cassette, disc, etc.); add (playing time) if provided, as provided

{007/01; 306}

Other phys. N :$b Enter: type of playback (analog vs. digital); number of sound channels (e.g., mono. or stereo or quad.); recording/reprod. char. (e.g., Dolby processed)

See rules for adding playing speed, groove char. and tracks (not needed for CDs or standard cassettes)

{007/12; 007/03; 007/05; 007/08; 007/04}

Size N ;$c Enter disc size in inches, e.g., CD = 4 3/4 in.; do not enter size for standard cassettes

{007/06}

Accomp. mat. N +$e Enter a valid SMD or if none, a generic term; can add physical desc., e.g.: +$e1 v. (11 p. : ill. ; 22 cm.)

{006; 007 500 AccM}

306 Playing Time

N • • $a

EOF: none. Code the playing time given in a 300$a, 500 Physical description note or 505 contents note; enter as hhmmss, e.g., 1hr., 30 min. = 013000 or 35 sec. = 000035; repeat $a for up to 6 durations if given separately

p. 3.3-28 {300$a; 500

Phys; 505} 440 Series


R • _ Src: physical carrier and labels, accompanying textual material, container (box) EOF: none

The series statement and added entry when indexed exactly as given on a resource; be consistent in indexing or not indexing; 440 are indexed

p. 3.4-7 A: 6.6



R _ • Src: physical carrier and labels, accompanying textual material, container (box) EOF: none

A series statement exactly as given on a resource when indexed differently (need an 8XX for the series added entry) or not indexed at all; be consistent in indexing or not indexing; 490 are not indexed, 8XX are indexed instead

p. 3.4-13 A: 6.6







p. 3.5-1 A: 6.7

EDIT/DE/ORIG: add useful notes DE: delete notes that do not apply to the new edition 500 Publisher's

numbers

R • • Use this note for publisher's numbers if numbering is too complicated for an 028 alone, e.g., to give multiple sequential numbers on a multipart resource

p. 3.5-19 A: 6.7B19 {028}

500 Nature, etc.

R • •

Make a note about the nature, scope, or artistic form of the resource unless it is already obvious, e.g., "Opera in two acts.", "Dub music.", or "Musical play."

p. 3.5-18 A: 6.7B1 {008Comp;

047} 047 Form of music

N • • $a

Src: n/a EOF: none Enter multiple form of musical composition codes in separate $a as applicable

p. 3.0-102 {008Comp;

500Nature}



Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


546 Language

R • • Make a language note unless the language is apparent from the rest of the description, e.g., add if multiple languages are present or if a resource is a translation; we used to use 500, change it to 546; if 546 is present, 041 should be added

p. 3.5-74 A: 6.7B2 {008Lang;

041} 041 Language

codes


multiple languages are involved in a resource; if 546 is present, 041 should be added; can have an 041 without a 546; repeat subfields; code in $a must match code in 008Lang unless 008 Lang = 'mul' or blank

p. 3.0-98 {008Lang;

546; 500; 765/767}


proper

R • • Make a note about the source of the title proper, if it is not from the chief source of information, e.g., "Title from container."

p. 3.5-28 A: 6.7B3 {245}

500 Variant /




p. 3.5-21+34 A: 6.7B4-5 {246}

500 Statement of

resp.

R • • Make a note for: persons or bodies responsible for the work, but not given in the 245$c or 511, e.g., "Additional author: ..."; persons or bodies not responsible for, but connected with the work, e.g., "Based on a poem by ..." or "Recorded for the Shakespeare Recording Society."

p. 3.5-29 A: 6.7B6 {245$c; 511;

7XX} 511 Participant or

performer

R _ •

Make a note about featured performers and their medium of performance, presenters, &/or narrators unless they are already given in a 505 contents note; give Name(s), function ; Name(s) function.

I1 = 0 (no display constant), 1 (Cast)

p. 3.5-48 A: 6.7B6 {505; 7XX}

500 Edition &

history / Repub.

R • •

Make a note about: edition information that does not fit in a 250 (e.g., "Abridged."); the bibliographic history of a work, e.g., "Previous ed.: …"; related work information, e.g., "From the sound track of the motion picture."; reissue/re-release information, e.g., "Reissue of: …"

p. 3.5-11 A: 6.7B7 {250; 7XX } {008DtSt: r}

518 Date / time /

place

R • • Make a note about when &/or where a sound recording was recorded, broadcast, etc., e.g., "Recording of a speech given at [place], on [date]."

p. 3.5-52 A: 6.7B7 {008DtSt: p}

500 Publication,

etc.

R • • Make a note about publication details not given in 260, e.g., "Distributed in ... by ..."

p. 3.5-25 A: 6.7B9 {260}

500 Physical

description

R • • Make a note about physical description details that could not be given in 300, e.g., "Compact disc, analog recording.", "Compact disc, digital recording.", (for a tape) "Digital recording.", "Analog recording; digitally remastered."

p. 3.5-22 A: 6.7B10 {007/12-13;

300; 538} 538 System details

R • •

Make a note about specific system requirements affecting access, e.g., computer requirements (if available) for enhanced CDs (CDs with additional tracks or video clips that can only be played using a computer), e.g., "Enhanced CD system requirements: ...

p. 3.5-66 A: 7.7B10 {006 ER;

007 ER} 500 Accomp.

material

R • • Make a note instead of 300$e to provide more details about accompanying material, e.g., its location, different titles, etc., e.g., "Critical notes on insert." or "Lyrics on inner liner." or "Autobiographical note on slipcase." or "Accompanied by a teacher's guide."

p. 3.5-7 A: 6.7B11 {006; 300$e

008AccM:}500 Series


p. 3.5-27 A: 6.7B12 {4XX}

502 Dissertation


p. 3.5-37 A: 6.7B13



Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


521 Target

audience

R _ •



p. 3.5-57 A: 6.7B14 {008Audn}

Note N $a E.g., "Parental advisory, explicit lyrics." Source N $b Name or abbreviation of the source of the note if it is not from item 530 Add. forms

R • •


p. 3.5-61 A: 6.7B16

Note N $a The other format of the resource, e.g., "Issued also on CD." Source N ;$b Where the other format is available from Conditions N ;$c Cost, etc. of the other format Order # N ;$d Stock no., etc. of the other format URI R $u Link to an Internet site {856} 520 Summary

R _ •


p. 3.5-54 A: 6.7B17


contents

R • •

Use this note for a vague note on contents, e.g., "This recording of 1954 radio material contains public service appeals sponsored by the American Cancer Society."

p. 3.5-32 A: 6.7B18

505 Formatted

contents

R _ _ List the contents of a sound recording, e.g., songs, stories, or poems, either fully or in part; keyword indexed, so check spelling and coding


p. 3.5-39 A: 6.7B18



R • • Use this note for numbers you don't know what else to do with (e.g., "10003.") p. 3.5-19 A: 6.7B19 {028 etc.}

590 Copy describ.

R • •


p. 3.5-83 A: 6.7B20



p. 3.5-44 A: 6.7B20 {540}

Note N $a The restrictions imposed, e.g., "Available to staff and students of the School of Music only."

Jurisdiction R ;$b The agent imposing the restrictions, e.g., "[Publisher.]" 540 Terms govern.

use/reprod.


p. 3.5-68 A: 6.7B20 {506}

Note N $a The local restriction or permission Jurisdiction R ;$b The agent imposing the restriction or granting permission Institution N $5 Code for the institution to which the special restrictions or permissions apply 586 Awards




p. 3.5-82



Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


6XX Subject

headings (600, 610,

611, 630, 650, 651, 655)


I1= type of name, or non-filing, or blank; I2 = heading source; most common: 0=Library of Congress SH (preferred) 1=LC Annotated Children's SH 4=Local subject headings 7=Source is provided in $2 Consider adding new 655 (genre/form headings)—patrons like them, e.g,

Compact discs

p. 3.6-1 A: 22-25




711, 730)



authority files

p. 3.7-7 A: 21-25 {245$c;

500 Resp}


EDIT/DE/ORIG: add useful added entries, e.g.: prominent corporate bodies; related works; analytics; people or bodies from 245$c— joint composers (music) and writers (non-music); performers and performing groups, incl. narrators; conductors; accompanists; arrangers/transcribers; composers of the originals that have been adapted ; writers of words (music); producers (if important) choreographers and writers of scenarios, librettos, etc. of ballets; composers of accompaniments; other people or bodies if needed; for music videos, see also Video (VD) added entries


entries (800, 810,

811, 830)

R _ •




p. 3.8-1 A: 21.30L



char.

R


p. 3.0-10 {300$e;


fixed field

R

Src: n/a EOF: none Always add an SR 007 for all SR; also useful to add for accompanying non-

print material M21: Cass: ss#l_njlc###__ CD: sd#f_ngnn###e_ OCLC: Cass: $as $bs $dl $e_ $fn $gj $hl $ic $m_ $n_ CD: $as $bd $df $e_ $fn $gg $hn $in $me $n_ 04/$e (channels): m (mono), q (quad), s (stereo), z (other), u (unknown) 12/$m (playback): e (digital), c standard (Dolby), n (n/a), u (unknown) 13/$m (capture): d (digital), e (analog), u (unknown)

p. 3.0-22 {245$h;

300$a$e; 500 AccM}

008 Fixed field

N

EOF: none Src: n/a Add codes for all 008 positions from the 008 Sound recordings codes list

p. 3.0-54

M21 order (SS = system supplied) Entrd: SS DtSt: Dates: , Ctry: Comp: FMus: n Part: # Audn: Form: AccM: LTxt: M/E: # ArrN: n Lang: MRec: # Srce: d

OCLC order (italics = 000 codes; SS = system supplied): OCLC: SS Rec stat: n Entered: SS Replaced: SS Used: SS Type: i or j ELvl: Srce: d Audn: Ctrl: # Lang: BLvl: m Form: Comp: AccM: MRec: # Ctry: Desc: FMus: n LTxt: DtSt: Dates: ,

Sound recordings Dates flowchart


SOUND RECORDING DATES FLOWCHART

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N

NNN

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y YPUBD present?

Give the PUBD of the ed. (A 1.4F1)

COPD dif?

SR COPD?*

Add the COPD (A 1.4F5)

OK SR COPD**

Give as COPD (A 1.4F6)

Guess a PUBD (A 1.4F7) Cass. after 1965 CD after 1982

SR COPD?*


Re-release?

Add Edition and History note (L 7.7B7) DtSt: r

Rec. date?

Add 518 Date/Time/Place note (A 6.4F2) DtSt: p

DtSt: s or t A 1.4F1--Give PUBD 260$c1998. 008 s 1998,

A 1.4F5--Add COPD 260$c1986, p1985. 008 t 1986,1985

A 1.4F6--Give as COPD 260$cp1988. 008 s 1988,

A 1.4F7--Guess PUBD 260$c[198-] 008 s 198u,

L 6.7B7 Add Edition and History note 260$c1981. 500$aOriginally released in 1978. 008 r 1981,1978

A 6.4F2 Add 518 Date/Time/Place note 260$c2001. 518$aRecorded in 1957. 008 p 2001,1957

Y

Pub-lished?

Give the date of creation / recording (A 6.4F3)

A 6.4F3--Give the date of creation/ recording 260$c1975. 518$aRecorded in Kingsway Hall, London, July 2-15, 1975. 008 s 1984,

PUBD: Publication date COPD: Copyright date * SR COPD: is the COPD for the actual sound: (c) or (p) before 1971, (p) after 1970 ** OK SR COPD: is the COPD for the actual sound and for the entire sound recording not just a part, and ok as an indication of a pub date; could it have been published then (Cass. after 1965, CDs after 1982)

Later date?

Give later date as guessed, add COPD (L 1.4F7)

L 1.4F7 Give later date as guessed, add COPD260$c[198-], p1972. 008 t 198u,1972

Videos







These guidelines apply to single part monographs and to comparisons between the same parts of a multipart monograph. Consider changes in most fields between the parts of a multipart monograph to be minor. Remember to take the information that you are trying to match from the appropriate prescribed source of information (see italics in column on left). If no source is listed, the information can come from any source. In this table, video & label = video title frames, container labels; VLAB = video title frames, container label, accompanying material, box; whole = the whole resource. Field Criteria 028/500 Publisher

number


assigned a new number because of a change in price, for example. 245 $anp Title (video & label)

NOT ok: if there is a difference in the words in the title proper; but watch out for differences due to cataloger error (e.g., words wrongly abbreviated or capitalized, or initial articles missing, or titles taken from wrong sources, e.g., container instead of title frames, etc.)

245 $h GMD




(video & label)

NOT ok: if there is a difference in the words in a parallel title, subtitle or subsequent title (or if they are present in the record and not on the resource); but watch out for differences due to cataloger error (e.g., words wrongly abbreviated or capitalized, or subtitles taken from wrong sources, e.g., container instead of title frames, etc.)


245 $c Responsibility (video & label)

NOT ok: if there is a difference in responsibility given on the resource and in the record, or if responsibility that is given in the record cannot be found on the resource.


1XX/7XX Main entry /Added entries (video & label)



250 $a Edition (VLAB)


OK: if resource or record says 1st ed. and the other has no ed. statement. 250 $b Edition

responsibility (VLAB)

NOT ok: if there is a difference in responsibility for an edition, or if responsibility for the edition that is given in the record cannot be found on the resource.


Videos Quick match criteria


Field Criteria 260 $b Publisher (VLAB)

NOT ok: if there is a true difference in publisher, including a change of name. OK: if there are multiple publishers on the resource and one matches in the record, or if

the same publishers' name is given in either place in a different form. Must be the releasing agent of the video, not the film.

260 $a Place (VLAB)

NOT ok: if there is a difference in country of publication. OK: if place is in the same country, or there are multiple places on the resource and one

matches in the record. 260 $c Date (VLAB)


OK: if the difference is due to cataloging interpretation or just package & design copyright.

300 $a Extent

NOT ok: if there is a difference in SMD (e.g., videodisc vs. videocassette) NOT ok: if there is a difference in number of SMD (e.g., 1 videocassette vs. 2

videocassettes). NOT ok: if there is a significant difference in playing time. OK if the difference is due to cataloging interpretation or errors (e.g., cassette instead of

videocassette). 300 $b Sound Color

NOT ok: if there is a difference between sound and silent, be careful of interpretation NOT ok: if there is a difference between color vs. black & white, be careful of

interpretation. 300 $c Size

NOT ok: if there is a difference in size of disc or tape width (e.g., 1/2 in. vs. 1/4 in.)




4XX Series (VLAB)

NOT ok: if there is a difference in series statement or series number; but watch out for differences due to cataloger error (e.g., words wrongly abbreviated or capitalized, or initial articles missing) OK if parallel title, other title info, statement of responsibility, or ISSN are given on the resource and are not in the record, if the other cataloger might have missed them.

538 System details

NOT ok: if there is a difference in the format of the video (e.g., VHS vs. Beta vs. DVD) or in details such as widescreen vs. full screen, aspect ratio, sound, or region 1 vs. region 2, etc.


NOT ok: if there is a difference in the language of the resource and the language given in a note in the record (e.g., dubbed vs. not dubbed, subtitled vs. not or different language of subtitles, closed captioned vs. not); watch out for confusing charts on DVDs.

500 Edition note

NOT ok: if there is a difference in an edition note, e.g., condensed, updated, corrected, or if such a note is needed and not present, or present and not applicable; also check 538.


NOT ok: if there is a difference in a physical description note that affects use or if such a note is needed and not present, or present and not applicable, e.g., stereo; also check 538 for this information.

511 Performer note

NOT ok: if there is a difference in performers, narrators, etc.

508 Credits note

NOT ok: if there is a difference in persons or bodies listed in credits.




505 Contents note

NOT ok: if there is an actual difference in the contents of a resource. This information might be in a 500 unformatted contents note for a DVD.

020 ISBN


Editing/cloning/creating records cheatsheet Videos


Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


028 Publisher

number

R _ _

Src: any EOF: none Supposed to identify a particular video, sound recording, score, etc. I1=4 (videorecording number)

p. 3.0-88 A: 6.7B19



R • •


p. 3.0-91 {001}


N • •


p. 3.0-94


R • •


p. 3.0-103



p. 3.0-104





p. 3.0-106


N _ _

Src: video title screens, physical carrier and label(s) EOF: period, even if other punc is present, unless last word has its own period I1=0 (title is indexed as main entry, so needs no added entry), 1 (title is not


p. 3.2-5 A: 7.1 {500 Srce}

I2=0-9 (non-filing characters to skip, e.g., for initial articles) Title proper N $a The title from the chief source {246} Numb. part R .$n A numbered part when multiple works have the same common title Name part R *$p A named part when multiple works have the same common title; * preceded


GMD N $h[ ] What the material IS; for videos: [videorecording] {008TMat} Parallel title N =$b The same title in another language, from the chief source {246} Other title N :$b Usually a subtitle (clarifies/narrows a title), from the chief source {246} Next title N ;$b Subsequent title(s) by the same author, from the chief source {740} Statement of


intellectual /artistic content of the work; for videos, e.g.: overall responsibility or significant control of content: production company; sponsor; director; producer; writer; animator of animated film; photographer of travelog; principal performer in music video; give principal performer first, then production companies, then others using the wording and order on the video; separate statements for different functions with space-semicolon-space

{1XX; 500; 508; 511; 7XX}


Videos Editing/cloning/creating records cheatsheet


Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints



111, 130)

N _ •

Src: video title screens, physical carrier and label(s) EOF: period, question mark, exclamation mark, hyphen, or closing


responsible for a work, or the first named person or body in a list of 3 or less, or if none of these, then a uniform title

p. 3.1-1 A: 21-25 {245 I1, $c}



EDIT/DE/ORIG: main vs. added entries—main entries for videos: are principal performers of music videos, otherwise most videos have title main entries; establish headings—choice of name/form of name/coding; verify against authority files

240 Uniform title

N _ 0



p. 3.2-1 A: 25



note and a.e.




p. 3.2-38 A: 7.7B4-6;

21.30J {245}

I2=# (no display constant), 0 (portion of title), 1 (parallel title), 2-8 (display constants); VD: usually # (no display const.)




N • • Src: video title screens, physical carrier and label(s), accompanying material, container (box) EOF: period


p. 3.2-56 A: 7.2 {500 Ed.}

Edition N $a Look for … "edition" "issue" "version", and words implying different versions, e.g., "Letterbox format", "Director's cut"

Resp. N /$b Responsibility for the edition, not the original work {7XX} EDIT/DE/ORIG: add if on resource DE: delete if not on resource 260 Imprint area

R _ • Src: video title screens, physical carrier and label(s), accompanying material, container (box)



p. 3.2-66 A: 7.4

Place R $a Give first place, or guess, or "[S.l.]"; add place in your country if not 1st (;$a) {008Ctry} Publisher R :$b Give first publisher, or "[s.n.]"; add other publishers on chief source (:$b); add

distributors (:$b) {008GPub;

028$b} Dates R ,$c Give publication date ($c1990), add date if different ($c1990, c1989); if no

publication date give date ($cc1999); if no date, guess ($c[1989?] or $c[19--] or $c[199-], etc.); date must be of video, not film; VHS available 1977; DVDs available 1997

{008Dates; 008DtSt}



Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


300 Physical desc.

R • •




p. 3.3-21 A: 7.5 {000Type}

Extent R $a Enter 'video …' (cassette, disc, etc.); add (playing time) if provided, as provided

{007/01 ; 008TMat ; 008Time}

Other phys. N :$b Enter 'sd.' or 'si.'; 'col.' or 'b&w', or 'col. and b&w', or 'col. with b&w sequences', or 'b&w with col. sequences'

{007/05; 007/06; 007/08}

Size N ;$c Enter tape or disc size in inches, e.g., VHS = 1/2 in., CD/DVD = 4 3/4 in. {007/03} Accomp. mat. N +$e Enter a valid SMD or if none, a generic term; can add physical desc., e.g.:

+$e1 v. (11 p. : ill. ; 22 cm.) {006; 007 500 AccM}

440 Series


R • _ Src: video title screens, physical carrier and label(s), accompanying material, container (box)

EOF: none The series statement and added entry when indexed exactly as given on a


p. 3.4-7 A: 7.6



R _ • Src: video title screens, physical carrier and label(s), accompanying material, container (box)

EOF: none A series statement exactly as given on a resource when indexed differently

(need an 8XX for the series added entry) or not indexed at all; be consistent in indexing or not indexing; 490 are not indexed, 8XX are indexed instead

p. 3.4-13 A: 7.6







p. 3.5-1 A: 7.7

EDIT/DE/ORIG: add useful notes DE: delete notes that do not apply to the new edition 538 System details

R • •

Make a note about specific system requirements affecting access, e.g., "VHS." "DVD." "Enhanced DVD." "Web-enabled DVD."; add details about sound here, e.g., "VHS; Hi-Fi", or in 546; use wording on DVDs for other details, e.g., "DVD; region 1 encoding; dual-layer format; aspect ratio 1.85:1; original film anamorphic widescreen; reproduced using pan-and-scan technique", etc.

p. 3.5-67 A: 7.7B10 {007/04}

500 Nature, etc.

R • •

Make a note about the nature, scope, or artistic form of the resource unless it is already obvious, e.g., "Documentary."

p. 3.5-18 A: 7.7B1

546 Language

R • • Make a language note unless the language is apparent from the rest of the description, e.g., add if multiple languages are present or if a resource is a translation; we used to use 500, change it to 546; if 546 is present, 041 should be added; VD: add "Closed-captioned." if appropriate; add sound after languages if different, e.g., "Sound track in English (5.1 surround) or Spanish (Dolby surround), with optional English subtitles."

p. 3.5-74 A: 7.7B2 {008Lang;

041}



Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


041 Language

codes


multiple languages are involved in a resource; if 546 is present, 041 should be added except 'closed captioned'; can have an 041 without a 546; repeat subfields; code in $a must match code in 008Lang unless 008 Lang = 'mul' or blank

p. 3.0-98 {008Lang;

546; 500; 765/767}

I1=0—no translation; I1=1—translation involved Code of text R $a Codes for languages associated with a resource, except SR ($d) Code of summ R $b Codes for language(s) of summaries, abstracts, or subtitles Code of SR R $d Codes for language(s) of sung or spoken content of a sound recording Code of libret R $e Codes for language(s) of librettos, e.g., lyrics in multiple languages Code of TOC R $f Codes for language(s) of tables of contents in multiple languages Code of accm R $g Codes for language(s) of accompanying material Code of transl R $h Codes for language(s) of the original work 500 Source of title

proper

R • • Make a note about the source of the title proper, if it is not from the chief source of information, e.g., "Title from container."

p. 3.5-28 A: 7.7B3 {245}

500 Variant /




p. 3.5-21+34 A: 7.7B4-5 {246}

511 Participant or

performer

R _ •

Make a note about featured participants, players, performers, presenters, &/or narrators (if seen) unless they are already given in a 505 contents note; give Function, Name(s) ; Function, Name(s).

I1 = 0 (no display constant), 1 (Cast)

p. 3.5-45 A: 7.7B6 {505; 7XX}

508 Credits

R • •

Make a note about responsibility for the production of a video not already given in 245$c, but only if important; for 'feature films' only provide if an added entry is needed; enter as "Function, Name ; Function, Name, Name"; e.g.: Photographers ; Film editors ; Cameramen; Cinematographers ; Animators ; Artists ; Illustrators ; Graphics ; Photo editors ; Editors ; usually add: Narrators (if not seen) ; Voices ; Music

p. 3.5-47 A: 7.7B6 {7XX}

500 Edition &

history / Repub.

R • •

Make a note about: - edition information that does not fit in a 250 (e.g., "Shorter version of...") - the bibliographic history of a work (e.g., "Remake of …" or "Based on the

novel by ...") - related work information (e.g., "Sequel to: …") - original release in the same or different medium, e.g., ("Originally released

in …") - original production in the same or a different medium (e.g., "Originally

produced as a motion picture in …")

p. 3.5-11 A: 7.7B7 {250; 7XX } {008DtSt: r}

518 Date / time /

place

R • • Make a note about when &/or where a video was broadcast, filmed, etc., e.g., "Filmed on location in [place] from [date] to [date]."

p. 3.5-52 A: 7.7B7

500 Publication,

etc.

R • • Make a note about publication details not given in 260, e.g., "First released in [Country]."

p. 3.5-25 A: 7.7B9 {260}

500 Physical

description

R • • Make a note about physical description details that could not be given in 300, e.g., "Dolby, stereo." or "Technicolor."; however, combine these details in 538 if it is present

p. 3.5-22 A: 7.7B10 {300; 538}

500 Accomp.

material

R • • Make a note instead of 300$e to provide more details about accompanying material, e.g., its location, different titles, etc., e.g., "Accompanied by user manual."

p. 3.5-7 A: 7.7B11 {006; 300$e}

500 Series


p. 3.5-27 A: 7.7B12 {4XX}

502 Dissertation


p. 3.5-37 A: 7.7B13



Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


521 Target

audience

R _ •



p. 3.5-57 A: 7.7B14 {008Audn}


R • •


p. 3.5-61 A: 7.7B16

Note N $a The other format of the resource, e.g., "Issued also on DVD." Source N ;$b Where the other format is available from Conditions N ;$c Cost, etc. of the other format Order # N ;$d Stock no., etc. of the other format URI R $u Link to an Internet site {856} 520 Summary

R _ •


p. 3.5-54 A: 7.7B17


contents

R • •

Use this note for a vague note on contents, e.g., "Contains restored footage." or "Special features include: deleted scenes, filmmaker's commentary, interview with director, and bonus trailers."

p. 3.5-32 A: 7.7B18

505 Formatted

contents



p. 3.5-39 A: 7.7B18



R • • Use this note for publisher's numbers (if numbering is too complicated for an 028 alone, e.g., to give multiple sequential numbers on a multipart resource) and other numbers you don't know what else to do with (e.g., "10003.")

p. 3.5-19 A: 6.7B19 {028 etc.}

590 Copy describ.

R • •


p. 3.5-83 A: 7.7B20



p. 3.5-44 A: 7.7B20

Note N $a The restrictions imposed, e.g., "For private home use only." {540} Jurisdiction R ;$b The agent imposing the restrictions, e.g., "[Publisher.]" 540 Terms govern.

use/reprod.


p. 3.5-68 A: 7.7B20 {506}





p. 3.5-82



Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


6XX Subject

headings (600, 610,

611, 630, 650, 651, 655)


I1= type of name, or non-filing, or blank; I2 = heading source; most common: 0=Library of Congress SH (preferred) 1=LC Annotated Children's SH 4=Local subject headings 7=Source is provided in $2 Consider adding new 655 (genre/form headings)—patrons like them; common

LCSH are: Feature films; DVD-Video discs; Video recordings; Video recordings for the hearing impaired;

p. 3.6-1 A: 22-25




711, 730)



authority files

p. 3.7-9 A: 21 L 21.29D {245$c;

500 Resp} Heading N $a The name or uniform title; additional subfields may be added to differentiate


EDIT/DE/ORIG: add useful added entries, e.g.: prominent corporate bodies; related works; analytics; people or bodies from 245$c (production companies, sponsors, producers, directors, writers, animators, principal performers in a music video); bodies from 260$b; featured cast from 511, narrators from 508; any people discussing their lives, ideas, works, etc., interviewers, interviewees, lecturers, etc.; other people or bodies if needed


entries (800, 810,

811, 830)

R _ •




p. 3.8-1 A: 21.30L



char.

R


p. 3.0-10 {300$e;


fixed field

R

Src: n/a EOF: none Always add a VD 007 for all VD; also useful to add for accompanying non-

print material M21: VHS: vf#_baho_ DVD: vd#_vaiz_ OCLC: VHS: $av $bf $d_ $eb $fa $gh $ho $i_ DVD: $av $bd $d_ $ev $fa $gi $hz $i_ 03/$d (color): b (b&w), c (color), m (mixed), z (other), u (unknown) 08/$i: (channels): m (mono), q (quad/surr.), s (stereo), u (unknown), z (other)

p. 3.0-22 {245$h;

300$a$e; 500 AccM}

008 Fixed field

N

EOF: none Src: n/a Add codes for all 008 positions from the 008 Videos codes list

p. 3.0-60

M21 order (SS = system supplied) Entrd: SS DtSt: Dates: Ctry: Time: Audn: AccM: # GPub: Form: M/E: # TMat: v Tech: Lang: MRec: # Srce: d

OCLC order (italics = 000 codes; SS = system supplied): OCLC: SS Rec stat: n Entered: SS Replaced: SS Used: SS Type: g ELvl: Srce: d Audn: Ctrl: # Lang: BLvl: m Form: GPub: Time: MRec: # Ctry: Desc: TMat: v Tech: DtSt: Dates: ,

Dates flowchart Videos


VIDEO DATES FLOWCHART

Y

N

Y

NN

N

N

N NN

Y Y

Y

Y

Y YPUBD present?

Give the PUBD of the ed. (A 1.4F1)

COPD dif?

COPD of VD?*


COPD of VD?*

Give as COPD (A 1.4F6)

Guess a PUBD (A 1.4F7) ***Re-

release?

Add as Edition and History note --Release (L 7.7B7)

***Prod date?

Add as Edition and History note --Production (L 7.7B7)

Add as Publication note --Production (A 7.4F2)

Same med.?

DONE

A 1.4F1—Give the PUBD of the ed. 260 $c1998. 008 s 1998,

A 1.4F5—Add the COPD 260 $c1986, c1985. 008 t 1986,1985

A 1.4F6--Give as COPD 260 $cc1988. 008 s 1988,

A 1.4F7—Guess a PUBD 260 $c[199-] 008 s 199u,

L 7.7B7 Add as Edition and History note--Production 260 $c1990. 500 $aOriginally produced as a motion picture in 1988. 008 p 1990,1988 (content unchanged) 008 s 1990, (content changed)

A 7.4F2 Add as Publication note--Production 260 $c2001. 500 $aMade in 1986. 008 p 2001,1986 (content unchanged) 008 s 2001, (content changed)

Give later as guessed, add COPD (A 1.4F7) 260 $c[1991], c1989. 008 t 1991,1989

Y

Pub-lished?

N Give the date of creation (A 7.4F3)

A 7.4F3--Give the date of creation 260 $c1984. 500 $aFilmed in the producer's backyard, May 24, 1984. 008 s 1984,

L 7.7B7 Add as Edition and History note--Release 260 $c1981. 500 $aOriginally released in 1979. 008 r 1981,1979 (content/medium

unchanged) 008 s 1981, (content/medium changed)

PUBD: Publication date of video COPD: Copyright date of video * COPD of VD: is the COPD for the whole video itself, e.g., on video label **Later date: is there a later date available, e.g., package & design © ***Re-release: does the resource give an original release date (not © date) ***Prod date: does the resource give an original production date or © date of the original

Later date?**

Give later as guessed, add COPD (A 1.4F7)

NOTES:

Serials







Remember to take the information that you are trying to match from the appropriate prescribed source of information (see italics in column on left). If no source is listed, the information can come from any source. In this table, t.p., etc. = title page, other preliminaries (incl. t.p. verso and covers), and colophon. Field Criteria 008/34 S/L If the record is 'latest entry' (1) you may create a 'successive entry' (0) record. (OCLC) 245 $anp Title (title page)

Not OK if: • a word other than an article (e.g., A, An, The), preposition (e.g., of, over, under, with), or

conjunction (e.g., and, or, but) is added, changed, reordered, or dropped within the first 5 words (or 6, if there is an initial article) of the title ($a$n$p)—but see below. (A21.2)

• a word is added anywhere in the title ($a$n$p) that changes the meaning of the title or indicates a change in scope—but see below. (A21.2)

• a different corporate body is named anywhere in the title. (A21.2) • the title is given in multiple languages and the title that was in the language that was given

as the title proper is dropped. (A21.2) • the serial is given a completely different title. (A21.2) OK if:

• a word is added, changed, reordered, or dropped after the first 5 words (or 6, if there is an initial article) of the title ($a$n$p), as long as the meaning of the title or scope of the material is not changed (A21.2/OCLC)

• the only change is in the representation of a word or words: spelling; abbrev. or sign or symbol vs. full form; Arabic numbers vs. Roman; numbers or dates vs. spelled out; hyphenated vs. not; one-word compounds vs. two-word compounds; acronym or initialism vs. full form; change in grammar (e.g., singular vs. plural). (A21.2)

• an article, preposition, or conjunction is added, deleted, or changed anywhere in the title. (A21.2)

• the name of a corporate body, or its subordinate unit, or the grammar connecting the name to the title is changed anywhere in the title, e.g., a variant form of the name of the same body. (A21.2)

• punctuation is the only change, including initialisms with or without separating punctuation and words with or without hyphens. (A21.2)

• the order of parallel titles changes, as long as the title that was chosen as the title proper still appears as a parallel title. (A21.2)

• later issues have a parallel title that was not on the first issue or do not have a parallel title that was on the first issue. (OCLC)

• words linking the title to the numbering are added, deleted, or changed. (A21.2) • different titles are used on other issues of a serial according to a regular pattern. (A21.2) • a title fluctuates unintentionally (OCLC) • a word in a list is added, deleted, or changed in its order, as long as it does not change the

meaning or scope of the resource. (A21.2) • a word is added or deleted anywhere in the title that indicates the type of resource that it

is, e.g., magazine, journal, newsletter, etc. (A21.2) • an issuing body is added or deleted from the end of a title (OCLC) In case of doubt, consider changes to be MINOR and make notes and (if useful) added

entries for them.

Serials Quick match criteria

8-12 Cataloging With AACR2 and MARC21 (9/15/2005)—Update 2, Sep 2005

Field Criteria 245 $h GMD

OK if: the absence or presence of, or difference in the GMD is the only difference in the record. But usually if there is a difference, then other fields are different too; so GMD is a very quick indication of a problem; check 300$a. (OCLC)

245 $b Par / Subtitle (title page)

OK if: a parallel title or subtitle is added, deleted, or changed; make a note if considered important (A121D3 and A12.1E2).

245 $c Responsibility (title page)

Not OK if: the corporate body or person that was the main entry is no longer responsible. (A21.3)

OK if: the statement of responsibility is added, deleted or changed (except above); make a note if considered important (A12.1F5)

1XX Main entry (title page)

Not OK if: • the same corporate body remains the main entry, but the heading for the corporate body

changes (i.e., the name of the corporate body changes). (A21.3) • there is a change in responsibility that means there will be a change in the name of a

corporate body that is used as a qualifier in a uniform title. (A21.3) • single responsibility for the entire serial is different OK if: there is a change in a place used as a qualifier in a uniform title. (OCLC)

250 $a Edition (t.p., etc.)

Not OK if: there is any variation in statements re content, abridgment / enlargement, number or language or geography. (OCLC)

OK if: added or deleted on later issues, or if change does not require a new record (e.g., '1st ed.', 'Pbk. ed.') (A 12.2F1), or if statement is really numbering (362)

260 $b Publ (t.p., etc.)

OK if: there is a change in publisher, as long as it is not also the main entry or a used as a qualifier in a uniform title. (A12.D2 / OCLC)

260 $a Place (t.p., etc.)

OK if: there is a change in place of publication. (A12.4C2 / OCLC)

260 $c Date (t.p., etc.)

Not OK if: there is a true difference in beginning or ending publication date, or © date used as publication date.

OK if: the difference is due to cataloging interpretation. (OCLC) 300 $a Extent (whole)

Not OK if: there is a change in the physical format of a serial, e.g., paper vs. CDROM or microform, or if LP vs. RP, etc. (OCLC)

OK if: other physical details or dimensions change; if important make a note. (A12.5D1-2) 310 / 008Freq Frequency

Not OK if: there is really a difference in frequency (e.g., annual vs. quarterly), look for other details too. (OCLC)

OK if: there is a change in the frequency of a serial. (OCLC) 362 $a Numbering (whole)

OK if: numbering system changes or if it begins over in the same form, with or without wording such as 'new series'. (A12.3G)

4XX Series (whole)

OK if: a series statement is added, deleted, or changed; either add as additional 4XX or make a note. (A12.6B2 / OCLC)


Not OK if: the language of the item is different to the language(s) given in a note in the record. (OCLC)

500 Edition note

Not OK if: a note about edition changes, e.g., condensed, is needed and not present, or present and not applicable. (OCLC)

500Physical desc. note

Not OK if: a note about difference in physical format that affects use is needed and not present, or present and not applicable, e.g., cloth vs. plastic pages. (OCLC)

533 Repr. note

Not OK if: this field is absent, or present, or different (OCLC)

008/23 Form Watch out for 008 Form of item codes: ‘a’, ‘b’, ‘c’ (Microform), ‘d’ (Large print), ‘r’ (Photocopy); look for confirming indications. (OCLC)

010 LCCN

OK if: an LCCN is present on the item and absent from the record or vv. or if it is different in either.

022 ISSN

OK if: an ISSN is present on the item and absent from the record or vv. or if it is different in either. (OCLC)

If a serial changes enough to need a new record, and you have the old record in your system, you must 'close off' the old record: DtSt; Date 2; 260$c; 300$a; 362; 246, 310, 5XX, 785

Editing/cloning/creating records cheatsheet Serials


Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


546 Language

R • • Make a language note unless the language is apparent from the rest of the description, e.g., add if multiple languages are present or if a resource is a translation; used to use 500, change it to 546; if 546 is present, 041 should also be present

p. 3.5-74 A: 12.7B2 {008Lang;

041} 041 Language

codes

R _ • Src: n/a EOF: none Enter codes for languages when the 008Lang is not enough, i.e., when mult.

languages are involved in a resource; if 546 is present, 041 should be added except 'closed captioned'; can have an 041 without a 546; repeat subfields; code in $a must match code in 008Lang unless 008 Lang = 'mul' or blank

p. 3.0-98 {008Lang;

546; 580; 765/767}


proper

R • • Make a note about the source of the title proper, if it is not from the chief source of information, e.g., "Title from cover."; can combine with a 'Description based on' note, but not with a 'Latest issue consulted' note

p. 3.5-28 A: 12.7B3 {245}

500 Variant /


R • • Use this note for general wording about title changes, variant titles, parallel titles, and/or other title information, e.g., "Subtitle varies."

Use 246 instead for wording that includes an actual change of title, variant title, parallel title and/or other title information, e.g., "Title on cover: …"

p. 3.5-21+34 A: 12.7B4-6 {246}

500 Statement of

resp.

R • • Make a note for statements of responsibility that are not given in the 245$c, e.g., the fuller form of a name that is abbrev. elsewhere; add a note about an editor only if he or she is an important identifier, e.g., "Editor, 1960-1999:…"

p. 3.5-30 A: 12.7B7 {245$c;7XX}

Changes: may add a note for minor changes to general statements of responsibility, e.g., changes to editors

550 Resp-Issuing

body

R • • Make a note for responsible corp. bodies not given in 245$c; current and former issuing bodies, and that a resource is an official organ of a society, etc., e.g., "Official journal of: … "; use wording from resource

p. 3.5-77 A: 12.7B7 {7XX}

Changes: may add a note for minor changes of issuing bodies {245$c} 580 Linking entry

complexity / Bibliog. history

R • • Make a free text note about the bibliographic history of a serial (e.g., "Previous ed.: …"), or about important relationships for a serial if no linking 76X-78X is available or if a note cannot be generated from 76X-78X to express the relationship between any immediately preceding/succeeding, or simultaneously issued resource (e.g., "Issued also in a German translation.")

p. 3.5-81 A: 12.7B8 {76X-78X}

525 Supplement

note

R • • Make a note when supplements are irregular, informal, numerous or unimportant and not described separately, or a free text note if there is no linking 770/772 or if a note cannot be generated from 770/772, e.g., "Numerous supplements."

p. 3.5-59 A: 12.7B8 {770/772}

500 Edition

R • •

Changes: may add a note for minor changes to edition statements, e.g., "Ed. statement varies: International ed., 1998- "

p. 3.5-12 A: 12.7B9 {250}

515 Numbering

peculiarities

R • • Make a note to explain periods that are not calendar years, or irregularities or peculiarities in numbering or publication patterns, e.g., "Report year ends June 30."

p. 3.5-50 A: 12.7B10 {362}

500 Publication,

etc.

R • • Make a note about publication details not given in 260, e.g., "Privately printed."

Changes: may add a note for changes to place &/or publisher (260 someday)

p. 3.5-25 A: 12.7B11 {260}

500 Physical

description

R • • Make a note about physical description details that could not be given in 300, e.g., "Printed on hand-made paper."

Changes: May add a note for minor changes to 300$b info.

p. 3.5-22 A: 12.7B12 {300}

500 Accomp.

material

R • • Make a note instead of 300$e to provide more details about accompanying material for all issues, e.g., location, different titles, etc., e.g., "Accompanied by slides in pockets."; also use this note instead of 300$e if accompanying material is irregular, or becomes available for all later issues or to indicate the frequency of the material, e.g., "CD accompanies every 10th issue."

p. 3.5-7 A: 12.7B13 {006; 300$e}

Serials Editing/cloning/creating records cheatsheet

8-20 Cataloging With AACR2 and MARC21 (9/15/2005)—Update 2, Sep 2005

Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


500 Series


Changes: May add a note for changes to series information that are too frequent or too complicated to express with 490/8XX

p. 3.5-27 A: 12.7B14 {4XX}

521 Target

audience

R _ •



p. 3.5-57 A: 12.7B15


R • •


p. 3.5-61A: 12.7B16

Note N $a The other format of the resource, e.g., "Issued also on microfiche." Source N ;$b Where the other format is available from Conditions N ;$c Cost, etc. of the other format Order # N ;$d Stock no., etc. of the other format URI R $u Link to an Internet site {856} 555 Cumulative

index

R _ •

I1=# ("Indexes:") Make a note about cumulative indexes [same publisher]; use 500 for an

"Includes index" note.

p. 3.5-78 A: 12.7B17

Cum index N $a E.g., "Vols. 1 (1917)-10 (1944) in v. 11, no. 1." URI N $u Link to an Internet site {856} 520 Summary

R _ •


p. 3.5-54 A: 12.7B18

I1=# ("Summary:"), 0-3 (other display constants), 8 (no display constant) Note N $a Brief summary note Expansion N $b Longer summary note, if necessary URI R $u Link to an Internet site EDIT/DE/ORIG: check for typos 504 Bibliography

R • •

Make this note in the standard LC format: "Includes bibliographical references"—if references are scattered (references

will always be scattered across issues of serials)

p. 3.5-38 A: 12.7B19 {008Cont: b}

500 Index

R • • Combine this note with 504 if one is present Either "Includes index." or "Includes indexes."

p. 3.5-13 A: 12.7B19

500 Unformatted

contents

R • •

Use this note for a vague note on contents, e.g., "Contains excerpts of song lyrics."

p. 3.5-32 A: 12.7B19

500 Numbers

R • • Use this note for numbers you don't know what else to do with E.g., "10003."

p. 3.5-19 A: 12.7B20 {010/020/…}

590 Copy describ.

R • •


p. 3.5-83 A: 12.7B21



p. 3.5-44 A: 12.7B21 {540}

Note N $a The restrictions imposed, e.g., "Classified." Jurisdiction R ;$b The agent imposing the restrictions, e.g., "Secretary of the Treasury." 540 Terms govern.

use/reprod.


p. 3.5-68 A: 12.7B21 {506}

Note N $a The local restriction or permission, e.g., "Public performance permitted." Jurisdiction R ;$b The agent imposing the restriction or granting permission, e.g., "[Publisher]" Institution N $5 Code for the institution to which the special restrictions or permissions apply 500 Description

based on

R • • If 1st issue is not available, must add a 'Description based on' note; enter numbering as per 362; e.g., "Description based on: Vol. 3, no. 3 (May/June 1975)."; if earlier issue becomes available, change description and this note; if 1st issue becomes available, change description and remove this note

p. 3.5-15 A: 12.7B23

Editing/cloning/creating records cheatsheet Serials


Field R I1 I2 SubF

Src EOF Hints


500 Latest issue

consulted

R • • Add if any part of the description is not based on the first issue; enter numbering as per 362; e.g., "Latest issue consulted: no. 12 (June 1999)."; if later issues need more changes, change this note to correspond; LC will not combine with other notes; delete this note if a serial ceases

p. 3.5-15 A: 12.7B23

6XX Subject

headings (600, 610,

611, 630, 650, 651, 655)


I1= type of name, or non-filing, or blank; I2 = heading source; most common: 0=Library of Congress SH (preferred) 1=LC Annotated Children's SH 4=Local subject headings 7=Source is provided in $2 Consider adding new 655 (genre/form headings)—patrons like them

p. 3.6-1 A: 22-25




711, 730)

R _ _ Src: any EOF: period, question mark, exclamation mark, hyphen, or parenthesis, but

ending punctuation precedes $3, $4, $5 I1= type of name or non-filing; I2 = 2 (analytic—for a part), # (not analytic) Establish headings—choice of name/form of name/coding; verify against

authority files

p. A: 21-25 {245$c;

500 Resp}


EDIT/DE/ORIG: add useful added entries, e.g.: prominent corporate bodies; related works; analytics; people or bodies from 245$c; editors if important for access; issuing bodies from 550; other people or bodies if needed

DE: delete added entries that do not apply to the new edition 765-787 Linking

entries

R _ _ Src: any EOF: None, unless the last word ends with its own punctuation, or $a is the last subfield—$a ends with a period; ending punc. precedes $7

Use these linking fields to provide machine links between related records; they may also be used to generate notes

p. A 12.7B8 {525; 530;

580} 8XX Series added

entries (800, 810,

811, 830)

R _ •




p. 3.7-10 A: 21.30L



char.

R

Src: n/a EOF: none It is useful to add codes for accompanying material or other aspects of a serial

that is electronic, sound, or video, etc.

p. 3.0-19 {300$e;


fixed field

R

Src: n/a EOF: none Code for the physical form of non-print accompanying material; it is not

necessary to code for print materials

p. 3.0-22 {245$h;

300$a$e; 500 AccM}

008 Fixed field

N

Src: n/a EOF: none Add codes for all 008 positions from the 008 Serials codes list

p. 3.0-65

M21 order (SS = system supplied) Entrd: SS DtSt: Dates: Ctry: Ills: Audn: Form: Cont: GPub: Conf: Fest: Indx: M/E: # LitF: Biog: Lang: MRec: # Srce: d

OCLC order (italics = 000 codes; SS = system supplied): OCLC: SS Rec stat: n Entered: SS Replaced: SS Used: SS Type: a ELvl: Srce: d Audn: Ctrl: # Lang: BLvl: m Form: Conf: Biog: MRec: # Ctry: Cont: GPub: LitF: Indx: Desc: Ills: Fest: DtSt: Dates:

NOTES:

Documents

Highlights Cataloging with AACR2 and MARC21 Second Edition ... · Highlights Cataloging with AACR2 and MARC21 (9/22/2005) —Update 2, Sep 2005 1 Cataloging with AACR2 and MARC21